RTA STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL

1.
1.1

INTRODUCTION
Purpose This Manual has been prepared for the purpose of standardising the preparation of drawings, simplifying various details and securing uniformity in appearance and style consistent with the subject involved, with resultant saving of time and effort. This Manual has the purpose of maintaining a consistent quality of drafting standard for structural drawings for bridges and related structures prepared by or for the Authority or for bridges and related structures which will become the property of the Authority in the future. Scope This Manual sets RTA policy and guidelines on drafting and detailing issues for bridges and related structures for all new, rehabilitation and other designs for all RTA funded bridges as well as bridges that will become the property of the RTA in the future. What it contains This Manual contains information and advice, including the minimum requirements, for the detailing of drawings for bridges and related structures. Who is it for? This Manual is designed for use by all personnel carrying out work for RTA funded bridges or bridges that will become the property of the RTA in the future, whether responsible for the design, administering the design and documentation or the construction of new bridges or the rehabilitation, maintenance or widening of existing bridges. Amendments to the Manual Any necessary amendments to the Manual, caused by change in policy or process, will be issued as required to maintain currency of the Manual Contact Details For futher information regarding the Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual, please contact: Greg Forster Senior Bridge Engineer, Policy and Specification RTA Bridge Engineering Pod F, Level 5 Octagon Building 110 George Street, Parramatta NSW 2150 Phone: Facsimile: 8837 – 0850 8837 - 0054

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL

BRIDGE ENGINEERING ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY BRANCH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY NEW SOUTH WALES

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Document Control

DOCUMENT CONTROL
DOCUMENT/SECTION RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 Section 10 Section 11 Section 12 Section 13 Section 14 Section 15 Section 16 Section 17 Section 18 Section 19 Section 20 Section 21 Section 22 Section 23 Section 23 – Appendix A Section 24 Section 25 Section 26 Section 27 Section 28 Section 29 Section 30 Section 31 Section 32 ISSUE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REVISION 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 COMMENT

Figures revised for new title block information

New section

OTB005

Issue 1 – Revision 6 (05 May 2011)

Page 1 of 1

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION No 1 2 TITLE SCOPE DEFINITIONS Figure 2.1 3 TYPES OF DRAWINGS 3.1 General 3.2 Definitions 3.3 Sketches 3.4 Proposal Sketches 3.5 Standard Drawings 3.5.1 RTA Standard Bridge Drawings 3.5.2 Project Specific Standard Drawings 3.6 Registered Drawings 3.7 Registration of Sketches and Drawings in Bridge Engineering 3.8 CAD File Names for Registered Drawings 3.9 CAD Numbers and CAD Filenames for Sketches 3.10 Registration of Drawings with Micrographics Figure 3.4.1 Figure 3.4.2 Figure 3.8.1 Figure 3.9.1 DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 Sheet Sizes Title Blocks Order of Sheets in a set of Drawings Standard Drawing Sheets Local Government Area Names Figure 4.2.1(a) Figure 4.2.1(b) Figure 4.2.1(c) Figure 4.4.1 Figure 4.4.2 Figure 4.4.3 4.1 4.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.6 PAGE 1.1 1.1

4

5

SETTING OUT 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 General Chainages Compass Bearing Co-ordinates Piles Footings Piers and Abutments Bearings 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4 5.4

OTB005

Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

Page 1 of 8

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Table of Contents

5.9 5.10 5.11

Girders Deck Barrier Railings Figure 5.1 – Sheet 1 Figure 5.1 – Sheet 2 Figure 5.3 Figure 5.4 Figure 5.6 Figure 5.9 Figure 5.10(a) Figure 5.10(b) Figure 5.11

5.4 5.6 5.8

6

FOUNDATIONS 6.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.3 6.4 6.5 General Piling Precast Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles Prestressed Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles Cast-in Place Reinforced Concrete Piles Tubular Steel Driven Piles H Section Steel Driven Piles Pile/Pile Cap Combinations Spread Footings Rock Anchors Figure 6.2.5 Figure 6.3.1 Figure 6.4.1(a) Figure 6.4.1(b) Figure 6.4.1(c) Figure 6.5 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.2 6.2 6.4 6.4 6.5 6.5 6.6

7

DRAWING PRACTICE 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.2 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 Linework Text Dimensions General Order of accuracy for Dimensions Reduced Levels and Chainages Dimension Lines, Projection Lines and Leaders Scales on drawings Plan Views Elevations Sections Views Details Figure 7.1 Figure 7.3.1 Figure 7.3.2 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.1 7.2 7.2 7.3 7.3 7.4 7.4 7.4 7.5 7.5

8

SLOPING FEATURES 8.1 8.2 Slopes and Batters Grades, Crossfalls and Superelevations 8.1 8.1

OTB005

Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011)

Page 2 of 8

2 Titles Subtitles Figure 13.4 16 WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS 16.4 Welding Surface Texture of Metals Materials Use of asterisks and similar Symbols Figure 11.1 12.1 10.1 14 CHECKING OF DRAWINGS 14.1 11.3 General Lines Levels and Intervals 9.2 11 SYMBOLS 11.2 14.1 10 ABBREVIATIONS 10.1 15.1 9.2 11.1 14.4.3 General Standard of Work Required Projects Designed and Constructed Under Contract Figure 16.1 13.1 16.1 14.3 General General Notes Particular Notes 12.4 15.2 13.1 12.1 16.2 14.2 16.1 15.1 15.2 15.3 11.1 13.2 OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011) Page 3 of 8 .1 9.1 15.1 11.1 9.1.2 15 ISSUE AND AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS 15.3 General Marking of Check Prints Amendment of Drawings 14.1 11.2 16.2.1 15.3 11.1 10.1 12.2 Figure 15.1 Acceptable Abbreviations Table 10.5 15.3 15.1 Figure 15.1 13 TITLES AND SUB-TITLES 13.2 12.2 Standard Abbreviations Table 10.1 16.6 General Submission of Drawings for Approval Issue of Advance Copy Drawings Amendment of Approved Drawings Procedure following Amendment of Approved Drawings Authorisation for release of Amended Drawings Figure 15.2 15.1 10.1 11.4.2 12 NOTES AND REFERENCES 12.2 9.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents 9 CONTOURS 9.3 15.

4 18.3 18.8 18.1(c) Figure 20.4.1 21 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 21.2 21.1 18.3 18.1 19.1 21.1 18.4.4.10(a) Figure 18.3 21.1 21.6 18.6 18.1 19.4 21.1(d) 20.10(c) Figure 18.10(d) Figure 18.5 18.1 18.1 General Figure 20.3 18.4 General Minimum extent of Geotechnical Investigation Bridge Construction Contracts invited by the Authority Bridge Construction as part of Design Construct Maintain Projects 19.6 18.4.2 21.4.6 18.6 18.2 18.1(b) Figure 20.10 General Concept Sketches Registration and Numbering Information to be shown on Proposal Sketches Plan View Elevation Typical Cross Section Skew Diagram Vertical Alignment Diagram Site Plan Locality Plan General Notes Title Block Drawing Conventions Orientation Locality Plan Site Plan Issue of Preliminary Sketches Submission of Proposal Sketches for Approval by Client Amendments to Approved Proposals Preparation of Sketches for Heritage Issue Consideration Figure 18.4 18.1 21.2.5 18.10(b) Figure 18.1.1.9 18.4 18.1(a) and (b) Figure 18.1 19.1 18.4.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents 17 LOCALITY AND SITE PLANS 17.1 17.1 17.7 18.2 18.4.1 18 CONCEPT AND PROPOSAL SKETCHES 18.1 19.4 18.3 18.1.2 18.4.6 19 GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION 19.4 18.4.8 18.6 18.1 18.1 18.1.1(a) Figure 20.2 19.1 20 COVER SHEETS 20.6 18.4.2 18.3 OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011) Page 4 of 8 .2 18.2 21.9 18.3 19.2 Locality Plans Site Plans 17.10(e) 18.4 18.4 18.1(a) and (b) Figure 18.6.5 General Plan View Elevation Typical Cross Section Skew Diagram 21.6.5 18.1 18.7 18.6 18.

3.2.3 23.5 21.3.1(c) Figure 21.3 23.3.1(a) Figure 21.1(d) Figure 21.2.6 24 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 24.2 23.3 General Pre-tensioned Prestressed Concrete PSC Planks Precast Prestressed Concrete Girders Post-tensioned Prestressed Concrete General Tendon Profiles Ducts Figure 24.1.1 22.2 24.1 22.2 23.8 Vertical Alignment Diagram Site Plan General Notes Figure 21.3 Figure 22.2(b) – Sheet 2 Figure 24.3 21.4.2 23.2 22.4 22.1 24.2 Development Lengths for Bars in Compression Table 23.3 24.1 23.1 24.3 OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011) Page 5 of 8 .1 Figure 22.2 24.3 Slicing of Reinforcement Lapped Splices for Bars in Tension Lapped Splices for Bars in Compression Table 23.3 Layout Bar and Fabric Detailing Development and Lap Lengths General Development Lengths for Bars in Tension Table 23.4 23.1.3.2 22.2 24.1(a) Figure 24.1 23.2.1 24.1 22.1 24.2 23.1 24.2 22.1 23.1 24.1(c) 24.4.3.5 22.1(b) Figure 24.3.3 23.6 General Dimensioning Plan Views Elevations Sections Construction Joints Figure 22.4 23.3 21.6 22.3.4.3 22.2 24.5 23.2 Figure 24.1(b) Figure 21.6 21.3 23.5 23.3.3.2 24.4 Figure 22.3.2.1.5 Figure 22.1 23.3.4 23.5 23.1 Table 23.2 24.3.2 23.2.2 23 STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING 23.4 22 CONCRETE DETAILING 22.2(b) – Sheet 1 Figure 24.1.1 24.2.2.2 Figure 22.3.2 22.3.5 23.7 21.3.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents 21.2 23.

1(e) Figure 24.1 26.1 26.3 25.1 26.1 26.1 26.3.9 25.2 27.2 26.1 26.3 27 BEARINGS 27.3 26.5.3.6.2 27.5 26.3.5.1(c) Figure 25.2 26.2 27.2 26.3.2 26.2 26.3.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents Figure 24.3.3 26.4 25.1 27.2 26.3 25.5 25.3.3 OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011) Page 6 of 8 .1 27.2 25.1 27.1 25.5.8 25.2 25.2 27.2 26.4(b) 27.3 25.7 General Dimensions Traffic Barrier Railings Pedestrian Railings Geometry Grades and Vertical Curves Horizontal Curves Joints Post Spacing Traffic Barrier Railings Pedestrian Railings Panel Lengths Traffic Barrier Railings Pedestrian Railings Termination of Railings at Ends of Structures Figure 26.3.1 26.1 27.3 General Reduced Levels of Bearings Bearing Types Elastomeric Bearing Strips and Elastomeric Bearing Pads Laminated Elastomeric Bearings Proprietary Bearing Types Figure 27.4 26.1(f) 25 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK 25.1 26.1 25.3.2 26.1 25.2 25.1(a) Figure 25.3 25.3.3.1 26.6 26.3 26.2 25.2.2 25.3 27.3.1 26.1(d) Figure 24.4 26.4 25.1 26.2 25.12 General Standard Items Non-standard Items Closing Dimensions Web Diagrams Stud Welded Shear Connectors Web Stiffeners Corner Cuts and Cutouts Lifting Lugs Protective Treatment Plate Nomenclature Intermittent Welds Figure 25.1 26.2 Figure 26.4 26 BARRIER RAILINGS 26.1 Figure 26.1 Figure 27.1(d) Figure 25.11 25.3.10 25.2.3 25.1(b) Figure 25.4(a) Figure 27.6 25.3 26.3 26.1 27.7 25.6.

2.2 28.1 31.6 28.1 31.4 31.2.2.2.5 31.3 31.1 Figure 31.2.2 31.2.1.2 Figure 28.2.6 29.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents 28 DECK JOINTS 28.2.2 28.2 30.2 31.1 29.2.9 31.5 28.2.2 28.3 General Drawings Linework and Shading Figure 30.4 OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011) Page 7 of 8 .1 28.1 30.4 31.1 28.2.1 31.4 31.2 29.3 31.7 General Detailing of Joints Small Movement Joints Compression Seal Joints Steel Fabricated Interlocking Finger Joints Elastomeric Strip Seal Joints Proprietary Aluminium SawTooth Joints Modular Joints Other Joint Types Figure 28.3 29.4 28.2.3(b) Figure 28.4 31.1 30.2 31.1 29.2.2.2.1 28.1 31.3(c) Figure 28.1 31.7 31.3 31.4 31.2 29 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK 29.6 31.4 Figure 28.3 31.10 General Geometry Grades and Vertical Curves Height Horizontal Curves Curvature of Posts and Screens Joints Post Spacing Retrofitting application requirements Steel Mesh Panel Sizes Fixing of Steel Mesh Panels Termination of Safety Screens at Ends of Structure End Treatment Application of Decorative Panels Alternative Safety Screens Figure 31.7 General Protection Angles and Expansion Joint Angles Dowels and Dowel Cap Assemblies Bolt Assemblies Bearing Cover Plates Concrete Safety Barrier Cover Plates for Expansion Joints Figure 29.4 29.2 28.2.2 29.5 28.2 31 BRIDGE SAFETY SCREENS 31.4.2 29.2 31.1 29.2.1 31.2 31.1 30.8 31.1 28.2 28.2 28.2 31.3 28.4 29.1 31.1 31.1 Figure 30.4.1 31.3 Figure 31.3(a) Figure 28.3 29.2 30.1.2.2 28.4 30 BRIDGE WIDENINGS 30.1 28.

2 Figure 32.5 32.3 32.1 Figure 32.3 32.1 32.1 32.3.5 OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 May 2011) Page 8 of 8 .2 Figure 32.7.10 32.10.1 Figure 32.4 32.8 32.4.1 Figure 32.4 32.1 32.2 Figure 32.6 32.1 Figure 32.2 32.2 32.2 32.2.8.9 32.3.1 Figure 32.3 32.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Table of Contents 32 BRIDGE SIZE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS 32.2.11 General Cover Sheets General Arrangement Drawings Cast-in-place Base Slabs Cast-in-place Apron Slabs Precast Reinforced Concrete Crown Units and End Units Cast-in-place Headwalls Cast-in-place Wing Walls Inlet and Outlet Protection Culvert Extensions Bar Shapes Diagram Figure 32.10.2 Figure 32.3 32.4 32.7.7 32.4 32.4 Figure 32.1 Figure 32.4.2.2.4.3 Figure 32.2 32.3 Figure 32.

SECTION 1 SCOPE .

7 of this Manual. concrete retaining walls and lined channels. archival of records or other purposes associated with various functions of the Authority. together with individual electronic drawings files (in either dgn. For work commissioned outside of the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section. or dxf format) and a multipage pdf file that can be read by and stored on the Authority’s equipment. tunnels. This Manual has the purpose of maintaining a consistent quality of drafting standard for structural drawings prepared by or for the Authority or which will become the property of the Authority in the future. concrete retaining walls and lined channels that are required for the purposes of state records and all relevant sections should be read by all designers and drafting officers that are involved in the preparation of design documentation for the Authority. however the details are required to be provided in the drawings for the future management and maintenance of bridges. the relevant Senior Bridge Engineer or the Principal Bridge Engineer prior to the commencement of any drafting work. culverts. the Manual generally complies with the Standard. Any exceptions or deviations from AS 1100.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Scope 1 SCOPE This Manual has been prepared for the purpose of standardising the preparation of drawings. Some of the requirements as stated in this Manual may not be required for construction purposes (eg setting out of the bridge deck as detailed in Clause 5. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . dwg.501. The use of this information should lead to the best and most economical solution to many structural drafting and detailing issues. This Manual contains information and advice for the detailing of drawings for bridges (including associated furniture). culverts.10). Where consultants have been commissioned to complete bridge designs for the Authority or the design of bridges which will become the property of the Authority in the future.501 are noted in the text as appropriate. with resultant saving of time and effort. Where this Manual includes methods that are included in AS 1100. Any matters of drafting not covered by this Manual shall conform to the requirements set down in the various parts of AS 1100 – Technical Drawing – Structural Engineering Drawing and all other relevant Australian Standards. simplifying various details and securing uniformity in appearance and style consistent with the subject involved. See Clause 15. Structural Drafting. tunnels. any request for approval to relax the standards set out in this Manual must be addressed to the RTA representative that commissioned the work and who must consider the matter in consultation with the Manager. This Manual sets out the minimum requirements for the preparation of drawings for bridges. the consultant shall supply the Authority with an A1 size set of the approved/accepted drawings on tracing paper.

SECTION 2 DEFINITIONS .

Road and Traffic Engineering . pavement and safety barriers a reinforced concrete slab supported on the abutment curtain wall and the approach fill a mixture of bituminous binder and aggregate with or without with a mineral filler produced hot in a mixing plant.Glossary of Terms Road Design and Construction The RTA Road Design Guide Abutment Afflux the part of the substructure which supports the superstructure at its extremities the rise in water level on the upstream side of a construction in a stream (bridge or culvert) relative to the water level on the downstream side of the construction the geometric form of the centreline (or other reference line) of a carriageway with respect to the horizontal and vertical axes horizontal .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Definitions 2 DEFINITIONS The following list of definitions of terms commonly used on bridge drawings is provided for the guidance. based on an origin determined from observations of mean sea level at tide guage stations.5 to 1 a device for transmitting horizontal and vertical forces of a bridge superstructure to the supporting structure Alignment - Approaches Approach Slab Asphalt - Australian Height Datum Bailey Bridge - - Base Centreline Batter Bearing (structural) - OTB005 Issue 1 .Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 1 of 7 .1 . A more comprehensive list will be found in: AS/NZS 1100.501 .elevation geometry of the road a relatively short length of carriageway leading up to a bridge. uniform throughout Australia. The list of definitions listed below as well as those adopted for use by AS 5100 should be used in preference to other terms. located at more than 30 points along the Australian coastline a temporary bridge structure of latticed steel members designed for rapid assembly from prefabricated parts – usually used in emergency situations to effect necessary repairs to structures the pegged centreline of the road alignment the slope of an embankment or wall given in the ratio of horizontal to vertical eg 2 to 1. delivered spread and compacted while hot – used as a road surface a level datum. 1.Technical Drawing AS 1348. including embankments.plan geometry of the road vertical .

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Definitions

Bearing (surveying)

-

The bearing of a line is the angle measured clockwise from grid north to the subject line and is given in degrees, minutes and seconds. The bearing of the Control Line shall always be given in the direction of increasing chainage along the line. a defined mark of a permanent nature, the level of which, relative to some datum, has been determined or assumed and to which the level of other points may be related having physical properties similar to those of bitumen or tar, or containing substances having such properties Computer Aided Drafting that portion of a road or bridge devoted particularly to the use of vehicles inclusive of shoulders and auxillary lanes shall mean concrete which is cast directly into it’s final position generally vertical or inclined load bearing members that form part of a pier. The portion of a cast-in-place pile that significantly extends above the existing surface level shall also be termed a column shall mean a reinforced concrete barrier, which conforms to the Barrier shape and height requirements of the Australian Standard AS 5100 – Bridge Design, placed a nominal distance from the centreline of carriageway a provision made in a structure or pavement to allow contraction of Joint components, induced by temperature change or other causes, to occur in a controlled manner a joint made during the placing of concrete or pavement base material to divide the work into parts for convenience of construction or to provide for unavoidable interruption to placing lines on a map or plan joining all points of the same level those documents which form part of the "Formal Instrument of Agreement" which is executed between the Contractor and the Principal, and which includes a copy of the Tender, Drawings, Specification, General and Special Conditions of Contract the level shown on the drawings representing the extent of the work in the foundations to be included in a lump sum tender a line, generally at or near the centreline of a road, on which design is based and from which measurements for setting out construction may be conveniently made

Bench Mark

-

Bituminous CAD Carriageway Cast-in-Place (Cast-in-situ) Column

-

Concrete Safety

-

Contraction

-

Construction Joint

-

Contours Contract Documents

-

Contract Level Control Line

-

OTB005

Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 )

Page 2 of 7

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Definitions

Coordinates

-

distances measured in a certain way from fixed straight lines (axes of reference) which intersect at the origin - used to locate a point. Systems include MGA and ISG a short projection supporting a beam at its end and designed to Provide adequate bearing on the structure beneath (a) the thickness of concrete between a reinforcing bar, tendon or duct and the nearest surface of a concrete member (b) the depth of material between the surface of the ground or carriageway and the top of a culvert or pipe a covered channel consisting of one or more adjacent pipes or enclosed cells of rectangular or other shape, for conveying a watercourse or stream below formation level. a narrow continuous reinforced concrete vertical wall forming part of an abutment to prevent the earth fill from spilling into the bearings a defined horizontal or level plane to which the relative elevations of other points may be referred the bridge floor directly carrying traffic loads a required level of the road as a basis for construction which is generally located on a control line, such as a base centreline, a true centreline, or gutter lip line or any other line so nominated shall mean the rear face of the curtain wall or the end of the superstructure concrete as applicable and as shown in Figure 2.1 the surface of the earth formation existing at the bridge site prior to construction of bridge The term Natural Surface shall not be used a space between two parts of a structure or slab formed to allow Joint relative movements to occur the widening at the base of a structure (pier or abutment) to spread the load above to the foundation material that part of the substructure which transfers the structure loads to the foundation material a load bearing member which supports the deck of a bridge a wire basket filled with selected stones used to retain earth or to prevent scour of the earth a coordinate reference system used in surveying part of a pier spanning between the piles or columns that supports the superstructure in a prestressed concrete member, the vertical deflection
Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 3 of 7

Corbel Cover (nominal)

-

Culvert

-

Curtain Wall

-

Datum Deck Designed Surface Level

-

End of Deck

-

Existing Surface Level Expansion Footing Foundations Girder Gabion Grid Headstock Hog
OTB005

-

-

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Definitions

caused by the application of prestress the lowest portion of the internal surface of a culvert or drain a raised border of rigid material formed at the edge of a carriageway – can be either concrete or timber unreinforced concrete, commonly used in a thin layer to provide a clean even surface for support of reinforcement during construction the highest portion of the internal surface of a culvert or drain the distance between the ends of the deck (see definition of latter) a reinforced concrete beam placed a short distance from the abutment that supports the pavement and anchors horizontal forces for the reinforced concrete pavement a reinforced concrete slab extension of a reinforced concrete pavement that is supported on the abutment at one end and on a pavement anchor beam at the other end shall mean a railing, fabricated from either steel or aluminium, Barrier which consists of two rails separated by balusters, placed on the edges of a bridge structure for pedestrian safety a part of the substructure which supports the superstructure at ends of span and which transfers the loads on the superstructure to the foundations

Invert Kerb Mass Concrete

Obvert Overall Length of Deck Pavement Anchor Beam Pavement Transition Pedestrian

-

-

-

Pier

-

Pile Pile Cap Post-tensioning

-

shall mean a slender member driven into or formed in the ground to resist loads a structural member that connects and distributes the load from above to a group of piles a method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned after the concrete has hardened eg segmental box girders, cast-in-place box girders and voided slabs concrete in which effective internal stresses are introduced deliberately, usually by means of tensioned steel tendons, prior to the application of service loading to the structure a method of prestressing in which tendons are tensioned before the concrete is placed eg PSC Planks, Super T Girders and PSC Driven Piles a steel section, usually a rolled steel angle, cast into the end of the structure or approach slab to protect concrete against damage by construction plant and vehicular traffic those services owned by other authorities, e.g. water mains, gas mains, power and telephone lines etc
Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 4 of 7

Prestressed Concrete (PSC) Pretensioning

-

-

Protection Angle Public Utilities
OTB005

-

-

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Definitions

Reduced Level Reinforced Concrete Reinforcement Reinforced Soil

-

a level relative to an agreed datum (see definition of Datum) concrete containing more than 0.2% by volume of reinforcing steel bars or fabric, usually of steel, embedded in concrete for the purposes of resisting particular stresses a method of constructing retaining walls or abutments in which suitable filling is retained by vertical steel or concrete units anchored by friction into the fill by means of galvanized steel strips a route trafficable by motor vehicles screens attached to bridges over roads or railways in order to prevent objects being dropped or thrown toward vehicles or trains below. The screens usually consist of steel posts or frames attached to concrete surfaces. Welded steel mesh panels are fixed to and span between the posts or frames and are attached to the concrete surface is a straight reference line between known fixed points from which the bridge structure is set out the angle between a line at right angles to the pavement centreline and the pier or abutment of a bridge (i) (ii) for end spans, the distance between the end of the superstructure and the centre of the nearest pier for intermediate spans, the distance between centres of piers

Road Safety Screens

-

Setting Out Line

-

Skew Angle – Right – Left Span Length -

Note: for design purposes the span length is the length between centres of supports Specification Substructure a detailed description of materials and workmanship required for the construction of the structure that part of the structure, i.e. piers and abutments which support the superstructure and which transfers the structure load to the foundation material the continuous transverse slope normally given to the carriageway at horizontal curves that part of the structure which is supported by the piers and abutments – it includes the deck slab, girders / planks, railings etc the documents required by a contractor to produce his tender for a contract (these include a description of the contract work, general and special conditions of contract the specification and drawings, together with estimated quantities and a tender form)
OTB005 Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 5 of 7

Superelevation Superstructure Tender Documents

-

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual

Definitions

Tenderer Tendon

-

a person or firm who submits a price for the construction of the Works a tension element usually made up of a number of steel strands or wires, used in a concrete member, to impart prestress shall mean a railing, fabricated from steel, which consists of one or two parallel rails and a series of support posts at varying centres, placed on a reinforced concrete parapet immediately adjacent to traffic lanes to restrict lateral movement of vehicles a frame structure comprised of steel or timber that acts as a beam the area of the cross section of the stream at right angles to the direction of flow, up to the flood level assumed a method for the determination of required waterways and drainage requirements for a structure the widening of an existing pavement or carriageway generally without alteration of level the clear width, measured at right angles to the longitudinal centreline of the bridge, between the inner traffic faces of the bridge, i.e. the bottom inside face of the concrete safety barriers or face of traffic railing, whichever projects inwards the most, or between the bottom of kerbs where kerbs are located forward of traffic or other barriers the clear width, measured at right angles to the longitudinal centreline of the bridge, from the extreme inside portion of the pedestrian barrier to the extreme portion of the footway side of the traffic barrier, truss or girder, or to the bottom of the kerb face the width of that portion of a roadway, excluding shoulders, placed above the sub-grade for the support of, and to form a running surface for, vehicular traffic the part of the road between the outer edges of the shoulders the whole width between abutting property boundaries when the road is in a surveyed road reserve a wall at abutments that extends beyond the bridge to retain earth behind the abutment an extension of an end wall at a culvert used to retain earth behind the culvert

Traffic Barrier Railing

-

Truss Waterway Area Waterway Calculations Widening Width of Carriageway

-

Width of Footway

-

Width of Pavement Width of Road Formation Width of Road Reserve Wing Wall

-

-

Work-asExecuted Plans

-

a set of A1 size black and white paper plans on which all variations to the original design, made during construction, are recorded in red ink, in accordance with the requirements of Section 16 of this Manual
Issue 1 - Revision 0 (09 July 2007 ) Page 6 of 7

OTB005

dgn END OF DECK DEFINITION FIGURE 2.NOMINAL JOINT GAP NOMINAL JOINT GAP APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE PSC PLANK SUPER T GIRDER DECKS OF SEMI-INTEGRAL BRIDGES NOMINAL JOINT GAP NOMINAL JOINT GAP NOMINAL JOINT GAP APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK APPROACH SLAB OR APPROACH PAVEMENT OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE NOMINAL JOINT GAP DECKS OF FULLY ARTICULATED BRIDGES KP2F21.1 .

SECTION 3 TYPES OF DRAWINGS .

Standard Drawings shall mean drawings that have been produced by the RTA or consultants to depict the typical detailing required for various items of work. the Plan Registration Number shall be obtained prior to the commencement of project detailing. Sketches shall not be provided with Cover Sheets.1 GENERAL TYPES OF DRAWINGS All drawings produced by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section are classified into three main categories: ♦ ♦ ♦ SKETCHES (including proposals and temporary works) REGISTERED DRAWINGS STANDARD DRAWINGS 3.4 PROPOSAL SKETCHES All Proposal Sketches shall be prepared in accordance with Section 18 of this Manual. Proposal sketches prepared by the Authority shall be registered in the Bridge Engineering CAD registration system as sketches. These drawings shall carry a Plan Registration Number supplied by the RTA’s Micrographics Unit. Sketches prepared for the Authority by consultants shall be documented in accordance with the Quality System operating within respective offices. 3. These types of drawings have two formats ie Concept Sketches and Proposals Sketches.2). to eliminate repetition of drafting and to ensure that details used are common both in content and presentation.6 of this Manual with the label "Registration Number of Plans" in the title block being changed to read "Sketch Number" (see Figures 3. Registered Drawings shall mean a plan or a set of plans showing permanent work on any existing or proposed bridge or road asset and shall include a Cover Sheet and Contents Sheet where necessary. Proposal Sketches shall mean a plan or set of plans prepared to depict what is considered to be the most appropriate type of structure for the site under consideration.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Types of Drawings 3 3.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 5 . or other issuing unit. 3. Proposal Sketches shall not be formally registered with the Authority’s Micrographics Unit. Sketches prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section. Proposal Sketches prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section shall be registered as Sketches under the Bridge Engineering Section registration system in accordance with Clause 3.4.1 and 3.3 SKETCHES Sketches shall be prepared in accordance with the relevant Sections and Clauses of this Manual. shall be registered within each project in accordance with Clause 3.4. Where possible.7 of this Manual. OTB005 Issue 1.2 DEFINITIONS Sketches shall mean a plan or a set of plans showing graphical information that will not form a permanent part of the work.

2 Project Specific Standard Drawings. These need to be modified to depict the appropriate (span) lengths. These drawing prepared on the basis of this category of RTA Standard Bridge Drawings must be included in each set of bridge drawings that has a separate Registration Number and must have a title block consistent with other drawings in the set. cast-in-angles etc. (ii) 3.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Types of Drawings Proposal Sketches prepared for the Authority by consultants shall be documented in accordance with the Quality System operating within respective offices and shall ensure that the requirements as detailed in Section 18 of this Manual are met. design information. reinforced concrete driven piles (which requires the inclusion of design information in accordance with the Design Information drawings) and other similar standard drawings. The words “standard drawing” shall not be used in the title block. mass of elements. The name of the drawing will be that describing the contents. Typical examples of this category of standard drawings are barrier railing drawings and drawings for prestressed concrete elements (planks. are intended to provide standard solutions. (iii) Standard drawings intended to be used as a source of information on standard detailing of often used elements and details.5 3. 3. dowel details. OTB005 Issue 1. such as Design and Construct projects and similar.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 5 . i. Only those details that are applicable for the subject bridge shall be reproduced in the drawings. etc. They are produced in the following three categories: (i) Standard drawings that may be used without any site-specific adjustment or any other change. Standard drawings of this category are provided to the Contractor in the Tender Documents and are not to be included in any set of bridge drawings.5. minimise the volume of drawing and reduce the cost of construction through standardisation of structural elements and details.5. Reinforced Concrete Driven Pile Details” etc. “10 m Span PSC Plank”. The name of the drawing will be that describing the contents. Bar Shapes Diagram. The words “standard drawing” shall not be used in the title block. Drawings produced on the basis of information provided on this category of RTA standard drawings generally require design input and more extensive modification than category (ii) standard drawings. or similar.1 STANDARD DRAWINGS RTA Bridge Standard Drawings.e. These RTA Standard Bridge Drawings must be included in each set of bridge drawings that has a separate Registration Number and drawings must have a title block consistent with the other drawings in the set. Project Specific standard drawings may sometimes be prepared to rationalise design. RTA Standard Bridge Drawings are intended to be a source of information and RTA requirements. RTA Standard Bridge Drawings that contain standard details such as small movement joints. skew angles. Super-T girders). Some typical examples of this category of standard drawings are the Bar Shapes Diagram (which requires the inclusion of Zshapes).e. A typical example of this category of standard drawings is the standard drawing for Name Plates. Standard drawings that are intended for use with minimal modifications and generally only require additional information to be added. i. On large projects.

7 REGISTRATION OF SKETCHES AND DRAWINGS IN BRIDGE ENGINEERING All Sketches and Registered Drawings prepared in the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Section shall be registered under the Bridge Engineering Section’s registration system in accordance with the following procedure: For all new projects.1 (i) and (ii) above. required necessary minor variations to the standard drawings (to suit their application for a particular location) must be shown on the standard drawings. CAD Development. CAD Numbers shall consist of a letter and a one or more digit number with the letter chosen being dependant upon the functional area from which the project originated ie D denotes Design Functional Area A denotes Asset Functional Area Where projects proceed to final design. the officer responsible for the maintenance of electronic registers for all Sketches and Registered Drawings. CAD Development shall be advised of all new Registered Drawings and Sketches prepared on the CAD system as well as any drawings / sketches transfered from one directory to another. Registered Drawings for all permanent works shall be prepared by consultants shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections and Clauses of this Manual. etc (these are generally parts of non-bridge drawings). Further. in order that the relevant register can be continually updated. CAD Development. The Leader. details which vary from bridge to bridge in these Design and Construct and similar projects shall be fully detailed in each set of drawings. Where such project-specific standard drawings are used for structures such as retaining walls. the CAD Number shall be the Proposal Number.6 REGISTERED DRAWINGS Registered Drawings for all permanent works shall be prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section shall be in accordance with the relevant Sections and Clauses of this Manual and shall be registered through the RTA’s Micrographics Section.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 5 . OTB005 Issue 1. where a Proposal Number has been previously issued.5. Electronic data received from sources external to Bridge Engineering Section as well as sketches prepared by hand by any officer shall also be registered under the relevant CAD number on the CAD system. gantries for signs. However. they shall be included in each separate set of bridge or culvert drawings and they shall comply with requirements detailed in Clauses 3. they need not be included in each set of drawings. 3. See Clause 3. For existing projects. there shall be a cross-reference to the relevant standard drawing sheet and the registration number. A Plan Registration Number shall be obtained from the RTA’s Micrographics Unit and supplied to the consultant for inclusion on the drawings. if the standard drawings are not included in each set of drawings. a Plan Registration number shall be obtained and provided to the Leader. a CAD Number shall be obtained from the Leader. 3. In particular.10 of this Manual.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Types of Drawings Where such standard drawings and/or standard details are produced and are used for a number of bridges and culverts.

where “D104” is the CAD Number allocated to the project under the Bridge Section registration system. Where there is more than one sketch for a particular project. 3. the CAD file name for Registered Drawings shall consist of the CAD Number and a set of alphanumeric characters abbreviating the title of the drawing.Sheet A “KD104CONSB” where “CONSB” denotes Concept Sketch .4. The Project Sketch Number shall be shown in the title block as “KD104” for all sketches in the same project. Typical CAD Filenames within a project could be shown as: “KD104CONSA” where “CONSA” denotes Concept Sketch .2.1 and 3. Sketch CAD filename should have as few characters as is necessary.Sheet B “KD1O4CONSO1A” where “CPO1A” denotes Concept Sketch Option 1 – Sheet A “KD1O4CONSO1B” where “CPO1B” denotes Concept Sketch Option 1 – Sheet B The CAD file name for Sketches shall consist of the letter 'K' followed by the CAD Number and a set of alphanumeric characters abbreviating the title of the sketch. the CAD Filenames used shall conform to the requirements of the quality system operating within the respective consultant’s office.8 CAD FILE NAMES FOR REGISTERED DRAWINGS For drawings prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section. 3. Registered Drawing CAD filenames shall have a maximum of eight characters. eg KD10PROPS(CONS) where 'K' denotes it is a sketch where D10 denotes DESIGN CAD NUMBER where PROPS denotes PROPOSAL SKETCH (title of the sketch) where CONS denotes CONCEPT SKETCH (title of the sketch) See Figures 3.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 5 .8.4. For drawings prepared by Consultants.1. eg D7ACA where D7 denotes DESIGN CAD NUMBER where AC denotes ABUTMENT CONCRETE (drawing title) where A denotes SHEET A (where two or more sheets are used) See Figure 3. the individual CAD Filename for each sketch shall have a unique number and this shall be recorded below the bottom left hand corner of the title block.9 CAD NUMBERS AND CAD FILE NAMES FOR SKETCHES Where sketches are required in projects and they are prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Enginerering Section. KA10BBA OTB005 Issue 1. a project sketch number shall be used for all sketches and it shall consist of the letter “K” followed by the CAD number only.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Types of Drawings Sketches and drawings prepared by Consultants shall be registered in accordance with the quality system that exists in the respective consultant’s office.

Where drawings for permanent works are prepared by consultants. The following information shall be provided to the Micrographics staff at the beginning of the project in order that a "Registration Number of Plans" can be reserved: Highway. they shall be numbered in accordance with the quality system operating within respective consultant’s office. Main Road. the consultant shall be supplied with a Registration Number which has been sourced from the RTA’s Micrographics Unit.9. Freeway or Motorway Number Local Government Area Name eg Shire of Singleton / City of Greater Taree The name of the river/creek/road/railway line etc that the structure crosses The location of the structure eg the distance from the nearest major town Where drawings are being prepared for the widening or rehabilitation of an existing structure.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 5 of 5 .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Types of Drawings where 'K' denotes it is a sketch where A10 denotes ASSET CAD NUMBER where BB denotes BAILEY BRIDGE (title of the sketch) where A denotes SHEET A See Figure 3. 3. shall be formally registered with the RTA’s Micrographics Section. the "Registration Number of Plans" of the existing structure shall be provided to Micrographics staff so that all plans for the same structure can be cross referenced appropriately. OTB005 Issue 1.10 REGISTRATION OF DRAWINGS WITH MICROGRAPHICS All drawings for permanent works produced by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section or by Consultants for the Authority for bridges and structures that will become the property of the Authority. Where sketches are required in projects and they are prepared by Consultants.1.

SECTION 4 DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS .

Title block dimensions and location for A1 size sheets are given in Figure 4.1. City of Greater Taree (Council names shall not be used – see Clause 4. Title block dimensions and location for A4 size sheets are given in Figure 4.1(b).STANDARD SHEET SIZES ISO SIZE A1 A3 A4 OVERALL SIZE 841 x 594 420 x 297 297 x 210 MARGINS LHS GENERAL 56 28 20 14 7 7 CLEAR DRAWING AREA 771 x 566 385 x 283 283 x 183 Drawings provided for formal approval by the Principal Bridge Engineer or other delegated officer. Drawings provided by consultants for formal acceptance by the Principal Bridge Engineer or other delegated officer. The information that must be provided in the title block on each sheet is as follows: Road type and number eg Main Road No 246. These sheet sizes are in agreement with the International Standard Sheet Sizes Series A and are suitable for microfilming. shall be A1 in size and they shall be printed on tracing paper. The cell for each sheet type is stored in the Public Cell Library on the CAD System and can be readily accessed.5) Title and location of the bridge or structure Bridge Name (as appropriate for work on existing bridges) Work description (as appropriate for work on existing bridges) Plan Registration Number RTA Bridge Number (in the format BXXXXX) Sheet number and Issue Issue Status OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 ( 31 March 2011 ) Page 1 of 3 .1(a).2 TITLE BLOCKS For work performed by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Branch. Title block dimensions and location for A3 size sheets are given in Figure 4.2. shall be A1 in size and they shall be printed on tracing paper. TABLE 4.1(c). 4.2. Highway No 10 Local Government Area name eg Shire of Byron.1 . All drawings and/or sketches produced by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Branch or by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority shall be on a sheet with sizes being as shown in Table 4.1 SHEET SIZES DRAWING SHEETS AND TITLE BLOCKS The RTA’s Bridge Engineering Branch uses three standard sheet sizes for drawings and sketches. the size of which shall not be altered.2. cells have been created on the CAD System for each type of sheet used and these symbols come complete with the appropriate size title block.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Sheets and Title Blocks 4 4.

Planks etc Deck Setting out (if necessary) Concrete (including accessories) Reinforcement Expansion Joints (as required) Cover Plates (as required) Barriers (if applicable) Approach Slabs (if included in the Bridge Contract) Bar Shapes Diagram Approach Slabs (if NOT included in the Bridge Contract) Reinforced Soil Walls (if NOT included in the Bridge Contract) The Cover Sheet of any set of drawings shall be numbered 1.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Sheets and Title Blocks Title blocks to be used on drawings prepared for the RTA by external consultants shall be submitted to the RTA for approval prior to commencement of drafting activities. drawing numbers shall not contain the consultant’s reference numbers in any form. 200 for piers etc) shall not be used. 4. Blocks of numbers for suites of sheets (ie for 100 for abutments. Sheet B. Sheet 2 etc shall not be used. 5 etc. a Contents Sheet shall be provided and the Contents Sheet shall be numbered 2. the General Arrangement sheet shall be numbered 2 and each following sheet shall be numbered in sequence beginning with Sheet No 3. The terms Sheet 1. Sheet C etc shall be shown both in the title block and in the schedule of drawings on the cover sheet of the set of drawings. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 ( 31 March 2011 ) Page 2 of 3 . Cover Sheet General Arrangement Foundations ie Piles. Rock Anchors etc Reinforced Soil Walls (if included in the Bridge Contract) Substructure ie Abutments Concrete Reinforcement Piers Concrete Reinforcement Bearings Superstructure ie Girders. followed by Sheet A. Where a Contents Sheet is not required. Where there are too many sheets to be listed on the Cover Sheet of a set of drawings. Where drawings are prepared by consultants. Pile and / or Footing Layout.3 ORDER OF SHEETS IN A SET OF DRAWINGS The order of the sheets in a set of drawings should follow the logical order of the construction procedure of the structure itself and shall be as follows. Where more than one sheet is needed to adequately illustrate an element or elements of the structure. The sheet number recorded in the title block of each sheet is subject to preceeding sheets and is dependant on the number of sheets required to adequately illustrate each element of the structure. the sheet title. 4.

as well as their respective contents. shall be in accordance with the information in Government Gazette notices. scales etc shall be entered in the respective spaces provided. this definition must be included in the LGA name in the drawing title blocks and on drawing set Cover Sheets.5 LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAMES The name of the area of land in which the bridge is located.4.4 STANDARD DRAWING SHEETS Drawings sheets used for all work prepared by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Branch shall conform to the current version of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB001. the contact details given in the Title Block for the approving manager. ie the Local Government Area (LGA) name.4. Where the drawings have been prepared for offices other than Bridge Engineering Branch. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB100 is shown in Figure 4. Drawing sheets for all work prepared by Consultants for Design and Construct or Public Private Partnership type contracts shall conform to the current version of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB100. This information is contained in the LGA Listing prepared by the Land Information and Titles Section of the Real Estate Branch of the RTA and each LGA has been allocated a specific number. amendment / revision description. City of Bankstown. followed by the letters LGA (eg Goulburn Mulwaree LGA. the “Approved for Use” box and the standard drawing number box located on the drawing sheet.1 For drawings prepared by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Branch. Where the Local Government Area is not defined as either a shire. city or municipality eg Shire of Sutherland. drawing sheets shall conform to the current version of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB041. In all instances. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB001 is shown in Figure 4.3. the information included in drawing title blocks shall be as listed in the LGA listing as prepared by the Land Information and Titles Section of the Real Estate Branch of the RTA. Great Lakes LGA). as well as the approving manager’s title shall be amended as required. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB041 is shown in Figure 4.2.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Sheets and Title Blocks 4. Reference file details. Where a bridge can be identified as being in two Local Government Areas (ie where the LGA boundary is given as either in the middle or edge of a watercourse) the name of both LGAs shall be included in the title block and on the drawing set Cover Sheet. For drawings prepared for the RTA by consultants. 4. No reference shall be made to the name of the council that administers the area of land in which the bridge is located in the Title Blocks or on drawing set Cover Sheets. the details provided in the title block for approving officers shall be amended as required for each respective office. with the structure being registered under the LGA in which Abutment A of the bridge is located. Space is provided in the title block for the design consultant’s name and logo as well as the contractor’s name and logo. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 ( 31 March 2011 ) Page 3 of 3 . Where Local Government Areas are defined as either a shire. city or municipality.4. shall be removed when the drawings are incorporated in a set of detail drawings. Municipality of Leichhardt. unless the drawings are being prepared for a Council Contract.

1 (a) 10 10 SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) SHEET No ISSUE 10 20 PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 20 CLIENT: 20 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING BRANCH THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT 9 32 .2.dgn 6 47 80 180 55 45 SHEET BORDER FIGURE 4.SHEET BORDER 4 94 10 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 140 40 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DESIGN 50 DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: CAD No KP2F421A.

1(b) SUPERVISING BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) 6 29 .135 42 30 63 4 6 ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES 31 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED SKETCH No FIGURE 4.2.

dgn SKETCH No: .ALTERNATIVE POSITION OF TITLE BLOCK FIGURE 4.1(c) 105 4 6 ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES 45 31 51 6 8 DRAWING: CAD No KP2F421C.2.

.4.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.RTA DRAWING No RTAB001 ISSUE 11 MAR 2011 FIGURE 4.1 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING BRANCH 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT: PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F441.

2 5.5mm text 80 SHEET 115 135 180 BORDER TITLE BLOCK FOR CONSULTANT DESIGNS FIGURE 4.4.5mm text 2mm text PRINCIPAL BRIDGE ENGINEER DATE ISSUE CAD No 2mm text 2.5mm text 3.RTA DRAWING No RTAB041 ISSUE 9 MAR 2011 10 4 SHEET BORDER THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES 0.5mm text 32 7 mm text 9 5mm text ABC CONSULTANTS 10 DESIGN CRESCENT 5mm text CLIENT XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Box required on General Arrangement drawing only OLYMPIC PARK SYDNEY NSW 2158 PHONE FACSIMILE 35 135 2.5mm text 3.5 10 10 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NEW SOUTH WALES CLIENT PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING APPROVED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER DESIGN QA RECORDS ISSUE STATUS: SHEET No ISSUE DIRECTOR CAD No THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT .5mm text 2.5mm/5mm text ACCEPTED DESIGN DRAWING APPROVED DESIGN QA RECORDS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SHEET No DIRECTOR 2.7 mm line thickness (all full lines) 10 3.5mm text XXXXXXXX PHONE FACSIMILE PREPARED 5mm text CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 3.5mm text 19 7mm text 10 3.

5mm ARIAL FONT HIGHWAY No XX SHIRE OF XXXXXX 30 BRIDGE OVER FEATURE RIVER 5mm ARIAL FONT AT XX.5mm ARIAL FONT 76 38 27 14 155 63 5mm ARIAL FONT FIGURE 4.XX.XX ISSUED FOR XXXXX XX XX DRAFTING DRAFTING CHECK DESIGNER 1 0.Xkm DIRECTION OF PLACE SHEET TITLE INSERT REFERENCE FILE DETAILS HERE INSERT AMENDMENT / REVISION DESCRIPTION HERE CONSULTANT’S DETAILS AND LOGO HERE DESIGN CHECK PROJECT MANAGER ISSUE STATUS XXXX XXX BC XXXX RTA BRIDGE No SHEET No ISSUE 1 000 PROJECT DIRECTOR 500 DRAWING STATUS BXXXXX X X COPYRIGHT RTA.5 0 200 100 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm 200 400 600 800 1 000mm AT XX. NSW 2010 .4.RTA DRAWING No RTAB100 ISSUE 1 OCT 2010 3.3 DRAWING FILE LOCATION / NAME SCALES ON A1 SIZE DRAWING DESIGNER CONTRACTOR HIGHWAY No XX SHIRE OF XXXXXX DATUM : MGA / AHD 0 EXTERNAL REFERENCE FILES REV DATE AMENDMENT / REVISION DESCRIPTION WVR No APPROVAL TITLE NAME 1 2 3 4 5m BRIDGE OVER FEATURE RIVER INSERT DESIGN INSERT CONTRACTOR’S DETAILS AND LOGO HERE RTA REGISTRATION No OF PLANS XXXXXXX 01 XX.Xkm DIRECTION OF PLACE SHEET TITLE RTA REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 2mm ARIAL FONT ISSUE STATUS XXXX XXX BC XXXX RTA BRIDGE No SHEET No ISSUE DRAWING STATUS BXXXXX X X 11 12 10 3.5mm ARIAL FONT 3.

SECTION 5 SETTING OUT .

an appropriate method is the use of chainages.1 GENERAL SETTING OUT The geometry of the road defines the shape of the bridge (more particularly the deck). setting out should be carried out using the control line. shall be adopted from the road design and/or site survey information provided.605 except at the beginning of the alignment or when the km values change along the alignment. The preparation of a CAD Base Plan as a design aid for the purposes of checking the setting out of structures is strongly recommended as it may be used to verify dimensions. offsets and coordinates in conjunction with a CAD base plan.2 CHAINAGES Chainages.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out 5 5. coordinates may be used to locate the centre of elements ie spread footings etc as shown in Figure 5. For designs prepared by the Authority. Chainages with values in excess of 1 km shall be given in metres. Chainages and coordinates of points on the control line shall be given with a bearing and offset to other points required. give along the Control Line. 320. Road design information and bridge site survey information provide relevant coordinates.605. In such cases the full chainage shall be shown in the following manner: eg 2km 320. however. bearings etc shall be given in metres to the nearest 0. The use of chainages and offsets is the preferred method.1 (Sheets 1 and 2) illustrates an appropriate method for the setting out of a bridge deck where the bridge is on a curved horizontal alignment. chainages for the centrelines of piers. Chainages being used for calculating purposes shall not be rounded off.005 metre.6 whilst the dimensions for each particular element shall be related to the defined location and shall be normal to the element centreline (defined by a grid bearing). including spiral curves. 320. Generally setting out is carried out by one of two methods. a) b) alignment method (chainage and offset) a coordinate system For structures which are on a straight alignment.605 NOT 2 km 320. Where possible and practical. 5.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 7 . The Bridge Deck Geometry program (loaded on Bridge Engineering PC’s) may be used for the purpose of calculating/checking distances to required offset points and calcualtion of the reduced levels of offset points Figure 5. coordinates may be used. The geometry of the deck therefore must be defined before that of the substructure and footings and/or piles. alignment data etc. Where there are multiple alignments. OTB005 Issue 1. Chainages and offsets or.605. eg. alternatively. eg.

Generally. lists of coordinates can be obtained by electronic means and this information can be transferred to drawing files on the CAD System. On curved bridges it is sometimes advantageous to exaggerate the curvature to show dimensions more clearly.695 015.002 101.354 N 1 100 000. A gap shall be placed between the third and fourth figures.3. The following procedure is recommended for the listing of coordinates. At the head of any listing of coordinates the figures common to all coordinates are noted as constants.000 155. where electronic survey or design information is available. This drawing is not necessarily to scale but should have reasonable proportions.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out 5. Horizontal alignment data for the Control Line shall be provided on the pile layout drawing. In recording both GDA and ISG coordinates. The bearing of the Control Line shall always be given in the direction of increasing chainage along the line. minutes and seconds.3 COMPASS BEARING The bearing of a line is the angle measured clockwise from grid north to the subject line and is given in degrees.000 115. The coordinates are normally quoted in metres to the nearest 0. one for the Eastings and one for the Northings are subtracted from all coordinates in the coordinate list and in the computations.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 7 . The pile layout should be shown on Pile Detail Sheet where possible and include all information necessary for the positioning of the piles. The method of calculating the length and bearing of a line between two coordinated points is given in Figure 5. 5.5 PILES The setting out of the piles shall be shown on a “Pile Layout”. the Easting is always placed before the Northing.706 The coordinates shall be obtained from the road design and/or the site survey information. OTB005 Issue 1. ISG (Integrated Survey Grid) or GDA (Geocentric Datum of Australia).113 115. 5.161 311. E Location A5 B27 B39 C11 200 000. required information may be measured directly from the electronic file. as indicated in the example below. and also between the sixth and seventh figures from the decimal point to assist in the alignment of figures.001 metre. These constants. Generally piles are in a straight line or groups.854 295. Alternatively.153 351. in order to avoid carrying redundant digits. The bearing of a line is relative to where one is stationed.4 COORDINATES The coordinate system adopted for a project may be an arbitrary local one. See Figure 5.4.

The centreline of the pile group shall be defined by chainage and bearing to the Control Line with the location of each individual pile being dimensioned from the intersection of the control line and the centreline of piles.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 7 . 5. By always dimensioning from a known point. Curved Bridges Bridges on geometric and/or transition spirals and more particularly those on skews. the location of footings can be clearly indicated on the plan of piers or abutments.7 PIERS AND ABUTMENTS Each part of a pier or an abutment shall be defined from a known point (such as the intersection of the pier centreline or the end of deck and the Control Line. could have supports of varying lengths. a note shall be added to the drawing to indicate 5. the chance of compounding any differences in location due to allowable construction tolerances can be greatly reduced.8 BEARINGS Bearings shall be set out from either the pier centreline or abutment curtain wall and a known point eg. parallel / normal to the centreline of the piles. On curved bridges it is advantageous to exaggerate the curvature in order that dimensions may be shown more clearly. Where bearings are not parallel to the pier centreline. Horizontal alignment data for the Control Line shall be provided on the Footing Layout drawing. ALWAYS dimension from a known point. see Figure 5. The “Footing Layout” does not necessarily need to be to scale. A Northpoint shall be included on all Plan views where setting out information is shown. Raked piles . Where a layout is a combination of piles and footings it shall be known as a “Foundation Plan”. however on straight. For examples of pile setting out.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out Piles in one line:.6 FOOTINGS The setting out of footings on structures with complicated geometry shall generally be shown on a “Footing Layout”. Ends of spans may not be parallel and this should be particularly noted when setting out the superstructure and wingwalls. 5. refer to Section 6 of this Manual. Where raked piles are in two or more rows beneath a pilecap. OTB005 Issue 1. The setting out details shall be shown on the pier or abutment by means of formed holes for bearing anchor bolts or dowels as appropriate. that the location shown is at a nominated RL (usually the top of pile). however it should be reasonably proportioned. a dimension between the design location of pile centrelines at the top of the finished pile shall be provided. The “Footing Layout” shall indicate plan dimensions of individual footings and relative position in relation to a known point. the orientation shall be indicated on an enlarged detail.6. Piles in a group: The centre of the pile group shall be defined by a chainage and bearing to the Control Line together with a dimension from the Control Line or alternatively by a set of coordinates with the location of each individual pile being dimensioned from centre of the pile group parallel / normal to the centreline of the piles. NEVER dimension from footings or piles when setting out columns. the intersection of the Control Line and the centreline of pier. square bridges. Raked piles shall also have the degree of rake shown together with an arrow to indicate the direction of the rake in relation to the centreline of piles.Where raked piles are used.

(using Figure 5.1 OTB005 DECK General Issue 1. Given number of girders(n) and approximate spacing(s). Initially spacing should be worked out on centreline and front face of curtain wall. the length of the girders needs to be determined. locate outside girders at abutment and pier. Bearing locations shall be indicated on pier and abutment drawings. In such cases the spacing of girders/planks must be adjusted so that x's are approximately equal and y's are approximately equal. the skew of the supports may need to be adjusted to suit (ie supports may not be parallel).9 as an example). vi. When satisfied with spacing fit. pier The width of the deck may vary between the abutment and pier and between the piers. Radial Supports Radial supports are not normally considered when using girders but they may be an option provided that the length of the span on the outer curve is not significantly greater than that on inner curve.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out 5. Spacing will be converted to skew. If the variation is not great. v. Curved Bridges Care shall be exercised when locating girders due to the variations caused by the curvature. Determine the length of each individual girder from the centreline of the pier to the front face of the curtain wall and compare the differences. If the variation is too great. other spans. 5. iii. if required. If the girders are to be the same length then the distance from the end of the girder to centreline of the pier or the front face of the abutment needs to vary across the span and from span to span.10 5. Abutments and piers shall be checked to ensure that bearings will fit on headstocks. This can be achieved by varying the distance from centreline of pier to centreline of bearings The use of girders of many different lengths is neither practical or economical and should be avoided.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 7 . iv. Generally several locations need to be trialled to determine which is the best fit. then constant length girders can be used. Steps for calculating spacing and length of girders . When satisfied with the fit of the girders/planks in Span 1. ii.9 GIRDERS Girders are placed at bearing locations. repeat the procedure for Span 2 or. Attempt to maintain the spacing at the pier and adjust the spacing at the abutment so that the 'x’s' are approximately equal and so are the 'y’s'. i. It should be noted that variations become greater on skewed bridges.10.

ie. 5. bearing. The base plan initially includes Control Line outline of parapets. If drawn accurately many dimensions for elements may be measured directly off the plan. so the bridge shall be straight. OTB005 Issue 1.10(b). the chord of the arc between the ends of the deck. For spans up to and including 12 metres.10. See Figure 5. angles of wing walls. See Figure 5. for a simply-supported bridge when the length of the span is less than this chord. setting out must start with the deck and then moved down through girders.1 5.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 5 of 7 .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out As stated in Clause 5. See Figure 5.10. eg. etc. For a bridge over 30 m long with a horizontal mid-ordinate of D = 75mm or less. Information such as length of abutments. In general. No increase in road width is necessary in such cases (other than that required by the RTA Road Design Guide).1. a bridge 40m long with a Control Line on radius 2700m gives D = 74mm. Although values will be correct if basic input is correct.2 Determination of parameters For a bridge of length 30 m or less with a mid-ordinate of D = 50 mm or less. consideration shall be given to making individual spans straight. abutments may then be superimposed on the base plan. The maximum length of this chord can be found with the formula C = √40R. piers and abutments. the horizontal alignment of the bridge shall be straight. where the mid-ordinate of individual spans is 10mm or less and the angular deviation from one span to the next is less than one degree(10 ). the horizontal alignment of the bridge shall also be straight. On curved structures. chainages.10(a). the setting out information at supports shall be given along the skew. Sheets 1 and 2. Final details of deck setting out shall include a Plan. where the piers. all bridge structures shall be set out in accordance with the principles shown in Figure 5. careful examination of railing joints shall be made to ensure that the angular difference can be accommodated. Location of piers. abutments and ends of superstructure are skewed to the Control Line.3 Procedure Set up a “Base Plan” on CAD. Cross Section and Table(s).10(a) For any other bridge the horizontal alignment of the deck is to be set out on the curve or in chords of such length that the mid-ordinate between the chord and the curve does not exceed D = 5 mm. coordinates of main points. they should be checked independently. If individual spans are set out as being straight on structures which will carry barrier railings. piers. median. The mid-ordinate can be found with the formula: D = R-0. kerb lines. radii. The setting out data for all other chainage increments shall be given radially. However. See Figure 5.1.1. the horizontal alignment is to be set out from pier to pier. bearings. lengths of railings etc may be measured. Sheets 1 and 2. and finally footings and/or pile caps and piles.5 √ 4R2 – C2 See Figure 5.

each of which is loaded on Bridge Section PC’s. Levels can be calculated using the Vertical Curve Geometry program or the Bridge Deck Geometry program. Locations of the deck accessories may be shown.1 Reduced levels for selected points on the cross section shall be given to the top of the finished concrete surface.10.1. not the top of the asphalt wearing surface. The maximum increment used in the program and to be shown on Table of Levels shall be the value C.10.0 2.0 10. in most cases be exaggerated for clarity.4 of this Manual.5 2. as defined in Clauses 5. used in conjunction with survey equipment OTB005 Issue 1. Increments for cross sections taken along the bridge shall not exceed the following: (i) Increments determined for straight bridges or for bridges on a curved horizontal alignment above and (ii) The difference between the vertical curve and the chord between the two sections must not exceed 20mm. the ends of deck and the pier centrelines.5 Information required on drawings where it is not required for construction Where it is positively known that the provision of deck setting out information.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 6 of 7 . 5.0 4. the Control Line.10. 5.5 5. will not be required for construction purposes. Increments for cross sections taken along the bridge should not exceed the following: Radius (m) 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 1000 2000 and straight bridges Increment (m) 1.4 Bridge on a Curved Vertical Alignment For a bridge of length 30 m or less on a sag vertical curve only with a mid-ordinate over the length of the bridge of D = 50 mm or less. such as on large Design/Construct/Maintain or Public Private Partnership type contracts where an interactive Design Model File.1 to 5. An example of setting out points that should be included are shown in Figure 5.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out Skew angles for curved structures shall be defined in a Skew Diagram as shown on Sheet 2 of Figure 5.5 4.0 3.5 3. The Plan view shall show the outline of the deck. however it is preferable that they be shown on a separate deck layout plan.10. The Plan view is generally not to scale and the curvature shall. the vertical alignment of the bridge shall be straight. Setting Out Tables shall show the values of offsets and levels at chosen locations along bridge.0 The increments shown are guidelines only and values should be adjusted to suit span lengths etc.

shall be given horizontally in accordance with Figure 5. The detailing of railing panels containing three posts shall be kept to an absolute minimum.Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 7 of 7 . the information for deck offsets and Reduced Levels shall be provided on the drawings for records and maintenance purposes. anchor bolts for traffic barrier railings shall shall be cast-in so that they are truly vertical over the full length of the structure. it may be necessary to detail panels containing three posts to ensure that panels can be placed to clear expansion joints and other obstructions.11. anchor bolts for all types of railings shall be cast-in normal to the concrete surface.03. OTB005 Issue 1. 5.3 of this Manual may be increased to double the increments shown in Clause 5. See Figure 5. up to R = 10 000m. In all cases. each panel shall have a maximum of two posts.11. When the grade on any structure is 4% or greater at any one point.10. See Figure 5. Spacing of posts and hence bolt groups.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Setting Out method of setting out may be used. the spacing of anchor bolt groups shall be given horizontally in accordance with Figure 5. the spacing of cross sections as defined in Clause 5.11.11. 6000 mm for traffic barrier railings and 3000 mm for pedestrian railings Panel lengths and post spacing should be calculated along a concrete edge (usually the inside top edge of the concrete safety barrier for traffic barrier railings and the outside edge of the footway for pedestrian railings). to facilitate ease of erection. Approximate maximum panel lengths are. The maximum increment will remain the same at 10. Where aluminium pedestrian barrier railings are used on any structure.0m. On rare occasions. especially on curved bridges.10. When structures are constructed on grades of less than 4%. however. Where traffic barrier railings are used. the anchor bolts for the railing shall be cast-in so that they are truly vertical in all cases. See Figure 5.11.11 BARRIER RAILINGS All types of barrier railings shall be divided into panels of a length which are not difficult to handle and erect. as a general rule.

804 198.897 198.418 3955.071 RL 198.333 198.725 199.082 3887.077 199.549 ’X’ 7105 7092 6623 6608 6593 6212 6200 6188 5869 5862 RL 198.261 198.RADIAL SECTIONS UPSTREAM CHAINAGE ’Z’ LOCATION (m) RADIAL BEARING (DEGREES) 145.283 198.332 198.844 198.805 198.681 2 CH 148.122 3908.740 199.615 198.000 186.197 199.601 1 SECTION 2 - SPAN 2 196.892 198.301 3963.531 198.071 3888.105 4012.231 3964.699 199.018 3995.628 199.542 3963.000 243.197 199.798 NORTHING ’b’ 3971.227 198.000 CH 241.723 151.319 198.000 191.443 3929.30251 307.000 1 CH 145.733 199.172 199.861 198.000 RADIAL SECTION 199.000 206.360 198.358 198.585 NORTHING ’b’ 3964.000 236.215 198.198 199.738 3989.193 3958.196 198.323 3958.246 3913.858 3992.714 199.337 3892.200 199.968 3904.295 ’Y’ 7008 6996 6553 6538 6524 6161 6149 6137 5831 5824 RL 198.823 198.126 - RL 4 CONTROL LINE MC01 3 2 1 5 TABLES I AND II 313.354 3940.000 181.193 199.139 3941. TABLE II .49617 308.354 3937.885 198.321 198.336 198.14054 300.000 161.712 199.682 199.174 199.000 c PIER 2 L SKEW SECTIONS SIMILAR EXCEPT FOR X AND Y OFFSETS 211.859 198.000 SPAN 1 166. END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT B 241.738 3992.044 199.225 CH 156.647 199.341 3917.262 3941.415 3933.89934 308.91518 305.884 198.000 c OF PIER 2 L TO END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT B CH 211.161 199.137 3945.125 199.572 198.345 198.000 216.553 198.000 151.000 171.000 POINTS 1.31835 304.644 199.512 198.93103 302.892 3974.585 3956.822 198.185 199.068 3917.51202 305.725 3942.286 - RL 198.33420 301.727 199.623 198.183 199.334 198.169 199.123 199.101 199.077 199.701 199.218 3999.982 4016.331 198.353 198.358 198.357 198.602 198.761 3974.627 198.900 198.541 3993.000 211.360 198.227 241.574 198.786 3900.000 END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A DOWNSTREAM 4500 4500 600 RL AS SHOWN IN CO-ORDINATES POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 POINT 4 POINT 5 600 EASTING ’a’ 4015.740 199.424 3892.SKEW SECTIONS CHAINAGE ’Z’ LOCATION (m) CO-ORDINATES POINT 1 POINT 2 POINT 3 POINT 4 POINT 5 EASTING ’a’ 4012.630 198.73737 301.000 201.dgn .589 198.000 156.72152 304.613 198.493 198.000 221.119 3975.623 198.FROM c OF PIER 1 L CH 151.142 199.356 198.556 198.845 3961.898 198.526 198.000 212.304 198. SPAN 3 226.000 231.978 3949.000 210.197 199.890 198.352 198.347 CH 243.819 198.12469 303.660 3986.462 3974.886 198.737 199.553 198.000 240.343 198.611 198.893 198.842 198.065 3969.28666 310.893 198.681 3968.628 198.000 176.946 RL 198.684 199.88349 311.561 3956.056 4011.604 198.359 3992.056 4008.458 4002.122 ’Y’ 7781 7768 7276 7261 7245 6842 6829 6816 6477 6469 RL 199.223 198.787 3952.575 3896.627 3980.000 CH 244.731 199.624 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING CLIENT END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A 151.734 199.883 198.723 199.622 3983.000 CH 181.144 199.549 - RL 198.357 198.78451 199.97526 300.801 ’X’ 7900 7886 7364 7347 7330 6906 6892 6879 6523 6515 RL 199.282 3966.68983 310.670 3892.673 3977.732 199.000 c PIER 1 L 181.624 198.000 2 2 CH ’Z’ E ’a’ N ’b’ 2 - SPAN 3 1 SPAN 1 PROVIDE SUFFICIENT RADIAL SECTIONS AT ENDS TO ENSURE CORRECT SETTING OUT SPAN 2 PROVIDE SUFFICIENT RADIAL SECTIONS AT ENDS TO ENSURE CORRECT SETTING OUT PLAN END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A FOR RADIAL SECTION DETAILS SEE TABLE No I FOR SKEW SECTION DETAILS SEE TABLE No II NOT TO SCALE TABLE I .892 198.174 199.198 199.298 198.475 148.475 CH 237.049 199.900 198.406 3921.663 199.302 198.826 198.70568 307.246 3916.623 199.892 3972.615 198.52786 302.172 199.440 3925.738 199.622 198.650 199.795 198.725 199.613 198.681 SEE SHEET No 2 FOR HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT DATA FOR CONTROL LINE MC01.000 GENERAL NOTES SCALE: 1000 500 0 1000 2000 3000mm OR AS SHOWN.872 198. 2 AND 3 ARE GIVEN ON THE TOP SURFACE OF DECK CONCRETE.12543 312.773 180.737 4005.569 3918.237 198.159 199.1 1 CAD No KP2F51A.874 198.522 198.948 3958.09300 309.591 198.192 199.666 199.000 244.522 198.732 199.41586 311.621 198.000 182.10885 306.630 198.200 199.000 DIAPHRAGM CJ c PIER 1 L 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CJ CJ c PIER 2 L PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CJ DIAPHRAGM END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT B FIGURE 5.888 198.776 RL 199.301 3960.

IP CH 34 200.000

HCEN

RL 199.187

TP BRIDGE

TP

CH 34 151.000

CH 34 241.000

10 000

LENGTH OF VERTICAL CURVE = 200 000

CONTROL LINE MC01

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE HTP1 HTP2

SKEW DIAGRAM
NOT TO SCALE

HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT DIAGRAM

TABLE 1 - HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT DATA FOR CONTROL MC01
POINT HCEN HTP1 HTP2 LOCATION CENTRE OF CIRCLE CHAINAGE 34 049.756 CHAINAGE 34 301.655 EASTING 4369.418 4087.068 3930.577 NORTHING 3643.844 4032.018 3838.315 233 58’ 8.7’ 203 54’ 1.0’ BEARING IN BEARING OUT

FIGURE 5.1

2

BEARING 30 00’ 00"

BEARING 120 00’ 00"

BEARING 210 00’ 00"

30

STATION

BEARING 300 00’ 00"

INCREASING CHAINAGE

KP2F53

FIGURE 5.3

NORTH Y

D ( X - X , Y + Y ) 1 1 1 1

A ( X + X , Y + Y ) 1 1 1 1 BEARING ANGLE

X

O (X Y ) 11

X EAST

C ( X - X , Y - Y ) 1 1 1 1 Y

B ( X + X , Y - Y ) 1 1 1 1

THE LENGTH OF THE LINES OA, OB, OC AND OD IS GIVEN BY

2 2 ( X ) + ( Y ) 1 1

-1 O = TAN

( X) 1 ( Y) 1

= TAN -1

(DIFFERENCE IN EASTINGS) (DIFFERENCE IN NORTHINGS)

BEARING OF LINE OA IN FIRST QUADRANT = O OB IN SECOND QUADRANT = 180 - O OC IN SECOND QUADRANT = 180 + O OD IN SECOND QUADRANT = 360 - O

THE CO-ORDINATES OF A POINT (X Y ) GIVEN ITS DISTANCE (L) 11 AND BEARING ( O ) FROM A CO-ORDINATED POINT (X,Y) CAN BE CALCULATED BY THE FOLLOWING FORMULAE : X = X + L SIN O 1 Y = Y + L COS O 1

KP2F54

FIGURE 5.4

BEARING 86 23’47.5"

BEARING 87 19’39.3"

.7" BEARING 85 27’55

BEARING 88 15’31 .1"

E OF FRONT FAC CURTAINWALL S/B UTMENT A AB 31’54" BEARING 84

c OF FOOTING AND L

AND PIER 4 S/B

FROM YASS

TO CANBERRA
FRONT FAC E OF CURTAINW ALL ABUTMENT B S/B BEARING 89 11’24"

c OF FOOTING AND L PIER 1 S/B

c PIER 3 S/B L

PIER 2 S/B

c OF FOOT L ING

E 297 514.921 N 1138 809.966

E 297 517.233 N 1138 777.467

E 297 519.016 N 1138 744.935

E 297 520.271 N 1138 712.379

E 297 520.997 N 1138 679.796

E 297 512.072 N 1138 842.523
2000

2250

2250

2250

1750

4500

2250

4500

4500

4500

7500

2250

2250

2000

1750

1750
3410 1090

1750 3500

1750 3500

1750 3500
CH 485.000

1750

3500
CH 452.500

4370 5800

CH 387.500
4500

CH 420.000

1430

CH 354.900

BEARING 85 55’52.6"

BEARING 86 52’23.6"

59’21.6" BEARING 84

c OF FOOTING AND L

c OF FOOTING AND L PIER 1 N/B

CE OF FRONT FA ALL CURTAINW NT A N/B ABUTME 84 2’51.7" BEARING

c PIER 3 N/B L

PIER 2 N/B

CH 370.880

CH 502.410

FRONT FACE OF CURTAINWAL L ABUTMENT B N/B BEARING 88 45"24.6"

c OF FOOTING L AND

CH 403.760

CH 436.640

CH 469.520

BEARING 87 48’54.6"

PIER 4 N/B

CH 7 337.900

CH 517.510 SOUTHBOUND CONTROL LINE R 2 000 000

1250

1750

1750

1750

3000

NORTHBOUND CONTROL LINE
NORTHBOUND BRIDGE

c L

R 1 987 000

E 297 487.500 N 1138 857.094 E 297 490.623 N 1138 824.561 E 297 493.202 N 1138 792.079 E 297 495.246 N 1138 759.560 E 297 496.756 N 1138 727.011 E 297 497.731 N 1138 694.432

PLAN
c L DENOTES DIMENSION NORMAL TO OF FOOTING AND PIERS AND FRONT FACE OF CURTAINWALL AT ABUTMENTS L DENOTES DIMENSION PARALLEL TOc OF FOOTING AND PIERS AND FRONT FACE OF CURTAINWALL AT ABUTMENTS DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR FOOTINGS ON SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE ARE TYPICAL FOR SIMILAR LOCATIONS ON NORTHBOUND BRIDGE NOT TO SCALE SEE SHEETS No 4 AND 5 FOR ABUTMENT FOOTING DETAILS AND SHEETS No 14 AND 15 FOR PIER FOOTING DETAILS.

GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN.

8 500

SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE

2250

c L

2250

1250

3000

ISSUE

DATE

REVISION

PREP CHECK AUTH

ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW

FIGURE 5.6

PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING

CHECKED

REGISTRATION No OF PLANS

RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS:

MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS

SHEET No

ISSUE

THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

OUTER FACE OF CONCRETE SAFETY BARRIER
Y

c
Y

SHORTEST LENGTH OF PIER BETWEEN SUPPORTS

P1

A1 LONGEST LENGTH

X

P1-B1

X

G1
OF SUPPORT A1-A2

B1

G7

G2
FRONT FACE OF ABUTMENT CURTAINWALL c OF BEARINGS

G8
SHORTEST LENGTH OF SUPPORT

G3

CONTROL LINE

G9

B1-B2

G4

G10

c

OF BEARINGS

G5

G11

FRONT FACE OF ABUTMENT CURTAINWALL

G6
P2 A2
Y

G12
X

Y

B2
X

c

OF BEARINGS

SPAN 1 LONGEST LENGTH BETWEEN SUPPORTS A2-P2 OUTER FACE OF CONCRETE SAFETY BARRIER

SPAN 2 c OF GIRDERS

FIGURE 5.9

Y

X

MID-ORDINATE RULE D BASE c C(mm) THE MID-ORDINATE.10(b) R R(m m ) KP2F510 . D. CAN BE FOUND USING THE FORMULA : D = R-‰ 4R†-C† FIGURE 5.10(a) DETERMINATION OF CURVATURE D = 10mm OR LESS TYPICAL ESS OR L 2 000 H1 NGT N LE CAL SPA TYPI FIGURE 5.

11 KP2F511 .SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS 45 SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS TOP OF PARAPET ON GRADE UP TO 4% 45 75 M20 ANCHOR BOLTS ANCHOR BOLTS CAST-IN NORMAL TO CONCRETE SURFACE c OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ELEVATION FOR TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILINGS FOR GRADES GREATER THAN 4%. ANCHOR BOLTS FOR ALL TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILINGS SHALL BE TRULY VERTICAL NOT TO SCALE SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS 65 SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS 55 SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS 65 TOP OF PARAPET 75 55 TOP OF PARAPET 75 ON ANY GRADE ON ANY GRADE M20 ANCHOR BOLTS ANCHOR BOLTS CAST-IN NORMAL TO CONCRETE SURFACE c OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUP M20 ANCHOR BOLTS ANCHOR BOLTS CAST-IN TO BE TRULY VERTICAL IN ALL CASES c OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ELEVATION FOR STEEL PEDESTRIAN BARRIER RAILINGS NOT TO SCALE ANCHOR BOLT GROUP ELEVATION FOR ALUMINIUM PEDESTRIAN BARRIER RAILINGS NOT TO SCALE FIGURE 5.

SECTION 6 FOUNDATIONS .

the minimum depth below ground level to the splice shall be clearly shown on the drawings. Sheets A and B) are provided for use when preparing drawings for either of the two standard prestressed reinforced concrete pile designs OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 5 .2 6.2. 6. Where piles exceed 20 metres in length.1 PILING Precast Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles For designs prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section or Consultants that prepare drawings for the Authority or for bridges that will become property of the Authority. whichever is the lower. may show some variations which will need to be included on the drawing. sketches provided by the engineer responsible for the design. This drawing shall clearly show the location of the test piles and representative piles. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB003 shall be used for pile drawings where normal driving conditions are known to exist. Sheets A and B) are provided for use when preparing drawings for either of the two standard precast reinforced concrete pile designs (Normal Driving Conditions and Hard Driving Conditions). to provide details of the pile layout for the structure.commonly used in conjunction with footings Drawings shall contain a layout plan to enable the correct setting out of foundation elements and appropriate notes (conforming to AS5100 . RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Numbers RTAB002A and RTAB002B (Reinforced Concrete Pile Design Information. See RTA Standard Drawing Nos RTAB003 AND RTAB004 for the typical level of detailing required for these types of piles. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Numbers RTAB0025 and RTAB0026 (Prestressed Concrete Pile Design Information. bar sizes and values in notes shall be completed using tables and details as shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB002A. 6. such as schedule values. The minimum depth shall be not less than 5 metres below the existing surface level or the design surface level. in each case. however. whilst RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB004 shall be used for pile drawings where hard driving conditions are known to exist. Where piles are required to be spliced.several types Pile/Pile cap combination Spread Footings Rock Anchors . the details provided in RTA Standard Drawing No RTAB048 (Epoxy Splice for Precast Concrete Piles) should be included on the pile drawings. Missing information.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Foundations 6 6.2 Prestressed Reinforced Concrete Driven Piles For designs prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section or Consultants that prepare drawings for the Authority or for bridges that will become property of the Authority. dimensions. A separate drawing shall be prepared.2. (See Clause 7 of RTA Specification B50).Bridge Design and RTA Technical Specifications) shall also be included.1 GENERAL FOUNDATIONS Various types of foundation elements are used in bridge construction and these include: (a) (b) (c) (d) Piles framed to headstock .

or casing requirements (temporary or permanent). Elevation of raked pile (if required) showing all of the above information. or Estimated Foundation Level. sketches provided by the engineer responsible for the design. The minimum depth shall be not less than 5 metres below the existing surface level or the design surface level. Pile casing if required (shown in section with an appropriate note stating " Casing shown in section "). Provision of temporary steel casing is quite often a decision which is made by the contractor. as appropriate. in each case. however. Pile cross section showing spacing of main reinforcement.3 Cast-in-Place Reinforced Concrete Piles No standard drawing is available for this type of pile however the drawing format for this type of pile is relatively standard. Piles are normally embedded 50mm into abutment beams or pile caps. Elevation of pile showing Top RL and Contract Level. Indication of soffit level of pile cap or headstock.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Foundations (Normal Driving Conditions and Hard Driving Conditions).5 of this Manual. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB027 (Prestressed Concrete Pile – Normal Driving Conditions) shall be used for pile drawings where normal driving conditions are known to exist. dimensions. This drawing shall clearly show the location of the test piles and representative piles. including the rock type and classification. as dictated by geotechnical information and / or the design engineer's requirements.2. to provide details of the pile layout for the structure. Missing information. Piles may have no casing requirements. the minimum depth below ground level to the splice shall be clearly shown on the drawings. Where piles exceed 20 metres in length. A separate drawing shall be prepared. bar sizes and values in notes shall be completed using tables and details as shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB0025. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Nos RTAB027 and RTAB028) for the typical level of detailing required for these types of piles. Anchorage length of reinforcement into pile cap or headstock. such as schedule values. 6. whilst RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB028 (Prestressed Concrete Pile – Hard Driving Conditions) shall be used for pile drawings where hard driving conditions are known to exist. may show some variations which will need to be included on the drawing. whichever is the lower. Drawings shall contain the following essential information: • • Pile layout plan in accordance with Clause 5. Where piles are required to be spliced. Socket length of pile into rock. • • • • • • OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 5 . the details provided in RTA Standard Drawing No RTAB048 (Epoxy Splice for Precast Concrete Piles) should be included on the pile drawings. at toe.

5 H Section Steel Driven Piles OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 5 .1 of AS 5100. • • • • • • Figure 6. only the top section of the pile is of reinforced concrete whilst the bottom section is of earth plug or granular material.2. Details of any required casing splice (in accordance with RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB039).3 shows the typical level of detailing required for this type of pile.1. Details of pile driving shoe (in accordance with Chief Bridge Engineer Circular No 91/6).2. Generally these piles shall be detailed as for steel cased Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete piles with the differences being. The outside faces of the column extensions must be located within the outside faces/perimeter of the supporting piles. 6. For those Cast-in-Place reinforced concrete piles that rely on the support of the soil above the rock socket for lateral loads. • no socket into rock shown although small embedment of the toe of the steel pile into soft rock may sometimes be specified by the designer • generally.4 Tubular Steel Driven Piles No standard drawing has been developed for this type of pile drawing so each drawing for this type of pile shall be detailed in accordance with sketches provided by the engineer responsible for the design.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Foundations Note: Where bars are closely spaced.2. Development and splice lengths of closely spaced reinforcing bars may need to be determined from the formula 13. care shall be taken to ensure that bars in the pile cap or headstock can pass between the exposed pile reinforcement. pile lengths and bar marks where numerous pile lengths are involved).1(1) given in Clause 13.5. The construction joint between the tops of the supporting piles and the bottoms of the column extensions must be located at least 500mm below the constructed ground level at columns on land. Contract Level at toe.1. whichever is the lower. The diameters of the supporting piles must be at least 200mm greater than the diameter of the column extensions. below the NWL for non-tidal watercourses or below the MLWSL for tidal watercourses. Pile schedule (showing pile numbers. A sketch showing orientation of bars may be advantageous. Top RL.2. minimum pile embedment below the existing or new surface level. must be specified in addition to the rock socket requirements. • notes shall include driving details. 6. Development and splice lengths for reinforcement given in Section 23 of this Manual are dependant on the specified minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars.2. Reinforced concrete piles that support single column extensions must have a diameter greater that the diameter of the column above to account for construction tolerances when installing the piles.

Essential information: • • Pile layout plan in accordance with Clause 5. Generally the encased section shall be that which is exposed to the air. Figure 6. should also be shown Pile cross section in the encased section. whichever is the lower. as appropriate and top RL Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 5 • OTB005 .2 and Clause 6. Figure 6. 6. however the location of any spread footing shall be shown on the foundation layout. at toe Indication of soffit level of pile cap or headstock Concrete encasement (if applicable) together with reinforcement and protection of the concrete encasement against aggressive soil.5 of this Manual Elevation of pile showing Top RL and Contract Level or Estimated Foundation Level. 6. The cover to reinforcement shall be in accordance with AS 5100 . water or aggressive soils.6 and Figure 5.4 of this Manual shall be complied with ie the detailing required for piles shall be as outlined in the relevant clause and Pile caps shall be detailed in accordance with the requirements for Spread Footings.3 PILE / PILE CAP COMBINATIONS Where piles are used in conjunction with pile caps.4 SPREAD FOOTINGS Generally spread footings are detailed on pier or abutment drawings.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Foundations 'H' piles may be used with or without the top encased in reinforced concrete. if required. Essential information: • Layout plan in accordance with Clause 5.6 of this Manual showing dimensions Elevation of spread footing showing Contract Level or Estimated Foundation Level.5 shows the typical level of detailing required for this type of pile.2.3 shows the typical level of detailing required for pile/pile cap combinations. as appropriate. the relevant section of Clause 6.Bridge Design and RTA Technical Specifications). must be specified The length of pile penetration into the pile cap must be specified • • • • • • • • When using these piles care shall be taken when arranging reinforcing bars in pile caps and headstocks to ensure that the reinforcement does not clash with the designed pile location. if applicable Elevation of raked pile (if required) showing all of the above information Table of levels and lengths Splice detail (if applicable) Minimum pile embedment below the existing or new surface.

etc.1(b) and 6.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Foundations • • • Mass concrete The position of the construction joint in the column above top of spread footing The location of starter bars for splicing with main column reinforcement.1(c) show the typical level of detailing required for spread footings.3 in Section 5 of AS5100 .1 of AS 5100.1. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 5 of 5 .1(1) given in Clause 13. Clause 13. locations shall be shown on an elevation and any other views necessary to clearly show angles. Development and splice lengths of closely spaced reinforcing bars may need to be determined from the formula 13.4.Bridge Design. Where starter bars are provided to facilitate splicing of main vertical reinforcement. Essential information: • The location of test anchors • An Elevation showing: Anchorage and anchorage recess Bonded length (for primary grouting) Free length (for secondary grouting) Depth of drilled holes ie 500 below end of anchor Bore hole diameter and length Sheathing and extent of sheathing • • • A cross section showing: Location and size of pipe through pile or footing Rock Anchor Notes as per Figure 6.1. states that not more than 50% of the total area of tensile reinforcement shall be spliced at any one section.5.1(a). Starter bars shall be placed alternately around the column base to facilitate splicing with main reinforcement ensuring that the main reinforcement fits within the shear reinforcement. Development and splice lengths for reinforcement given in Section 23 of this Manual are dependant on the specified minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. 6. necessitating the use of two bar marks.2. 6.5 modified to suit the actual case Proprietary names shall not be shown. Particular care shall be exercised to provide required clearances when using large diameter reinforcement at close spacing.2.5 ROCK ANCHORS The location of rock anchors should generally be shown in the Foundation Layout.4.2. they shall be detailed with two vertical leg lengths. Where rock anchors are used to tie back walls and abutments. Figures 6.4.

000 246.685 250.2. SOFFIT OF ABUTMENT OR PILE CAP CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa.572 257. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 5 ISSUE A CAD No KP2F623. LENGTH OF PILE ’L’ ’SA’ DENOTES MINIMUM ALLOWABLE SHAFT ADHESION (kPa).350 251.4 43. MINIMUM LAP LENGTH FOR ·10 SPIRAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 320mm.8" BEARING 92%%d 37’ 0.212 N 6121 364.000 BEARING 86%% CH 955.3 ABUTMENT B 4000 2000 150 DRAWING 75 PREPARED BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS TYPICAL PILE ELEVATION FOR VALUES OF "x" .400 246. LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY THE LENGTH OF THE LAP.3 REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW HIGHWAY No 2 SHIRE OF YASS TOP OF ROCK PIER 2 PIER 3 BRIDGE OVER YASS RIVER AT 4.7" BEARING 89%%d 29’ 43.400 LENGTH ’L’ 17 460 17 572 17 685 22 550 12 350 11 550 9 052 9 164 9 277 Ls 2000 2000 2000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 ISSUE DATE FIGURE 6. CONTRACT LEVELS MAY BE RAISED WHERE THE MINIMUM ROCK SOCKET LENGTH AND FOUNDING MATERIAL PROPERTIES ARE ACHIEVED AT A HIGHER LEVEL.532 N 6121 328.400 246. 1 1 900 CONTRACT LEVELS SHALL BE LOWERED WHERE THE MINIMUM ROCK SOCKET LENGTH AND/OR MINIMUM FOUNDING MATERIAL PROPERTIES ARE NOT ACHIEVED. 28-CS-’x’ 12-28-CS-’x’-EQUALLY SPACED PILE CONTRACT LEVELS (RL ’B’) AND ROCK SOCKET LENGTHS (’Ls’) ARE BASED ON MINIMUM PROPERTIES OF FOUNDING MATERIAL (’BP’ AND ’SA’) AS GIVEN IN TABLE 2.564 255.000 240. 1-10W-CSP-’x’-150 PITCH (PROVIDED 1. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS 1726.6KM SOUTH OF YASS PILES PREPARED BY CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02) Ls TABLE 2 TOE OF PILE CONTRACT LEVEL RL ’B’ LOCATION MAX DESIGN AXIAL LOAD PER PILE AT SLS (kN) DESIGN BENDING MOMENT PER PILE (kN/m) 400 150 400 MIN PROPERTIES OF ROCK SOCKET (kPa) ‘BP’ 3000 4000 2000 ‘SA’ 80 DESIGN PIER 1 .000 R 670 000 CH 1058.396 E 601 047.824 1 150 1 150 1 150 1 150 18 N 6121 299.677 RL ’B’ 240.000 CH 1021.550 255.000 CH 1050. ’BP’ DENOTES MINIMUM ALLOWABLE BASE BEARING CAPACITY (kPa). .000 CH 985.000 240. MINIMUM LAP LENGTH REQUIRED FOR DIA 28 BARS SHALL BE 700mm.1" 16 2 250 1 CONTROL MCA3 2 250 1 150 1 150 12 4 6 8 10 14 17 2 250 E 601 050. TABLE 1 LOCATION PILE No 1 ABUTMENT A 2 3 PIER 1 4 TO 7 8 TO 11 12 TO 15 16 ABUTMENT B 17 18 ’x’ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RL ’A’ 257.936 2 E 601 049.SEE TABLE 1 ABUTMENT A 2000 0002 246 BC 1002 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: 1234 FOR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.000 227.5 TURNS AT TOP AND BOTTOM OF PILE ADJUSTED TO ZERO PITCH) SECTION 1 - ’Ls’ DENOTES SOCKET LENGTH.FROM YASS 00 CH 1086.460 257.797 2 250 E 601 048.880 N 6121 430.783 13 15 5 7 9 11 3 1 150 1 150 PILE LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE c OF PILE L 700 GENERAL NOTES 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm 50 SCALE TOP OF PILE RL ’A’ 10W-CSP-’x’ 200 100 OR AS SHOWN.452 255.000 d 22’ 27.000 240.600 CH 1020.150 250. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 75mm IF NO DIMENSION SHOWN.500 CH 1000.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.9" 83%%d 56’ BEARING TO GUNDAGAI 07’ 51.600 238.887 N 6121 401.9" BEARING 95% %d CH 950.189 E 601 047.

THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE SP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1554 PART1.140 36.7 AND 20 .295 36.500 36.090 36.300 .275 36. 18 AND 19 FOR VALUES ’A’.375 21. ELEVATION COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 55mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B2 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa.26 FOR VALUES ’A’. 1 SECTION NOT TO SCALE 1 - FIGURE 6.3 AND 24 . SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH ABUTMENT CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE EPOXY COATED .245 36.’B’ AND ’L’ SEE TABLE I GENERAL NOTES 0 SCALES 500 250 500 1000 1500mm OR AS SHOWN.11 AND 14 .430 36. 5 6 13 19 22 PILE LAYOUT AND DETAILS PREPARED BY CLIENT 3 10 11 16 17 26 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET F3 CONTROL LINE 7 1200 1200 (NORTHBOUND) 1200 1200 23 350 TYP 700 TYP 350 TYP 7 DENOTES TEST PILE PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 FIELD SPLICE DETAILS AN ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF WELDING MAY BE USED IF APPROVED BY THE SUPERINTENDENT NOT TO SCALE PILE LAYOUT PILE POSITIONS ARE GIVEN AT THE SOFFIT LEVEL OF PIER PILE CAPS AND AT UNDERSIDE OF ABUTMENT HEADSTOCKS NOT TO SCALE DENOTES PILE RAKED 1 IN 8 IN THE DIRECTION SHOWN. FROM SYDNEY TO NEWCASTLE PREBORING MAY BE REQUIRED FOR PILES TO REACH CONTRACT LEVEL.500 31.1 .225 36.170 36.000 RL ’B’ 23. WELDING SYMBOLS ARE TO AS 1101 PART 3.325 36.195 36.500 31.PILE CAP ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK SOFFIT LEVEL RL ’A’ TOP OF PILE RL ’A’ TOP OF PILE PILE CAP SOFFIT LEVEL RL ’A’ TOP OF PILE SOFFIT LEVEL RL ’A’ TOP OF PILE ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK SOFFIT LEVEL TABLE I PILE No 1 2 3 RL ’A’ 36. TWO COATS OF COAL TAR EPOXY PAINT SHALL BE APPLIED TO SURFACES IN c OF PILES ABUTMENT A L 4 20 1 24 5 8 2 CH CH 12 9 14 18 CH CH 15 21 25 2 PIER 1 c L PIER 2 c L c OF PILES ABUTMENT B L 12-Y-1C 12-S-1C DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH PROVIDING A MINIMUM DRY FILM THICKNESS PER COAT OF 150 m. PREBORING TO EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL THROUGH EMBANKMENT FILL IS REQUIRED FOR PILES 1 TO 7 AND 20 TO 25. 13.23 FOR VALUES ’A’.’B’ AND ’L’ SEE TABLE I VERTICAL PILE PILE Nos 12.’B’ AND ’L’ SEE TABLE I RAKED PILE PILE Nos 8 .’B’ AND ’L’ SEE TABLE I RAKED PILE PILE Nos 4 . LAP UNIVERSAL BEARING PILES SHALL BE TO AS/NZS 3679.400 31.120 36. 2. SURFACES OF STEEL PILES Nos 1 TO 7 AND 20 TO 26 SHALL BE ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANED TO CLASS 2 2IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1627 PART 4.17 FOR VALUES ’A’. PILES SHALL BE DRIVEN TO REFUSAL ON SOUND SANDSTONE OR SILTSTONE.000 LENGTH OF PILE ’L’ 13 140 13 245 13 345 13 190 13 300 13 400 13 505 8 565 8 500 8 565 8 500 15 240 15 345 15 445 15 550 15 170 15 275 15 375 1 - 1 20-12-Y-1C AT 150 APPROX 20-12-Y-1C AT 150 APPROX 10-12-S-1C EQUALLY SPACED 4 5 6 7 8 TO 11 12 AND 13 14 TO 17 18 AND 19 20 10-12-S-1C EQUALLY SPACED 21 22 23 24 25 26 8 750 8 1 1 310 UBP 79 310 UBP 79 310 UBP 79 310 UBP 79 RL ’B’ CONTRACT LEVEL RL ’B’ CONTRACT LEVEL RL ’B’ CONTRACT LEVEL RL ’B’ CONTRACT LEVEL VERTICAL PILE PILE Nos 1 .500 31.345 36. DENOTES VERTICAL PILE .

SEE TABLE I . CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 c OF PILE CAP L COLUMN AND HEADSTOCK MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa.925 CJ RL 105.500 PIER 1 RL 99.025 116.125 HORIZONTAL ABUTMENT B SIDE TOP OF HEADSTOCK VARIES .025 NCF 2 50 100 50 FORMED HOLES .TYP SECTION 300 300 0 100 200 300 4 400 500mm c OF PIER L VIEW CJ NCF 3 3 3800 1900 1250 2 - MORTAR PAD 4 - 4 - RL 99. VIEW 1 - NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET.3.280 RL 105.480 80 x 300 DEEP RL 106.175 RL 105.400 PIER 3 1900 1250 210 210 80 x 300 DEEP FORMED HOLES 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE c OF PILE CAP L COLUMN AND HEADSTOCK c OF PIER L 420 540 ELEVATION R 650 B c OF COLUMN L R 650 DETAIL TYPICAL B - DETAIL A 100 50 0 100 200 300 400 500mm PIER c L GENERAL NOTES 0 1000 2000 3000mm SCALE 1925 1925 1925 1925 1000 500 OR AS SHOWN.CONCRETE PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT c OF PILE CAP L COLUMN AND HEADSTOCK ’X’ SECTION 3 - FOR CHAINAGES AND VALUE OF "X" .FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No RL 107.DOWNSTREAM 1 4450 8900 4450 UPSTREAM MORTAR PAD THICKNESS 1 2 ABUTMENT A SIDE 950 1900 950 HORIZONTAL RL 107. 8100 CONTROL 4050 4050 LINE FIGURE 6.900 PIER 2 RL 98. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20 x 20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20 x 20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.280 83.1 TABLE I A 1 PIER c L 2 3 49.555 6 875 9 930 11 450 CH PIER CHAINAGE ’X’ BEARING 151%%d 25’ 41" PIERS .

SEE SPECIFICATION.D. ELEVATION FOR REDUCED LEVELS A.E.6 CAD No KP2F641A. ANY OVER EXCAVATION SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH MASS CONCRETE . CONTRACT LEVEL MAY BE LOWERED 600mm MAX WITHOUT CHANGING THE CONCRETE SECTION 3 - SECTION. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 c OF PIER L MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40. 1(a) c OF PIER L (500) 500 E N c OF FOOTING.000 THE CALCULATED MAXIMUM FOUNDATION PRESSURE IS 2000kPa.TYPICAL NCF . 4.F AND DIMENSION ‘Y’ SEE TABLE I WHERE MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE "MEDIUM" 4500 2250 2250 FIGURE 6. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS 1726.MPa. COLUMN L AND HEADSTOCK PIER CONCRETE .SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PLAN FOR MORTAR PAD AND PEDESTAL LAYOUT DETAILS. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. THE PLACING OF CONCRETE IN THE COLUMNS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ONE CONTINUOUS OPERATION UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.TYP 850 850 SCALE 1000 500 3000 1500 1500 GENERAL NOTES 0 1000 2000 3000mm OR AS SHOWN.B.UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM 9000 4500 1 2 RL ‘G’ RL ‘F’ 4500 1 2 2 ABUTMENT A SIDE 800 800 1600 ABUTMENT B SIDE TABLE I HORIZONTAL LOCATION E PIER 1 N ‘Y’ RL ‘A’ RL ‘B’ RL ‘C’ RL ‘D’ RL ‘E’ SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE RL ‘E’ RL ‘D’ CJ RL ‘C’ PIER 3 RL ‘B’ 75 75 150 150 PIER 4 NORTHBOUND BRIDGE 2 c OF PIER L PIER 1 LOCATION E N ‘Y’ RL ‘A’ RL ‘B’ RL ‘C’ RL ‘D’ RL ‘E’ RL ‘F’ RL ‘G’ PIER 2 PIER 2 VIEW 3 3 - 2 PIER 3 PIER 4 CJ SIDES OF FOOTING CAST AGAINST ROCK. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 CONTRACT LEVEL RL ‘A’ c OF COLUMN L 300 MINIMUM INTO DACITE 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE c OF COLUMN L OF MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION "VERY HIGH" EXCEPT PIER 4 SOUTHBOUND UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. CONTRACT LEVEL OF FOOTINGS SHALL NOT BE RAISED ABOVE RL 19.C.dgn . REFER TO FIGURE 5. SEE VIEW 1 ON SHEET No 2 PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 FOR INFORMATION RELATING TO SPREAD FOOTING SETTING OUT.

MPa.TYPICAL NCF .C. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS 1726.000 THE CALCULATED MAXIMUM FOUNDATION PRESSURE IS 2000kPa. CONTRACT LEVEL OF FOOTINGS SHALL NOT BE RAISED ABOVE RL 19. 1(a) c OF PIER L (500) 500 E N c OF FOOTING. REFER TO FIGURE 5.B. 4. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 CONTRACT LEVEL RL ‘A’ c OF COLUMN L 300 MINIMUM INTO DACITE 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE c OF COLUMN L OF MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION "VERY HIGH" EXCEPT PIER 4 SOUTHBOUND UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET.UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM 9000 4500 1 2 RL ‘G’ RL ‘F’ 4500 1 2 2 ABUTMENT A SIDE 800 800 1600 ABUTMENT B SIDE TABLE I HORIZONTAL LOCATION E PIER 1 N ‘Y’ RL ‘A’ RL ‘B’ RL ‘C’ RL ‘D’ RL ‘E’ SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE RL ‘E’ RL ‘D’ CJ RL ‘C’ PIER 3 RL ‘B’ 75 75 150 150 PIER 4 NORTHBOUND BRIDGE 2 c OF PIER L PIER 1 LOCATION E N ‘Y’ RL ‘A’ RL ‘B’ RL ‘C’ RL ‘D’ RL ‘E’ RL ‘F’ RL ‘G’ PIER 2 PIER 2 VIEW 3 3 - 2 PIER 3 PIER 4 CJ SIDES OF FOOTING CAST AGAINST ROCK. COLUMN L AND HEADSTOCK PIER CONCRETE . ANY OVER EXCAVATION SHALL BE BACKFILLED WITH MASS CONCRETE .6 1 CAD No KP2F641A. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 c OF PIER L MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40. THE PLACING OF CONCRETE IN THE COLUMNS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ONE CONTINUOUS OPERATION UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.D.dgn .E.TYP 850 850 SCALE 1000 500 3000 1500 1500 GENERAL NOTES 0 1000 2000 3000mm OR AS SHOWN.F AND DIMENSION ‘Y’ SEE TABLE I WHERE MINIMUM ROCK STRENGTH CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE "MEDIUM" 4500 2250 2250 FIGURE 6. ELEVATION FOR REDUCED LEVELS A.SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PLAN FOR MORTAR PAD AND PEDESTAL LAYOUT DETAILS. CONTRACT LEVEL MAY BE LOWERED 600mm MAX WITHOUT CHANGING THE CONCRETE SECTION 3 - SECTION. SEE VIEW 1 ON SHEET No 2 PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 FOR INFORMATION RELATING TO SPREAD FOOTING SETTING OUT. SEE SPECIFICATION.

560 E 297 496.966 E 297 517.500 CH 420.SHEET B c OF PIER 1 L c OF PIER 2 L c OF PIER 3 L DOWNSTREAM c OF PIER 4 L PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PIER SETTING OUT PLAN NOT TO SCALE DENOTES DIMENSIONS GIVEN ALONG PIER c L L DENOTES DIMENSION NORMAL TO PIER c PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DIMENSIONS GIVEN FOR PIER 1 ON NORTHBOUND BRIDGE ARE TYPICAL FOR ALL PIER HEADSTOCKS (S/B AND N/B) 2 CAD No KP2F641B.dgn .500 CH 436.079 E 297 495.271 N 1138 712. 1(b) NORTHBOUND CONTROL E 297 493.246 N 1138 759.202 E 297 490.000 SOUTHBOUND CONTROL CH 403. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.880 FROM YASS LINE R 2000 000 SCALE 1000 500 0 1000 2000 3000mm OR AS SHOWN.935 E 297 520.921 N 1138 809. 4.016 N 1138 744.233 N 1138 777.011 L NORTHBOUND BRIDGE c LINE R 1987 000 PIER CONCRETE . TO CANBERRA FIGURE 6.379 100 50 100 50 L SOUTHBOUND BRIDGE c GENERAL NOTES CH 387.467 E 297 519.561 N 1138 792.000 CH 452.756 N 1138 727.640 CH 469.760 CH 7370.30 NOM THICK MORTAR PAD UPSTREAM A c OF PIER HEADSTOCK L ABUTMENT B SIDE DOWNSTREAM TOP OF HEADSTOCK HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL SOUTHBOUND CONTROL LINE c OF PIER HEADSTOCK L (NORTHBOUND CONTROL LINE) B 0 100 200 300 TOP OF HEADSTOCK 30 NOM THICK MORTAR PAD SECTION 4 400 500mm SECTION 5 - 0 100 200 300 400 500mm 2000 2000 2000 2000 100 50 100 50 c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS c BEARINGS AND L MORTAR PADS c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS c BEARINGS AND L PEDESTALS 320 640 320 600 ABUTMENT A SIDE 540 300 VIEW 1 1 270 270 90 x 280 DEEP FORMED HOLES 300 70 x 280 DEEP FORMED HOLES SEE SHEETS No ?? AND ?? FOR DETAILS OF BEARINGS 4 - 4 - 5 - 5 - UPSTREAM 215 c OF PIER 1 L c OF PIER 2 L c OF PIER 3 L c OF PIER 4 L 215 DETAIL A - 430 TYPICAL FOR EACH MORTAR PAD 2 REQUIRED PER HEADSTOCK 0 100 200 300 400 500mm DETAIL B - TYPICAL FOR EACH PEDESTAL 8 REQUIRED PER HEADSTOCK 0 100 200 300 400 500mm E 297 514.520 CH 485.623 N 1138 824. SEE SHEET No 3.

.. UPON LOWERING OF THE FOOTINGS. 36-L-1P TYP AT A SPACING NOT EXCEEDING THAT SHOWN. .. ...SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING CLIENT PLAN OF FOOTING COLUMN STARTER BARS L-1P AND L-2P NOT DETAILED LL-1P AND LL-4P BARS SHALL BE PLACED NEAREST TO RESPECTIVE CONCRETE SURFACES INFORMATION RELEVANT TO THE REINFORCEMENT OF THE SPREAD FOOTING AND COLUMN CONNECTION SHOWN ONLY .TO ILLUSTRATE THE CORRECT PLACEMENT OF STARTER BARS DRAWING PREPARED DESIGN 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER. ..... 150 b) OTHER BARS: . BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No . REINFORCEMENT IN THE HEADSTOCK MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY TO AVOID COLUMN REINFORCEMENT WHERE NECESSARY. 1(c) 36-L-2P THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT 120 COVER ISSUE TYP DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 125 TYP 13 EQUAL SPACES AT 130 APPROX ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 13 EQUAL SPACES AT 130 APPROX 36-L-1P SECTION 1 - 18-32-LL-1P-FF-250 AND 18-20-LL-4P-NF-250 20-S-1P DENOTES COVER DIMENSION PROVIDED FOR CONCRETE CAST AGAINST GROUND PIER REINFORCEMENT . 4. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWING. 36-L-1P 36-L-1P THE FOOTINGS MAY BE LOWERED 600mm MAX WITH THE LENGTHS OF THE VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT BEING ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY.. ADDITIONAL GROUPS OF HORIZONTAL TIES SHALL BE PROVIDED.COLUMN REINFORCEMENT 2550 1250 100 1200 LAP 1 - 200 1 20-LL-3P 1100 300 TYP 28-LL-2P GENERAL NOTES 4 BUNDLES OF 1-20-S-1P-EF-250 AND 2-20-A-1P-250 300 TYP 36-36-L-1P-SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 1 - 30-36-L-2P SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 32-LL-1P AND 1 - 0 500 1000 1500mm SCALE 500 250 OR AS SHOWN NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE 40 mm IF CONCRETE IS CAST AGAINST 20-LL-4P FORMWORK AND 70 mm IF CAST AGAINST THE GROUND. .. 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 20-A-1P 36-L-2P 20-A-1P TYP 150 FIGURE 6. . THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: BAR SIZE: a)HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: 650 17 SPACES AT 100 = 1700 36-L-2P 14-28-LL-2P-FF-250 AND 14-20-LL-3P-NF-250 36-L-1P TYP DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR.. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED........ . ...... .. ... . .. LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY ELEVATION 20-S-1P 500 TYP TYP 125 FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH.. .

MPa. TO SUIT MINIMUM HOLE DIMENSION FOR ROCK ANCHOR DUCT I. LOW RELAXATION STRANDS TO AS 1311 WITH A MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD OF . TO SUIT ROCK ANCHOR 12-HS-1 GENERAL NOTES 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm SCALE 150 200 100 OR AS SHOWN.D.. THE DESIGN WORKING LOAD (TD) OF EACH ANCHOR SHALL BE .. ANCHORS TO BE ASSESSED BY PROVING TEST SHALL PRECEED THE STRESSING OF ALL OTHER ANCHORS. ROCK ANCHOR RECESSES SHALL BE FILLED WITH . ANCHORS SHALL BE ASSESSED DURING STRESSING BY PROVING TEST AND ....... AT LEAST ..D.kN. ANCHORS SHALL BE ASSESSED DURING STRESSING BY SUITABILITY TEST..2mm STRAND ROCK ANCHOR 2-12-HS-1EF VOID FORMER THROUGH FOOTING. 16-HT-1 FITMENT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE EACH ROCK ANCHOR SHALL BE COMPRISED OF .dgn .. FIGURE 6..c ROCK ANCHORS L 80 150 300 RECESS DEPTH TO SUIT ANCHORAGE 5-16-HT-1-125 LIVE END ANCHORAGE FOR 2/ 15.. THE REMAINING ANCHORS SHALL BE ASSESSED BY ACCEPTANCE TEST.2mm DIAMETER SUPER GRADE STRESS RELIEVED.. 5 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02) TYPICAL SECTION FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CAD No KP2F65..MPa CONCRETE AT THE CONCLUSION OF STRESSING OPERATIONS. MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE AT TRANSFER OF PRESTRESS SHALL BE .../15..kN.. I.

SECTION 7 DRAWING PRACTICE .

1 of AS 1100 Part 101 and given that final drawings are to be produced in A1 size.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual. the font type used for general text shall be similar to International ISO.3 7. The use of a symbol within a text string to denote the word “and” (&) on any drawing is unacceptable and shall not be used under any circumstances. views etc and title block information as shown in Figures 7. In all cases. 7.3. ISO 3098B Upright would be an acceptable font type.1 DIMENSIONS General Each dimension necessary for the complete definition of a particular element shall be clearly shown on the drawing and shall be shown once only. 7. bridge name and registration number of plans or sketch numbers in title blocks as shown in Figures 7.1 LINEWORK Generaly. The method of showing dimensions shall be in accordance with AS1100 Part 101.1 in AS 1100 Part 101 and Figure 7.2 7mm HIGH . the text on all drawings shall be in upper case with the size and application being in accordance with the following: 3.Element titles as appropriate.1 and 7. For drawings prepared by consultants for the Authority. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 5 .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Practice 7 DRAWING PRACTICE 7. The font type used in title blocks shall be Arial. Dimensions shall be placed on drawings using the 'aligned' method with each dimension being placed parallel to it's dimension line in order that it may be read from either the bottom or the right hand side of the drawing.3. all linework on drawings shall be in accordance with Table 3.2 For drawings prepared by the Authority.Titles of sections. dimensions shown on drawings shall be in millimetres and they shall be shown in accordance with AS 1100 Part 101 ie the use of a space between the third and fourth digit in a four digit number is optional however the space is mandatory in a five digit number. or drawings for bridges that will become property of the Authority. The dimensioning of any element shall be such that no dimension relating to that element shall need to be deduced from other dimensions nor that the drawing must be scaled to determine the dimension. For example.2 TEXT In accordance with Table 4.3. dimensions and General Notes 5mm HIGH .3.1 and 7.General text.3.5mm HIGH . the font type used for general text shall be International ISO. A chain of dimensions shall be covered by an overall dimension except where dimensional tolerances are of critical importance.

5 metres (dependant upon slope of existing surface) Chainages 0. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 5 . either the “aligned” method or the “point” method may be used. be dimensioned by the use of a dimension line which passes through or is in line with the centre of the arc and terminates at the lead end with a single arrowhead.1 metres 7.2 Order of accuracy for dimensions The following order of accuracy shall be used on all drawings: Concrete dimensions Reinforcing bar spacing 5mm Steel plate widths Steel plate lengths Steel sections 1mm 1mm 1mm (as necessary for cambered plates etc) 0.3. in the majority of cases. 7. Dimensions and notes shown with leaders shall be inscribed using the “unidirectional” method. Leaders for notes that terminate in an arrowhead shall terminate either on the outline of the element or the outer edge of a fully shaded or hatched detail. however radii of arcs which need not have their centres located shall be dimensioned using one of the methods shown in AS 1100 Part 101. Dimensions for radii shall be preceded by the conventional abbreviation 'R'.100 metres 0.4 DIMENSION LINES. Projection lines for dimensions shall extend from a point not less than 2mm (at normal scale) from the surface of the object to a point not less than 2mm beyond the dimension line. be unbroken.0 or 0. PROJECTION LINES AND NOTE LEADERS Dimension lines shall not be interrupted for the insertion of dimensions and shall terminate in easily readable arrowheads or a fully shaded small circle as appropriate. This method of representing details drawn out of scale shall not be applied to entire details that are shown 'NOT TO SCALE'. the dimension shall be underlined with a full thick line. Dimension lines shall not be shown as centrelines or as part of an elements outline.1 metres 1. Where it is necessary to indicate that a particular dimension on a drawing is not shown to the same scale as the view or detail in which it appears.001 metres Flood and water levels 0.001 metres 0. Projection lines shall.3.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Practice Where several dimensions are to be given to a common datum surface. Radii shall.3 Reduced levels and chainages Reduced levels and Chainages shall be shown in metres on all drawings with the following order of accuracy being used: Design Surface Levels Contract Levels Existing surface levels Contours 0. in the majority of cases. Leaders for notes shall commence from either the beginning or the end of note and shall terminate in either an arrowhead or a small fully shaded circle as appropriate.1mm (or as shown in manufacturer's catalogues) 7.

Scales shall be shown in the following manner: 0 20 10 The following scales are recommended for use: DETAIL DRAWINGS 1:1.5 20 40 60 80mm selected size. 1:2.7 OTB005 ELEVATIONS Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 5 . 1:7. 1:2000 and 1:2500. 1:500 000.5 and their decimal multiples. 1:50 000.5. 1:4*.g Deck Setting Out drawings Scales shall be shown on all drawings. 7. 1:100 000.6 PLAN VIEWS Plan views shall be drawn as a horizontal view taken immediately above the element under consideration.5* and 1:12. Drawings shall not contain two scales which are similar. 7. 1:250 000. SITE PLANS 1:500.5* and their decimal multiples (* indicates scales may be used for the Plan and Elevation on General Arrangement drawings only if required however their use should be kept to an absolute minimum) LOCALITY PLANS 1:1 000 000. 1:3*.5. 1:2.5 SCALES ON DRAWINGS Scales used on drawings will vary in accordance with the size and character of the feature being detailed or the degree of detailing required. All drawings should be drawn to a defined natural scale with the scale being so that the drawing may be easily read when reduced to half of it’s original Distorted scales should not be used except where special circumstances require distortion for clarity of presentation e. Hidden details shall be shown using broken lines in accordance with Figure 7. 1:12. 1:2. 1:7. they shall be represented in accordance with AS 1101 Part 101. 1:5. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 1:1. 7.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Practice The use of long leaders shall be avoided and leaders should in the majority of cases not be drawn parallel to dimension and/or projection lines.5. and 1:25 000. 1:5. 1:2. 1:1000. eg a scale of 1:2 shall not be used on the same drawing as a scale of 1:2.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual.

7. Where a series of sheets is necessary to adequately detail an element. the same section number shall not be used more that once in the sheet series.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Practice Elevations shall be drawn as a view seen from a vertical plane immediately in front of the element under consideration and shall be projected from that elements 'PLAN' view. eg Abutments Concrete – Sheet A. Hidden details shall be shown using broken lines in accordance with Figure 7. Plan. The designation of Views shall be numerical with View numbers not replicating any Section number already used. eg Abutments Concrete – Sheet A. Where section details cannot be shown on the sheet of origin.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual. the same view number shall not be used more that once in the sheet series. however. Abutments Concrete – Sheet B etc. 7. details beyond the cutting plane may be included (represented by diotted lines) provided that the included details are not confusing to the main details being shown.7mm thick lines. 7. Sections. The circular symbol used to indicate where the section is taken shall be in accordance with Section 2 of AS 1101 Part 501. Abutments Concrete – Sheet B etc. where possible. The circular symbol used to indicate where the view is taken shall be in accordance with that used for sections as shown in Section 2 of AS 1101 Part 501. The designation of Sections shall be numerical. Generally. shall be drawn adjacent to the plan or elevation to which they relate. Plan or Section.1 (Table of Line Types) in this Manual.8 SECTIONS Sections shall be drawn as a view from a cutting plane located through an element previously drawn as an Elevation.9 VIEWS Views shall be drawn representing what is seen from outside an element previously drawn as an Elevation. they shall be cross referenced in accordance with Appendix A of AS 1100 Part 301. Where a series of sheets is necessary to adequately detail an element.10 OTB005 DETAILS Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 5 . Section or View. If a series of cutting planes are used to define section details. any change in direction of the cutting plane shall be shown by 0. Hidden details shall be shown using broken lines in accordance with Figure 7. only the details at the cutting plane of the section should be shown.

The hexagonal symbol used to designate the detail shall be in accordance with that used for details as shown in Section 2 of AS 1101 Part 501. eg Abutments Concrete – Sheet A. The designation of Details shall be alphabetical. the item requiring enlargement shall be enclosed in a circle. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 5 of 5 . Where a series of sheets is necessary to adequately detail an element.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Drawing Practice Where the scale used to draw elements on drawings is too small to adequately show minute details. the same detail letter shall not be used more that once in the sheet series. Abutments Concrete – Sheet B etc. or other suitable shape and a detail mark shall be placed in a convenient location.

5mm THICK GREEN IN COLOUR CONCRETE OUTLINES (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) REINFORCEMENT AND LIMIT LINES (SCALES BELOW 1:20) STEELWORK IN SECTION (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR EXISTING WORK DENOTATION OF AMENDMENTS INCLUDING W-A-E FIGURE 7.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR 0.THIN 0.SHORT 0.35mm THICK RED IN COLOUR CHAIN .35mm THICK RED IN COLOUR 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR CENTRELINES CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (SCALES BELOW 1:20) CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) HIDDEN DETAILS CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS ZIG ZAG BREAK LINES CHAIN .TABLE OF LINE TYPES TYPE OF LINE EXAMPLE OF LINE 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR 0.THIN DOUBLE DASHED CONTINUOUS WAVY 0.LONG 0.25mm THICK WHITE IN COLOUR 0.35mm THICK RED IN COLOUR APPLICATION DIMENSION LINES NOTE LEADERS CONCRETE OUTLINES (SCALES BELOW 1:20) STEELWORK IN SECTION (SCALES BELOW 1:10) 0.1 .5mm THICK GREEN IN COLOUR DASHED .7mm THICK BLUE IN COLOUR REINFORCEMENT AND LIMIT LINES (SCALES ABOVE 1:20) DASHED .

5mm TEXT PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 0002 246 BC 1256 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER USE 7mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT USE 3.CONCRETE PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02) USE 2.5mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT 5961 FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 ISSUE A CAD No KP2F73.3.1 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW HIGHWAY No 2 SHIRE OF YASS THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.2 .5mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT BRIDGE OVER YASS RIVER AT 12.dgn FIGURE 7.dgn FIGURE 7. USE 3.3.ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW HIGHWAY No 2 SHIRE OF YASS THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.5mm TEXT PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 0002 246 BC 1002 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER USE 7mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT USE 3.6KM WEST OF YASS TRAFFIC BARRIER UPGRADE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02) USE 2.5mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT 5946 FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 5 ISSUE A CAD No KP2F73. USE 3.5mm TEXT USE 7mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT BRIDGE OVER YASS RIVER AT 4.6KM SOUTH OF YASS PIERS .

SECTION 8 SLOPING FEATURES .

1 SLOPES AND BATTERS SLOPING FEATURES These shall be expressed as the horizontal distance relative to the vertical distance. CROSSFALLS AND SUPERELEVATIONS Grades.2 GRADES.25 TO 1 .rock fill 1 TO 1 . OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . such as 3%.5 TO 1 . bridges. 8.embankments 1. with the horizontal distance being given first eg a) Slopes 2 TO 1 . an arrow shall indicate the downhill direction. A slope of 6% indicates a displacement of six units vertically in 100 units horizontally. crossfalls and superelevations of roads.embankments 1.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Sloping Features 8 8.stone pitching b) Batters 1 TO 4 . one of these dimensions being given as unity.rock cut c) Piles 1 IN 8 .raked piles A small right-angle triangle showing the horizontal/vertical ratio may also be drawn and dimensioned to indicate batters and the rake of piles. tunnels and similar structures shall be expressed as a percentage. Where a fall or grade is given for a surface.

SECTION 9 CONTOURS .

1 GENERAL CONTOURS A contour is a line on a drawing joining points on the existing surface which are all at the same height above a known datum.1. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . see Figure 18. Contour intervals shall be determined to suit the actual slope of the existing surface at each individual bridge site. contours should be shown at greater intervals than flatter slopes.3 LEVELS AND INTERVALS The level of each contour shall be shown at one end of the contour line only.2 in this Manual. however intervals should not exceed 1. or the intersection of the existing surface by a level surface of constant elevation.2.25 metres should be used. Line thickness shall be in accordance with Table 7.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Contours 9 9. contour intervals of 0.2 LINES Contours shall be drawn as uniform full lines except under structures where they shall be shown as dashed lines. 9.0 metre. At bridge sites where the existing surface is very flat. 9. At bridge sites where the existing surface is very steep.

SECTION 10 ABBREVIATIONS .

1 STANDARD METRIC ABBREVIATIONS UNIT Degree (angular) Degree (Celsius) Kilogram Kilometre Kilonewton Kilopascal Megapascal Metre Millimetre Minute (angular) Newton Pascal Radian Second (angular) Tonne SYMBOL ." t OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 4 . The arrangement of upper and lower case letters for each of the abbreviations shall be strictly adhered to...1..1.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS A list of standard abbreviations for metric units is shown in Table 10. TABLE 10...o oC kg km kN kPa MPa m mm .RTA Structural Drafting And Detailing Manual Abbreviations 10 ABBREVIATIONS 10..' N Pa RAD .1.

inside / internal . TABLE 10. acceptable abbreviations for bridge and related drawings is given in Table 10.Cheese .1 GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS WORD(S) Approximate Australian Height Datum Average Bench Mark Calculated High Flood Level Centre-to centre Centres Centreline Construction Joint Countersink Diameter .Countersunk .2 ACCEPTABLE ABBREVIATIONS A list of commonly used.1.Mushroom High Flood Level ABBREVIATION / SYMBOL APPROX AHD AV BM CALC HFL C/C CTRS CL CJ CSK DIA or Ø ID OD DS DRG No EF EA E EJ FF F FL HD CH HD CSK HD CUP HD HEX HD HEX SOC HD MUSH HD HFL OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 4 .Hexagon . Abbreviations shall not contain or carry a full stop.outside Downstream Drawing Number Each Face Equal Angle Expansion Bearing Expansion Joint Far Face Fixed Bearing Flat Head (Bolt) .RTA Structural Drafting And Detailing Manual Abbreviations 10.2.2.Cup .Hexagon Socket .

REP HFL RD ST TP TFB TFC TYP UTS UEA UB UBP UC UPVC US ULT ULS VC OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 4 .Circular .Square International System of Units (Systems International d’Unites) Intersection Point Maximum Minimum Modulus of Elasticity Near Face No Chamfer or Fillet Nominal Number Pitch Circle Diameter Parallel Flange Channel Percentage Plate Polytetrafluor-Ethylene Polyvinylchloride Prestressed Concrete Radius Recovery Peg Reduced Level Reinforced Concrete Required Reported High Flood Level Road Street Tangent Point Taper Flange Beam Taper Flange Channel Typical Ultimate Tensile Strength Unequal Angle Universal Beam Universal Bearing Pile Universal Column Unplasticised Polyvinylchloride Upstream Ultimate Ultimate Limit State Vertical Curve CHS RHS SHS SI ABBREVIATION / SYMBOL IP MAX MIN Mod E NF NCF NOM No PCD PFC % PL or P L PTFE PVC PSC R RP RL RC REQD REPORTED HFL.RTA Structural Drafting And Detailing Manual Abbreviations WORD(S) Hollow Section .Rectangular .

RTA Structural Drafting And Detailing Manual Abbreviations WORD(S) Water Level . any other abbreviations that are used in the drawings must be listed and explained in the LEGEND on each drawing that such abbreviations are used.3 OTHER ABBREVIATIONS The use of abbreviations. However.2 should be avoided.mean high water springs .mean high water . other than those listed in Tables 10.normal water level .mean low water . OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 4 .mean low water springs ABBREVIATION / SYMBOL NWL MHW MHWS MLW MLWS 10.1 and 10.

SECTION 11 SYMBOLS .

size and length of welds in welded joints and whether the welds are to be made in the shop or at the site shall be given on the drawings with the use of standard welding symbols. the symbols used shall be in accordance with Table 5. Like symbols shall not be used to reference different items in different views and or sections shown on the same drawing. 11.1 of this Manual.3 in this Manual. usually only to avoid repetition of a note or where space precludes the use of a direct note.2 SURFACE TEXTURE OF METALS Where.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Symbols 11 11. indication of surface texture for metal work is required to ensure an acceptable surface finish. dimension. 11.4 USE OF ASTERISKS AND SIMILAR SYMBOLS Asterisks. symbolic representation of material in section may not always be necessary and at smaller scales may be impossible. separate symbols shall be used for each reference. reduced level etc.3 MATERIALS Where it is necessary to show materials in section by symbols. filled in dots and triangles or other like symbols used as a reference to a note. However. Where new work and existing work are shown side by side on a drawing the new work shall be identified with the appropriate hatching with existing work being unhatched and shown in outline only using the ‘existing work’ line type as shown in Figure 7. Where it is necessary to have references to different items on the same drawing. on a drawing should be used as sparingly as possible. All welding symbols shall be in accordance with AS 1101. the denotation of the references shall be given in the General Notes and not under each view or section. type. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . The symbols shall be in accordance with AS ISO 1302. 11.301 and with Figure 11.3.1 in AS 1101. Where a symbol is used to reference many similar items in different views or sections on the same drawing. on bridge drawings. the necessary information shall be given by the use of standard symbols and roughness grade numbers.1 WELDING SYMBOLS The necessary information concerning the location.

3 KP2F113 .STEEL COMPONENTS LARGE SCALE SMALL SCALE CONCRETE ASPHALT AND BRICKWORK MORTAR CEMENT AND EPOXY JOINT SEALANT RUBBER NATURAL AND SYNTHETIC EARTH (FILL) EARTH ROCK GRANULAR FILL FIGURE 11.

SECTION 12 NOTES AND REFERENCES .

e. Where notes are in an abbreviated "note" form. Where notes are in sentence form. Where more than one sheet is used to detail a specific component of the structure (where Sheets A. C etc are used) and the General Notes apply to all sheets.. 12. For drawings prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section. not containing a finite verb. they shall be shown on “Sheet A” only and the note “For other General Notes relating to this sheet.. i.3 PARTICULAR NOTES Where a note applies to a particular view. see Sheet No. they shall not carry a full stop. it shall be placed as close as possible to the point to which it applies and not under “General Notes”. they shall carry a full stop.” shall be inserted in the General Notes area. For bridge and structural drawings prepared by consultants for the Authority or for drawings prepared for bridges and other structures that will become the property of the Authority. each particular note application has a corresponding CAD Cell (abbreviation noted in brackets) which may be retrieved from the Public Cell Library on the CAD system. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 contains 'Standard Notes' which represent the majority of General Notes for respective applications as used by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section and all 'Standard Notes' shown on drawings shall be based on these. Some examples of this type of note would be: Dimensions and numbers of items required Statement regarding details not shown in a view or section Statement that a commercial item specified may be replaced by a similar item provided that the replacement item meets design requirements Statement regarding the required protective treatment for an item OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . the General Notes shown on each sheet shall contain information relevant to the construction or fabrication of the element being detailed with the notes being concise and clear in their intent. Brackets shall not be used for entire notes. section or detail only.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Notes and References 12 12. B. Blank spaces (in the notes retrieved) shall be filled with the appropriate information.1 GENERAL NOTES AND REFERENCES Notes on drawings shall be clear and concise with regard to required information and instructions. 12.2 GENERAL NOTES General notes which apply to several views on a drawing or the drawing as a single entity should be as far as possible free from exceptions.

SECTION 13 TITLES AND SUB-TITLES .

2 SUB-TITLES A sheet generally comprises several views. PLAN ELEVATION TABLE 1 Where both concrete details and reinforcement details are shown separately on the one drawing an additional sub-title under each set of details using 7mm high lettering is required e. details. 13. including the road number and the Local Government Area name.g. sections. Figure 13.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Titles and Sub-Titles 13 13.1 TITLES TITLES AND SUB-TITLES The title block on every sheet of a set of drawings shall have the same identifying title which adequately describes the location of the bridge site. PIERS .SHEET A DECK . views and details shall be identified by the appropriate symbol in accordance with AS/NZS 1100 Part 501 and no section number.2 depicts the correct method of indicating sections and details as well as the appropriate usage of titles and sub-titles.REINFORCEMENT Where more than one sheet of drawings is necessary to detail a part of a structure it shall be considered to be a sheet series and the sheet titles shall be shown as follows: DECK . CONCRETE DETAILS REINFORCEMENT DETAILS In reinforcement detail drawings. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . The sub-titles in such cases shall be PLAN and ELEVATION.g. The title block of each sheet shall also include a description of the details shown on that sheet. PIERS . tables etc and each shall be given an appropriate sub-title using 5mm high lettering e. e.CONCRETE. view number or alphabetic character used for details shall appear more than once in the sheet series.SHEET B PIER CONCRETE – SHEET A Sections.g. the concrete plan and elevation of the part of the structure being detailed should be used and treated as "transparent" with the reinforcement details being added. Tables shall be identified numerically. The terms SECTIONAL PLAN and SECTIONAL ELEVATION shall not be used under any circumstances.

.190 RL 328. ... .190 16-VV-1P 16-VV-1P 4-20-E-1P LAPPED WITH RL 327. PILE REINFORCEMENT..000 (PIER 1) CH 504. ..160 RL 327.360 RL 328..160 32-V-1P AND 20-S-2P 1-32-S-1P-EF 20 x 400 LONG GRADE 304 STAINLESS STEEL DOWELS TO ASTM A276 TOTAL 68 REQUIRED 2 22 BUNDLES OF 2-16-HT-2P -180 10-32-V-1P-NF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 2 - 32-VV-2P 4-20-S-2P-EF SPACED AS SHOWN IN PR SECTION 2 - 4-20-E-1P LAPPED WITH 32-V-1P AND 20-S-2P PR ELEVATION 22 BUNDLES OF 2-16-HT-2P -180 11 BUNDLES OF 2-16-HT-1P -180 32-S-1P AND 20-S-2P 500 TYP ELEVATION BASE c 125 x 25 ELASTOMERIC BEARING 1 c OF 20 DOWELS CH 492. 75 20 DOWELS COVER PR PR ...6km SOUTH OF YASS PIER PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 CLIENT XXX XXX XXX PHONE (02) FACSIMILE (02) 32-VV-1P c OF PIER 0 0 500 1000 1500mm 125 250 500 750mm FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 250 500 250 0002 246 BC 1002 REINFORCEMENT CONCRETE FIGURE 13. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1... . THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE: 20-S-2P BAR SIZE: a) HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF N12 N16 N20 N24 N28 N32 N36 1200 200 ELASTOMERIC BEARING STRIPS 200 16-HT-2P c OF DOWELS 32-S-1P DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR. .. SEE SHEET No 10 11 BUNDLES OF 2-16-HT-1P -180 75 20-E-1P 75 20-E-1P 8-16-VV-1P LAPPED WITH 32-V-1P 180 32-S-1P AND 2 10-32-VV-2P-FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 2 - 180 8-16-VV-1P LAPPED WITH 32-V-1P c OF PIER 20-S-2P PLAN GENERAL NOTES 1950 320 5135 DOWELS : 16 SPACES AT 642 = 10 270 5900 11 800 5900 7900 5135 1950 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm SCALE 1 000 500 OR AS SHOWN.000 (PIER 2) 320 STRIPS.. 1 - NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 45mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.. . EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE... REINFORCEMENT MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY WHERE NECESSARY TO CLEAR DOWELS. 7 EQUAL SPACES 32-V-1P MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 32MPa.DOWNSTREAM BASE c AT NEAR FACE OF PIER UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM UPSTREAM 16-HT-1P 11 800 16-HT-2P 32-V-1P 16-HT-2P 1-32-V-1P-EF 16-HT-1P 500 TYP RL 328. .. .. CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: b) OTHER BARS: . . FORMED HOLES AND RECESSES.. ...... UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. . NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. .. 2 CAD No KP2F132... HIGHWAY No 2 9 EQUAL SPACES SHIRE OF YASS BRIDGE OVER YASS RIVER AT 4.. FOR DETAILS..DENOTES PILE REINFORCEMENT. . UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON PLAN ANY FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH.dgn 123 FOR CONSTRUCTION 5 A .

SECTION 14 CHECKING OF DRAWINGS .

RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Checking of Drawings 14 14. the following colour coded system shall be used when checking all drawings. is it the latest information available from the latest catalogue? ACCURACY CONSISTENCY DRAFTING - Is the drawing consistent with other drawings in the same set ? Have the requirements of the Structural Drafting Manual been met? A complete set of draft final drawings shall be provided to the Manager. All drawings prepared by external consultants for the Authority. The following list should be used as a basis for checking by the drafting officer: CLARITY . levels and reinforcement correct ? If any product information is used.Have the Project Design Engineer’s design sketches been followed and is the resultant drawing clear in it’s intent? Has sufficient information been shown ? Is the drawing to scale ? Are dimensions. Cad Filename and date of creation of the plot adjacent to the drawing border in the upper right hand corner of the sheet) shall be supplied to the Project Design Engineer for concurrence. After the drawings have been reviewed by the drafting Project Leader and amended as required. 14. Upon completion of each drawing. the relevant requirements of the RTA Structural Drafting Manual and in accordance with the Contract. Structural Drafting for review prior to being provided to the relevant Design Manager for review. All drawings prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section should be thoroughly checked by the Drafting Officer responsible for their production to ensure details are in accordance with the Project Design Engineer’s requirements and that they conform to the drafting standards outlined in this Manual prior to being submitted to the drafting Project Leader for checking. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 2 .2 MARKING OF CHECK PRINTS In order to ensure that the checking system can be understood by all officers. a check print of the drawing (complete with CAD directory.1 GENERAL CHECKING OF DRAWINGS This section of the Manual sets out the checking process for drafting work carried out by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section. all drawings prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section. they shall be supplied to the Project Design Engineer for concurrence. or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority shall be prepared and checked in accordance with the requirements of the Quality System documentation that exists within respective offices.

1 of this Manual. 14. Upon completion of required amendments.3 AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS After marking of check prints. Details checked as being incorrect and some amendments and /or deletions required. the check print being used as the basis for the amendments shall be marked as superseded (with the date being shown) and a new check print shall be issued with the required details being shown in the upper right hand corner of the sheet as stated in Clause 14. The Drafting Project Leader shall then be responsible for the amendment of the drawings using available drafting resources.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Checking of Drawings Colour Code GREEN RED YELLOW Description Details checked as being correct. Amendments to details marked in red and/or any additional requirements shall be marked with graphite pencil on yellow background. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 2 . said check prints (complete with checking officers initials and date in the amendment block) shall be returned to the Drafting Project Leader responsible for the project so that necessary amendments can be completed.

SECTION 15 ISSUE AND AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS .

the consultant shall supply the Authority with an A1 size tracing paper copy of the drawings for acceptance/approval by the Principal Bridge Engineer or other delegated officer. This shall be shown as percentage complete and it shall be placed beside the words Issue Status in the title block. Where consultants have been commissioned to complete bridge designs for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority in the future.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Issue and Amendment of Drawings 15 15. Drawings that are in the development stage shall have a numerical character shown in the Issue box in the bottom right hand corner of the title block. any drawings that have not been formally approved and are issued to any party for the purpose of checking. When Issue 0 is amended it shall become Issue 1 and this number shall be updated with each successive issue of the drawing. 15. for bridges that will become the property of the RTA that are prepared by external parties. shall be marked to clearly show the stage of development of the project/drawings.2 ISSUE OF PRELIMINARY DRAWINGS Where prepared by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Section. a typical description being 75% COMPLETE. shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of this Section except where internal RTA procedural processes are specified.3 SUBMISSION OF DRAWINGS FOR APPROVAL Where the drawings have been prepared by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Section. and the drawings have been checked and signed by the appropriate officers. Preliminary drawings issued to any party outside the design office shall carry a watermark placed diagonally across the sheet and the wording shall be: “PRELIMINARY – NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION”.1 ISSUE AND AMENDMENT OF DRAWINGS GENERAL Provisions in this Section apply to the development of bridge construction drawings by the Bridge Engineering Section of the RTA. 15. dwg or dwf format) and a multipage pdf file (containing all drawings) that can be read by and stored on the Authority’s equipment. See Figure 15. Following acceptance/approval of the drawings. Bridge construction drawings. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 5 . The first issue of the drawing for the purpose of checking shall be denoted Issue 0. Drawings submitted for approval shall have Issue A recorded in the appropriate position in the title block and the words “FOR CONSTRUCTION” entered into the space provided beside the words Issue Status in the title block. comment or review. they shall be submitted to the Principal Bridge Engineer or appropriate Manager for approval in accordance with Bridge Section Standard Operating Procedure. the consultant shall supply the Authority with an individual electronic copy of each drawing file (in either dgn. Re-issues of proposal sketches for bridge designs shall also follow the above procedure.2. Approval to Drawings TB-SOP-404002.

together with the letter corresponding to the revision placed in a small box adjacent to the amendment.1 Where previously amended drawings require further amendments. C for second amendment etc. Amendments shall be denoted by their inclusion in a ‘box’ or cloud (using a thin wavy line) together with the alphabetic character corresponding to the Issue No placed in a small box adjacent to the amendment. 3. two parallel diagonal lines (at 45 degrees) shall be placed through the detail and the word “SUPERSEDED” shall be placed between the parallel lines. the amendment “box” or cloud and the boxed text used to denote previous amendments shall be removed. 2. a description of the revision. Figure 15. Reference shall be made to the location of the information or detail that has superseded the original information either inside the parallel lines or beside the amendment “box” or cloud. A brief description of what was deleted shall be placed both inside the “box” or cloud and in the Revision Block above the Title Block. The required amendments shall be carried out.1 When information or details have been superseded by other information and the original information or detail is to be retained on the drawing. _C for the second amendment. The required details in the Revision block shall be completed. The Issue No shown in the previously approved Issue of the drawing shall be revised i. When information or details have been removed a “box” or cloud (using a thin wavy line) denoting the area that information has been removed from.5mm.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Issue and Amendment of Drawings 15. after any drawing is formally approved and issued it may only be amended in accordance with the following procedures: SHEETS OTHER THAN COVER SHEETS 1. B for first amendment. This will include the Issue. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 5 .4. COVER SHEETS 4. by hand. in the space provided. The details of previous amendments shall remain in the Revision Block immediately above the Title Block and the initials of the officer that authorised the preceding amendments shall be typed into the space provided in the Revision Block. Text used to denote the amendment (B. C etc) shall be 5mm high and the box which encloses the letter shall measure 10mm x 10mm with line thickness 0.1 shows the correct format for the amendment of sheets other than cover sheets. The drawing shall be registered with the Leader CAD Development and it shall be stored in the appropriate folder under the project number allocated to the project. the initials of the Drafting Officer that completed the revision as well as the initials of the officer that checked the revision.e. See Figure 15. The drawing file shall be copied from the appropriate CAD register and renamed with an appropriate suffix ie _B for the first amendment.4 AMENDMENT OF APPROVED DRAWINGS For drawings prepared by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Section. Date. The officer responsible for the release of the revision shall be required to initial. See Figure 15.4.4.

_C added for the second amendment etc. The approved amended drawings. The A1 size approved amended drawing or drawings shall be forwarded to Micrographics Section for microfilming together with the instruction that the microfilm card for the corresponding original drawing or drawings be removed from the permanent record set of microfilm cards retained by Micrographics Section. The Documentation Officer shall retain an A3 size paper master copy of the approved amended drawings for storage in the Master Plan Library. 4. Drawing file shall be copied from the appropriate CAD register. 1. Where the Cover Sheet of any set of drawings must be revised and reissued. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 5 .4. Place the amendment block on the sheet directly above the title block and place the required details in the amendment block. required. 15.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Issue and Amendment of Drawings Once approved and issued. the Cover Sheet of a set of drawings shall be not be revised or reissued unless information shown on the Cover Sheet is changed. 2.5 PROCEDURE FOLLOWING AMENDMENT OF APPROVED DRAWINGS The following procedure shall be strictly adhered to upon completion of any required amendments to approved drawings.e. (a) (b) the printing and distribution of the amended drawing or drawings to all officers in possession of half size sets of the drawings the permanent storage of the amended drawing with the Master Copy of half size drawings retained by the Bridge Section. The drawing shall be registered with the Leader CAD Development and it shall be stored in the appropriate folder under the project number allocated to the project. The corresponding original half size Master Copy of the drawing or drawings shall be marked as superseded in an appropriate manner and shall be retained with the Master Copy for record purposes. Issue C for second amendment etc. 2. The client copy of the drawings shall be supplied with a completed Drawing Register and Document Transmittal Form (Form No TBSOP-405001-TFB001). printed A1 size on tracing paper. listed reports or any other similar information requires amendment. the following procedure shall be followed. 3. the Issue No in the bottom right hand corner of the sheet shall also be amended i. Some examples of changes that would necessitate the reissue of a Cover Sheet are where a sheet is added to or deleted from the set or the title of a sheet is changed and/or the information provided for the various loadings required by AS 5100. 1. In addition to this. The Documentation Officer shall be responsible for. renamed accordingly. The filename shall have the suffix _B added for the first amendment. The Documentation Officer shall provide a copy or copies of the approved amended drawings to the client in accordance with the client’s request. marked as “SUPERSEDED” and placed at the back of the set of microfilm cards. Figure 15. Issue B for first amendment. shall be supplied to the Documentation Officer for the purposes of plan printing. microfilming and storage.2 shows the correct format for the amendment of Cover Sheets.

The corresponding superseded drawing or drawings shall be retained with the full size set of drawings and after having been marked as superseded in an appropriate manner shall be placed at the back of the drawing set. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 5 . Where significant changes to the initial design are required i. The Approval Block. Initials shall be electronic so that they remain with the drawing file. After having thoroughly checked that the required amendments have been carried out satisfactorily. in the appropriate space provided in the amendment block immediately above the title block. a change in bridge type or span lengths.5. The drafting officer responsible for the preparation of the amended drawing shall record their initials and the initials of the officer responsible for the checking of the amended drawing in the appropriate spaces in the amendment block immediately above the title block. the officer responsible for authorising the release of the amended drawing shall sign. the drafting officer responsible for the preparation of the amended drawing shall record the names of the officers responsible for the initial design.6 AUTHORISATION FOR RELEASE OF AMENDED DRAWINGS GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS 1. design check and approval by the appropriate Manager in the spaces provided in the title block. DRAWINGS OTHER THAN GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS The recording of names and/or signatures on drawings other than General Arrangement drawings shall be in accordance with Parts 1 and 2 of Clause 15. 2. Bridge Rehabilitation Projects under whose supervision the design was initially completed. Where amendments to the drawing are of a cosmetic or minor nature only.e. the officers that formally approved the initial design shall record their signatures by hand in the appropriate spaces in the title block. 15. In most cases. the officer responsible for the release of the amended drawing or drawings will be the Manager. together with the date of the original approval. Amended drawings shall not be released from Bridge Engineering Section until the officer responsible for the authorisation of the release of the drawings has initialled or signed by hand in the appropriate space in the revision block. or initial by hand. provided for the signature of the Principal Bridge Engineer shall have the name of the appropriate officer recorded electronically.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Issue and Amendment of Drawings 6. 3. Bridge Design Projects. the Documentation Officer shall place the amended drawing or drawings in the full size set of drawings retained by the Bridge Engineering Section and update the drawing storage database accordingly.1 of this Manual. The completed drawing shall be submitted to the Principal Bridge Engineer for review and signature in the approval box on the drawing. or the Manager. After the approved amended A1 size drawing or drawings have been microfilmed and returned from Micrographics Section.

either the engineer responsible for the design or the Manager. Structural Drafting or the Project Leader responsible for the production of drawings for the project shall be required to initial the drawing by hand in the appropriate area. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 5 of 5 .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Issue and Amendment of Drawings Where this officer is unavailable to initial the drawing by hand.

00 EXISTING GUARD FENCE CH 5 232. NAME PLATE TYPE B CH 5 204.00 58.220 RL 59.000 RL 59.206 (INCLUDING AFFLUX) R R 1.00 WIDENING GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PREPARED BY CLIENT HUNTER REGIONAL OFFICE 59 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE LOCKED BAG 30 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0240 FACSIMILE (02) 4924-0344 POKOLBIN CREEK 1.605 CROSS TO BE RELOCATED BRIDGE OVER POKOLBIN CREEK AT 5.00 55.00 54.000 214.00 CH 5 223. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 ISSUE 2 CAD No KP2F152.5 T O1 S S S W W W ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 220 CITY OF CESSNOCK RL 58.0km NORTH OF CESSNOCK 59.463 CH 5 214.00 54.00 56.734 N 6 371 036.444 59.420 100 YEAR HFL RL 57.565 RL 59.220 56.463 C U R 650 3.370 205.A (TYP) 9 450 28 050 9 150 9 450 FROM CESSNOCK UPSTREAM 0.00 NAME PLATE TYPE B S 58.00 REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM.445 59.445 CONTROL LINE MC00 BEARING 338%%d 43’ 44. AR IN 55.00 .R132.00 W PR S 2 TO 1 W IM L E 1.770 ST N O VARIES 10 TO 45 PILE EXTENSION STAGE 1 APPROX PILE G W 59.500 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45. FOR EXISTING UTILITIES SEE DRAWING REGISTRATION No 0220 085 BA 3799.5 SECTION 1 - 58.820 RL 59.000 SPAN 3 59.5 5km 232.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 APPROX EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 SPAN 2 59.9 56.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.00 57.444 CH 5 232. 5 TO 1 WIDENING 1 RL’s AT EXISTING APPROX EX ISTING SU RFACE LEV DECK SOFFIT EL UPSTREAM TEMPORARY CARRIAGEWAY 4 800 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER 75 THICK 2/DN 100 CONDUIT (TYP) ASPHALT 3.463 E 345 285.463 59. COMBINED SYSTEM OF WEARING SURFACE AND SUITABLE BITUMINOUS WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE.5 204.565 223.457 C R O 56.B04.00 S SEWERMAIN S S S MANAGER. SCALE 1 0.0% SURFACE STAGE 2 N IO T EXISTING GUARD RAILS AND KERB TO BE DEMOLISHED DOWNSTREAM TEMPORARY CARRIAGEWAY 4 400 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER STAGE 1 NEW CONCRETE OVERLAY 2.00 G G GASMAIN W W W CH 5 205.820 232.451 PSC PLANKS DATUM RL 44.5 W W W DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES 59.5 56.5 53.00 56.615 RL 58. TOP OF ABUTMENT WALL AND HEADSTOCK RL’s ON SHEET Nos 4.1" ISSUE EXISTING MEMORIAL DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH CONTROL LINE MC01 59.451 N Y W W F T O 55.5% STAGE 2 LEVEL 3000mm 54.370 RL 59. FOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SEE SHEET No 6 57.00 54.335 ¶ OF EXISTING BRIDGE TO BE VERIFIED ON SITE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION.067% 500 6 105 12 630 11 630 5 525 CONTROL LINE MC00 DOWNSTREAM 500 2 160 NOM 3 945 NOM VARIES ¶ OF EXISTING BRIDGE 970 TO 1015 1.00 57.2 OR AS SHOWN.585 RL 58.00 G G G G G WATERMAIN W W W W W W W 1 W 59.500 END OF DECK END OF DECK ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT A WIDENING WIDENING EXISTING EXISTING CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45.00 57.457 SPAN 1 CHAINAGE IN CONTROL LINE MC00 ELEVATION 54.770 RL 59. 5 AND 13 SHALL BE ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY.00 56.TO BRANXTON W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS S S DATE 1 W W W W PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS WATERMAIN APPROVED 0220 085 BC 0956 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: W W W W W W W W DRAWING 1656 PRELIMINARY SEWER MANHOLE PLAN SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) DATE MANAGER. 5 TO R R 2 000 YEAR HFL RL 58.5 TO 1 BRIDGE ENGINEERING QA RECORDS COMPLETED AND DRAWINGS RECOMMENDED FOR APPROVAL 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 EXISTING BRIDGE S S S S S S 58.00 0 1000 2000 G G G 1000 500 GENERAL NOTES 0 1 2 3 4 5m FIGURE 15.00 2 TO 1 56.0% CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.00 55.610 RL 58.500 END OF DECK END OF DECK ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT B ¶ OF PIER 2 ¶ OF PIER 1 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.

800 CH 310. ABUTMENT A = -3200kN (TENSION) 6600kN (COMPRESSION) = -550kN (TENSION) B 11. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 4 ISSUE B CAD No KP2F1541. IN ACCORDANCE WITH PART B58 OF THE SPECIFICATION. SETTING OUT OF PILES IS GIVEN AT SOFFIT LEVEL OF RELEVANT ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK OR PIER PILE CAP.200 CH 445. DETAIL A PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 2 DESIGN 0 10 20 30 40 50mm 0010 410 BC 2801 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER DRAWING 10 5 1234 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION END BEARING EXAMPLE SHOWN MANAGER.000 CH 489.800 E 253675. 4. .5 12 PIERS 2 TO 7 PIERS 8 TO 10 ABUTMENT B PERMANENT STEEL CASING SHALL BE EXTENDED DOWN TO THE ROCK LEVEL AND PRE-BORING MAY BE REQUIRED. WELDING SYMBOLS ARE TO AS 1101 PART 3.910 N 1467027.5 TYP PILE DRIVING SHOE 3.06 FIGURE 15. .5 = 3.750 INTO HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE.400 CH 400.dgn .5 500 TYP 4500kN (COMPRESSION) = -300kN (TENSION) ABUTMENT B = 4000kN (COMPRESSION) MAXIMUM CALCULATED DESIGN ULTIMATE PILE MOMENT. CHANGES TO THE PILES AND THE PILE LAYOUT WHICH SIGNIFICANTLY 5 0 10 20 30 40 50mm ALTER THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE PILES INDIVIDUALLY OR AS A GROUP MAY ALTER THESE LOADS/MOMENTS OR THE BEHAVIOUR OF THE WHOLE STRUCTURE AND MAY NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. FREE STANDING PILES IN THE RIVER MAY REQUIRE TEMPORARY SUPPORT UNTIL THE PILE CAP IS CONSTRUCTED.5 FULL PENETRATION BUTT WELD 10. . ABUTMENT A PIERS 1 TO 10 20 = = = 1300kN m 950kN m 1000kN m ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW HIGHWAY No 10 SHIRE OF GREAT LAKES WELD SPLICE DETAIL IN STEEL CASING 20 25 10 5 ABUTMENT B BRIDGE OVER KARUAH RIVER AT KARUAH PILE LAYOUT PREPARED BY CLIENT MAJOR PROJECTS OFFICE 47 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE PO BOX 469 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0289 FACSIMILE (02) 4929-5271 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0805 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 THE LOADS/MOMENTS SPECIFIED HEREIN APPLY TO THE PILES AND PILE LAYOUT AS DESIGNED. B OUTSIDE FACE OF CASING FULL PENETRATION BUTT WELD 7 3.600 CH 355. 1.5 PIERS 1 TO 10 = OUTSIDE FACE OF CASING PERMANENT STEEL CASING PLATE THICKNESS REVISED AND SUGGESTED PROCEDURE NOTE DELETED ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH IRH JC THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.7" P59 P70 600 CH 229. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE GP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1554 PART 1.5 DESIGN LOADS THE MAXIMUM CALCULATED DESIGN ULTIMATE PILE AXIAL LOAD. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B2 STEEL CASING SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3678 GRADE 250. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE QUALITY OF THE FOUNDATION MATERIAL BY INSPECTIONS OF THE FOUNDATION MATERIAL FOR ALL PILES.750 INTO HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE.FROM NEWCASTLE cBEARINGS L c PIER 1 L c PIER 2 L c PIER 3 L c PIER 4 L c PIER 5 L c PIER 6 L cBEARINGS L TO TAREE ABUTMENT A 200 1000 1000 1000 1500 TYP P1 P10 P18 P26 1500 TYP P34 P42 P50 P58 ABUTMENT B 800 2200 P63 P67 P6 1500 1500 1500 3 SPACES AT 2935 = 8805 600 CH 525.800 PILE LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE B FOUNDATION DESIGN B PILES SHALL BE FOUNDED IN SANDSTONE/SILTSTONE WITH THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM LENGTH OF ROCK SOCKET:ABUTMENT A 12 PIER 1 .1000 INTO HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE/SILTSTONE.300 INTO VERY HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE.11.1500 INTO VERY HIGH STRENGTH SANDSTONE.1 1.800 E 253764.966 P2 8 SPACES AT 1100 = 8800 P8 P3 P7 P4 P9 P5 P14 P19 P13 P17 P22 P12 P16 P21 P11 P15 P20 TYPICAL PILE GROUP SPACING P23 P28 P31 P36 P39 P44 P47 P52 1500 P55 P60 P64 2200 2200 2200 2200 P68 P24 P29 P32 P37 P40 P45 P48 P53 P56 P61 2200 2200 2200 P25 P30 P33 P38 P41 P46 P49 P54 2200 P65 P57 P62 P69 1500 1500 1500 1500 P66 1300 P27 P35 CONTROL LINE P43 BEARING P51 10 45’ 37.121 CH 265. ROCK CLASSIFICATION IS BASED ON SAA SITE INVESTIGATION CODE AS1726-1981 13.631 N 1467493. . GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 40 MPa.

SHEET C 12 DECK .10.25 ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: a = 0.SHEET D 13 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .4m/s 2000 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2.ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW HIGHWAY No 17 NEWELL HIGHWAY SHIRE OF URANA BRIDGE OVER COLOMBO CREEK AT 33.5m/s 100 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: RL 19.67 DESIGN CATEGORY: BEDC-1 MR 596 RA IL W A Y A N C O 1 COVER SHEET 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 3 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE B 4 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT 5 ABUTMENTS CONCRETE 9 DECK .PANELS 14 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .2 FLOOD DATA: 100 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2.2 SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 15 ISSUE B .08 SITE FACTOR: s = 0.DETAILS 15 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM HW 17 Y C K NEWELL HWY MORUNDAH BRIDGE SITE ee k MR 385 T R IL O D E R IE JE Co lo m bo Cr TO URANA WIND LOADING: AS 5100.SHEET A 10 DECK .5 (AHD) 2000 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: RL 19.SHEET B 11 DECK .4.06 DATE WIND LOADING VALUES REVISED REVISION N A SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS R R A N D E HW 14 R A IRH PREP MB CHK AUTH DESIGNED AND PRODUCED UNDER A QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFIED AS COMPLYING WITH ISO/AS 9001 BY AN ACCREDITED CERTIFICATION BODY REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 0017 453 BC 6538 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION CAD No: FIGURE 15.8 (AHD) REFERENCE REPORTS GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: GIR 0017/27 HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: HWR 0017/27 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 B ISSUE 12.BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING: NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: 1250 ROUTE FACTOR: 4 STUR T HW Y ILW ARDLETHAN AY LEETON YANCO DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.2-2004 BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: TYPE II IMPORTANCE FACTOR: I = 1.3km SOUTH OF NARRANDERA TO RA DESIGN FILE: 5M2364 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 .2-2004 DESIGN WIND SPEED = 40m/s WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: 2 WIND REGION: A3 AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = 2000 LOCALITY PLAN THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 600kmBY ROAD FROM SYDNEY 0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50Km 6 ABUTMENTS REINFORCEMENT 7 PIERS 8 7m SPAN PSC PLANK AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = 20 NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.

SECTION 16 WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS .

Any departures from the approved design shall be clearly marked in red ink on a high quality. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 2 .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Work-As-Executed Drawings 16 16....1 GENERAL WORK-AS-EXECUTED DRAWINGS Work-as-Executed drawings shall be prepared for all bridges designed by the Authority.... (in red ink) shall be placed in an appropriate position on each WAE drawing and the name......... ISSUE WAE DATE As appropriate REVISION A brief description of changes from the approved design PREP Initialled by the Officer responsible for recording the changes CHK Initialled by the Engineer responsible for the project design or other officer as appropriate....... enclosed by a continuous wavy line (as shown in Figure 7...1 in this Manual) and the letters WAE (in red ink) shall be placed in close proximity to the highlighted area.......... designed by Consultants for the Authority and for bridges that are constructed under Design and Construct and similar contracts and will become the property of the Authority in the future. (b) Where departures from the approved design have been shown.... 16....2 STANDARD OF WORK REQUIRED (a) Drawings shall be thoroughly checked to ensure that all the departures from the approved design have been shown correctly on the drawings... (c) The amendment block immediately above the title block shall be completed with the correct information to reflect the WAE changes i.. similar to that shown below.. they shall be correctly highlighted i.e.. THESE PLANS SHOW WORK-AS-EXECUTED ....e. position and signature of the officer certifying the WAE drawings (in black ink) appears inside the box surrounding the lettering. Copies of such correspondence shall be placed on the general file for the subject bridge and shall be followed up to ensure all matters pertaining to any questionable areas are resolved and recorded accordingly.. A1 size paper copy of the drawings. TITLE OF THE OFFICER CERTIFYING THE WAE DRAWINGS It is the responsibility of the officer certifying the WAE drawings to ensure that the WAE drawings contain all information on the departures from the approved design and detailing as documented in relevant correspondence and other documents during the construction of the bridge. (d) A stamp or lettering.

architectural or historical significance. Build Own Operate Transfer.2 (d) above) endorsed by an RTA representative or other RTA delegated officer. the completed original drawings shall be forwarded to the NSW Office of State Archives for permanent retention and storage. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 2 . prepared in accordance with Clause 16. to the RTA’s representative for the purposes of microfilming in colour. the drawings shall be forwarded by the certifying officer (or by a person appointed by the certifying officer) to the RTA’s Micrographics Section for the purposes of Microfilming so that a permanent record of the Work-as-Executed drawings can be made.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Work-As-Executed Drawings (e) Following the certification of Work-as-Executed drawings.3 PROJECTS DESIGNED AND CONSTRUCTED UNDER CONTRACT Where projects are completed under a Design and Construct. 16. the companies responsible for the design and construction of the project shall submit an A1 size paper copy of Work-as-Executed (WAE) set of drawings. (f) An A3 size paper copy of the Work-as-Executed drawings shall be ordered and provided to the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Section for records and future reference purposes. Public Private Paternership or other similar type of contract. The WAE plans provided to the Authority should be verified and certified (refer to Clause 16. These drawings shall be stored in the “A3 Master” plan storage cabinet by the Documentation Officer.2 above. (g) Where the Work-as-Executed drawings supplied are for a structure deemed to be of structural.

SECTION 17 LOCALITY AND SITE PLANS .

100 mm x 100 mm.1 LOCALITY PLAN LOCALITY AND SITE PLANS The locality plan is provided to show the location of the construction work in relation to the existing road network and nearby towns. or location description where not included within Site Plan boundaries) Relevant roadwork and survey information Location and extent of any sidetrack (where used) Position of all public utilities in close proximity to.4.1 in this Manual) The nearest major towns referenced in the "FROM" and "TO" statements on the elevation (where possible) Locality Plans shall be provided on all Concept Sketches. The orientation of the site plan should be the same as for the Plan view on the General Arrangement. to a scale as shown in Clause 5. 17. whether existing or proposed Building and property boundaries in close proximity to the construction site - Site Plans shall be provided on all Concept Sketches. The following information should be shown where appropriate: Extent of the structure to be built (in the form of a small rectangle or a shape which is identical to the actual structure and marked BRIDGE SITE) Outline of existing bridge and roadway and the existing deck level as appropriate Bench mark (where located within Site Plan boundaries.7 of this Manual.RTA Structural Drafting And Detailing Manual Locality and Site Plans 17 17. It should be drawn in a rectangular frame with the longer side parallel to the bottom of the sheet. to a scale as shown in Clause 5. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . Proposal Sketches and General Arrangement drawings with the orientation of the Site Plan being identical to the actual Plan of the structure on these drawings.7 of this Manual. The following information shall be provided: The actual construction site shall be located by a 5 mm diameter circle and labelled "BRIDGE SITE" The distance by road from Sydney (as shown on Figure 18. or to be carried on the structure. It shall be drawn in a square frame. and orientated with North pointing towards the top of the sheet. Proposal Sketches and drawing set Cover Sheets.2 SITE PLAN The area to be covered in the site plan should be large enough to cover the whole of the construction site and the adjacent surrounding area.

SECTION 18 CONCEPT AND PROPOSAL SKETCHES .

in most instances. Concept Sketch development is often used to trial multiple options or alternatives for the proposed bridge site in order that client input and feedback may be obtained prior to the selection of the preferred option. bridge lengths. bridge widths and locations.4 INFORMATION TO BE SHOWN ON PROPOSAL SKETCHES The following information shall be shown on Proposal Sketches. Concept sketches submitted by the tenderer on design and construct and similar contracts should be of a similar standard. all Concept Sketches and Proposal Sketches. however. A Proposal Sketch is a plan or set of plans prepared to depict what is considered to be the most appropriate type of structure for the site under consideration and shows the location. shall be registered as sketches and numbered in accordance with Section 3 of this Manual.1 CONCEPT AND PROPOSAL SKETCHES GENERAL A Bridge Design Proposal is comprised of RTA Form No 62 “Bridge Design Proposal” and a Proposal Sketch.2. details of the site. Where the information to be shown is not available at the time that the Proposal Sketch is prepared.3 REGISTRATION AND NUMBERING When prepared by the Authority’s Bridge Engineering Section.1A and 18. The information to be shown on Concept Sketches is similar to that shown for Proposal Sketches as outlined below. Options may include various horizontal and vertical alignments as well as superstructure types.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Proposal Sketches 18 18. it shall be requested from the relevant Client’s office. A typical Concept Sketch is shown in Figures 18.2. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 1 of 6 . the type of construction and the major dimensions of the proposed bridge. the information shown is less refined than that for a Proposal Sketch. 18.2 CONCEPT SKETCHES A Concept Sketch is a design development sketch used to assist both design staff and the client with the choice of the most appropriate type of structure for the site under consideration.1B. Plan View Elevation Typical Cross Section Locality Plan Site Plan Vertical Alignment Diagram (if applicable) Horizontal Alignment Diagram (if applicable) General Notes Title Block The information to be shown (where relevant) is as stated below. 18. 18.

abutments. the Easting and Northing of the intersection point of the centrelines (or Control Lines) or chainages on centrelines (or Control Lines) as appropriate 18. piers. R for restrained and 'E' for expansion Issue 1 – Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 2 of 6 - OTB005 . piles.4. approach slabs and steel safety barrier in the approaches For bridges over other roads. piers. The overall length of deck The number and length of spans The grade on the deck (represented by an arrow and % sign) or the reduced level of the deck as appropriate The normal water level or stream condition ie normally dry etc Mean High Water Springs and Mean Low Water Springs for tidal waters Navigational clearances above Mean High Water Springs for navigable waterways High flood level both calculated (ie the 1 in 100 year ARI and the 1in 2000 year ARI) and reported with a date for the reported high flood level Minimum vertical and horizontal clearances for structures over roads and/or railways including the approximate design surface level of any road or railway line under the structure at the Base centreline Vertical and horizontal clearances for opening span bridges both open and closed The existing surface on the Base centreline projected from contour levels Proposed cross section for channel excavation Form and extent of any embankments and any required embankment protection whether above or below the existing Natural Surface Concrete Safety Barrier extensions.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Proposal Sketches A typical Proposal Sketch is shown in Figures 18. approach slabs and approach steel safety barrier Contract levels of foundation elements Bearing types represented by the letters 'F' for fixed. railway line or road under the structure Any existing structure (if applicable) including the RL of the existing deck The location of any public utilities The Base centreline or Control Line and Carriageway centreline as appropriate Chainages on the Base centreline or Control Line at the ends of deck and at each pier centreline together with the RL at each location The bearing or radius of the Base centreline or Control Line as appropriate The outline of concrete safety barriers. footings and columns etc where the scale of the sketch permits Horizontal clearances as appropriate The location of any minimum vertical clearance referenced from the Elevation Contours of the existing surface Shapes and slopes of any embankments Extent of any embankment protection required Extent of any channel excavation required The direction of flow of the watercourse or conventional tidal representation The compass direction of True North indicated by a suitable north point The outline of parapet extensions.4. superstructure and railings.1 Plan View An outline of the structure The watercourse.1(b).4. 18.4.2 Elevation The outline of the elevation face of the structure projected from the Plan view showing foundation type.1(a) and 18. footways and railings as appropriate Joints in the deck surface represented by a single heavy line The position of name plates The outlines of the structural elements ie abutments.

as appropriate 18. Expansion (moveable) joints should be labelled “EJ” Chainages.5 for an example of the correct representation of a Skew Diagram. The Skew Diagram shall contain the following information: A dimension for the vertical side of the triangle (normally 10 000). Control Line and/or Carriageway centreline Crossfall or superelevation represented by an arrow and % sign Type and thickness of wearing surface Indication of orientation with respect to stream flow or compass point ie UPSTREAM or DOWNSTREAM.4.5 Vertical Alignment Diagram The length of the vertical curve The grade on the road at each end of the vertical curve The chainage and reduced level at each end of the vertical curve The chainage and reduced level of the intersection point of the approach grades on the Control Line or Base centreline The chainage and reduced level at each end of the bridge together with a heavy line to represent the bridge location OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 3 of 6 . as appropriate Safety Screens and noise walls.4.4 Skew Diagram The Skew Diagram shall be in the following format: A right angle triangle with the base parallel to the setting out line or base centreline. existing surface levels and design surface levels at the ends of deck and at each pier on the Base centreline or Control Line.3 Typical Cross Section General form of the piers or abutments including foundation elements Outline of the superstructure elements Overall width of the superstructure Width between concrete safety barriers Widths of concrete safety barriers and/or footways Clear width of footways Railing type or types.4. See Figure 21. the hypotenuse parallel to the abutment and pier centrelines and with the skew angle designated at the apex of the triangle. A dimension for the base and hypotenuse of the triangle calculated from the vertical dimension and the skew angle.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Proposal Sketches - Joints in the superstructure represented by a single heavy line. as appropriate Railway safety screens as appropriate Base centreline. 18. NORTH or SOUTH Roadway lighting. given in a Datum block below the Elevation Datum Level-usually to Australian Height Datum however an assumed local datum may be used Structure location with respect to nearest major towns ie FROM / TO 18.

6 Site Plan Control Line or Base centreline. Chainages shall increase from left to right in most applications. 1:2.4.9 Title Block Road type and number eg Main Road No 246. 1:2.4. In the case of a bridge widening. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 4 of 6 . The Plan and Elevation shall be drawn to the same scale with the Elevation being projected from and directly above the Plan. 18.Council names shall not be used Sketch number Title and location of the bridge Sheet number and Issue 18. In the case of a bridge widening. and “Abutment B” (for the right hand end of the bridge – the end with the highest chainage ). the only exception being where the Proposal is for a bridge widening. abutments shall be labelled in accordance with Section 30 of this Manual. Motorway No M5 Local Government Area name eg Shire of Byron. Abutments shall be labelled “Abutment A” (for the left hand end of the bridge – the end with the lowest chainage).5 and 1:5 or their decimal multiples represented in the format shown in Section 7 of this Manual. the only exception being where the Proposal is for a bridge widening. Highway No 10.5 of this Manual .7 Locality Plan - - Bridge Site Major nearby towns referenced in the Elevation (if appropriate) State Highways and Main Roads (as applicable) State Borders (as applicable) Railway lines (as applicable) Rivers and creeks (as applicable) 18.4.8 General Notes The General Notes on the Proposal Sketch shall be in the format shown for General Arrangement Drawings on the current issue of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 with the blank spaces being filled in with the appropriate information. the Proposal shall be prepared in accordance with Section 30 of this Manual. City of Greater Taree See Clause 4.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Proposal Sketches 18. Freeway No F3.4. including the position of any Tangent Points etc The position and chainage of each end of the bridge The existing bridge (if applicable) including the RL of the existing deck Survey Marks and Bench Marks (including RL) obtained from Road Design plans or the RTA’s Survey Services Section Road boundaries The location of any existing public utilities The location and description of any nearby features which are likely to affect the construction of the new bridge A suitable Northpoint 18. Views shall be drawn to a definable scale and shall be labelled appropriately.5 DRAWING CONVENTIONS The preferred scales for use on Proposal Sketches are 1:1.

Existing surface levels shall be given to the nearest 0. structure width. comment or review. Chainages and Reduced Levels shall be given to the nearest 0.9 AMENDMENTS TO APPROVED PROPOSALS Approved Proposal Sketches may only be amended in accordance with Clause 15.1m.001m. Where significant changes to an approved Proposal Sketch are required. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 5 of 6 . a typical description being 75% COMPLETE.1m Arrows that denote the grade of the deck. 18. shall be marked to clearly show the stage of development of the sketch. 18.7 ISSUE OF PRELIMINARY SKETCHES Where prepared by the RTA’s Bridge Engineering Section. When Issue 0 is amended it shall become Issue 1 and this number shall be updated with each successive issue of the sketch. 18.6.10 PREPARATION OF SKETCHES FOR HERITAGE ISSUE CONSIDERATION Where sketches are prepared for rehabilitation work on existing bridges that are to be submitted to the client and the Heritage Office for consideration. superstructure type etc.6. 18.4 of this Manual. Contract levels shall be given to the nearest 0.2 PLAN AND SITE PLAN The Plan and Site Plan shall be orientated in the same direction for convenient reference. the structure shall be shown in its existing condition and the convention of showing existing work in “existing” line style (double dashed chain line) is not required. crossfall or superelevation shall always point in a downward direction (from the higher end/side to the lower end/side) 18. a new Proposal Sketch shall be prepared with the new Proposal Sketch containing a reference to the superseded Proposal Sketch. This shall be shown as percentage complete and it shall be placed beside the words Issue Status in the title block.6 ORIENTATION 18. any Concept or Proposal Sketch that has not been formally approved and is issued to any party for the purpose of checking.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Proposal Sketches Spans and Piers shall be numbered ie “Span 1”. 18.1 LOCALITY PLAN The Locality Plan shall be orientated with the cardinal directions of the compass square to the borders of the sheet. Sketches that are in the development stage shall have a numerical character shown in the Issue box in the bottom right hand corner of the title block.8 SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL SKETCHES FOR APPROVAL BY CLIENT Proposal Sketches that are to be submitted to the client for approval shall have Issue A recorded in the appropriate position in the title block and the words “FOR APPROVAL” entered into the space provided beside the words Issue Status in the title block. The first issue of the sketch for the purpose of checking shall be denoted Issue 0. “Pier 1” as appropriate. with North being at the top. eg span lengths.

part plans. an architectural presentation style may be adopted. In order to satisfactorily illustrate the proposed changes to the existing structure. elevations. sections and part sections.10.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Proposal Sketches In the case of plans.1 – 18. only those elements to be replaced need be shown in normal line intensity.5 show a typical example of a suite of sketches prepared for heritage issue consideration in rehabilitation works. As the sketches do not show strict engineering details. part elevations. Figures 18. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 1 (16 May 2008) Page 6 of 6 .10. Existing elements that will remain shall be shown in lines with reduced intensity or in grey scale. a view of the structure in its existing condition shall be shown directly above (or beside as appropriate) the structure in its proposed condition following the required rehabilitation works so that direct comparison can be readily made.

0 2.1km NORTH OF EAST MAITLAND CONCEPT SKETCH OPTION 1 . WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SHALL BE OVERLAYED WITH 75mm THICK ASPHALT.5 4.5 5.0 3.0 3.5 7.0 6.8 7.0 6.000 CH 550.5 6. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM TP DENOTES TANGENT POINT.5 3.5 7.580 CH 375.6 7.150 1 TO 2 CH 480.5 725.0 5.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.2.3 -1.000 RL 13.5 1.0 8.0 7.000 690.0 4.6 7.0 2.0 8.0 7.000 375.5 6.000 655.5 2 TO 1 2 TO 1 5 T O 1 NTE RR IVE R .6 6.0 FIGURE 18.886 CH 655.0 7.5 8. PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED SKETCH No LOCALITY PLAN THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 174 km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY CONCRETE BRIDGE DECK WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE SHALL CONFORM TO RTA SPECIFICATION B344 OR BPC2005/02. KD803CS1 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY MANAGER.0 9.0 3.000 RL 13.0 9.5 6.070 12.0 0.5 7.580 STEEL SAFETY CH 690.000 RL 13.000 RL 14.52 CALCULATED 1:100 ¶ OF PIER 4 ¶ OF PIER 2 ¶ OF PIER 5 ¶ OF PIER 7 ¶ OF PIER 3 ¶ OF PIER 6 ¶ OF PIER 8 END OF DECK ABUTMENT A ¶ OF PIER 1 YEAR HFL RL 9.0 12.000 620.0 0.0 0.070 2 5 RL 13.4 4.600 13. E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING.5 2.1(a) 1.886 13.5 1.0 PLAN GENERAL NOTES UBD Directory under Licence to RTA by Sensis Pty Ltd ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 101 10 20 30m CITY OF MAITLAND 0 SCALES 10 5 BRIDGE OVER HUNTER RIVER AT 2.0 2.000 RL 12.5 1.5 0.630 MLWS RL -0.600 TB 1.5 -1.000 8. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 1 ISSUE 0 CAD No KP2F1821A.5 7.5 7.070 14.0 0.0 6.5 7.000 515.13 ¶ OF PIER 9 END OF DECK ABUTMENT B DATUM RL -20.5 6.5 7.000 2 TB 6.5 3.0 7.FROM PITNACREE TO DUNGOG 6 000 APPROACH SLAB 35 000 SPAN 1 35 000 SPAN 2 35 000 SPAN 3 35 000 SPAN 4 OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK ALONG CONTROL LINE MC = 350 000 35 000 SPAN 5 35 000 SPAN 6 35 000 SPAN 7 35 000 SPAN 8 35 000 SPAN 9 35 000 SPAN 10 6 000 APPROACH SLAB EJ E E F E E EJ E E E E E E MHWS RL 0.000 TB RL 13.150 14.000 585.0 1.580 EXISTING SURFACE -0.600 TB 1. 5 NAME PLATE T 1 TB R 1 300 000 O ON WING WALL 2 2 1 2 APPROACH SLAB HU TB NAME PLATE 2 TO 1 ON WING WALL TB TB -0.000 CHAINAGE ON CONTROL LINE MC 1km 1.5 2.5 7.886 13.5 7.131 13.131 585.0 0.000 RL 13.5 4.5 8.5 0.2 7.5 8.0 3.000 RL 12.0 5.0 ELEVATION CH 410.0 4.0 -0.0 4.5 7.0 -1.5 6.0 5.0 1 CH 445.0 -0.5 8.5 1.0 8.0 -1. TB CONTROL LINE MC CH 725.151 BARRIER THRIE BEAM 1.0 0.5 2.5 -1.5 5.SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT HUNTER REGION MAJOR PROJECTS 47 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE PO BOX 489 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0289 FACSIMILE (02) 4929-5271 DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.070 RL 14.5 410.000 480.4 2.0 9.600 13.5 3.000 7.000 RL 14.5 7.5 7.0 6.0 1. APPROACH SLAB 5 T O TITLE BOUNDARY 1 2 TO 1 6. BRIDGE SITE 7.5 3.0 4. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES.0 7.5 4.5 6.0 7.5 4.0 2. R DENOTES RESTRAINED BEARING.580 13.5 2.5 5.6 LEVELS ON CONTROL LINE MC 445.5 5.000 550. F DENOTES FIXED BEARING.0 -0.0 -1.5 6.5 -1.0 1.886 CH 515.0 5.5 8.5 7. EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT. CL DENOTES CONTRACT LEVEL.151 7.0 0.0 8.5 7. CH 620.5 9.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVELS ON CONTROL LINE MC 14.

000 CH 1 725.000 RL 12.UPSTREAM 12 220 DOWNSTREAM UPSTREAM 12 220 DOWNSTREAM 610 2 000 SHOULDER 75 THICK ASPHALT 3% 3 500 TRAVEL LANE 3 500 TRAVEL LANE 2 000 SHOULDER 610 REGULAR PERFORMANCE LEVEL TRAFFIC BARRIER 610 2 000 SHOULDER 75 THICK ASPHALT 3% 3 500 TRAVEL LANE 3 500 TRAVEL LANE 2 000 SHOULDER 610 REGULAR PERFORMANCE LEVEL TRAFFIC BARRIER CONTROL LINE MC DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL 3% CONTROL LINE MC DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL 3% 1800 DEEP 3% SUPER T GIRDERS 3% 3% 3% 1800 DEEP SUPER T GIRDERS EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL 1 000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE MHWS RL 0.131 MAIN ROAD No 101 RL 12.0 0% ABUTMENT B CH 1725.000 1780 .0 00 1720 .TYP ·1 500 PERMANENTLY CASED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE FOUNDED ON ROCK .TYP SECTION 1 1 RADIAL SECTION 2 1 RADIAL FIGURE 18.52 RL -0.600 RL 12.000 1360.000 1380.000 1600.SHEET B PREPARED BY CLIENT HUNTER REGION MAJOR PROJECTS 47 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE PO BOX 489 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0289 FACSIMILE (02) 4929-5271 BRIDGE ENGINEERING ABUTMENT A CH 1375.25 MLWS RL -0.000 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED SKETCH No KD803CS1 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY ISSUE SITE PLAN NOT TO SCALE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT DRAWING NOT TO SCALE MANAGER.321 ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT B CH 1 375.000 1560.1km NORTH OF EAST MAITLAND CONCEPT SKETCH OPTION 1 . 5.131 0% BRIDGE OVER HUNTER RIVER AT 2.000 1540.000 200 000 ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW CH 1 750.13 NEW SURFACE LEVEL AFTER POSSIBLE PERMANENT SCOUR CLADDING TO EXTEND DOWN IN THE EVENT OF PERMANENT SCOUR 1 000 ·1 500 PERMANENTLY CASED CAST-IN-PLACE PILE FOUNDED ON ROCK .0 00 1680.000 1340.0 -2.00 0 1640. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 0 CAD No KP2F1821B.682 2.000 TP CH 1364.1(b) -0.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.0 00 1700.000 CH 1 550.600 1320.000 1480. SEE SHEET No 1 TYP TYP LENGTH OF VC = 400 000 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 200 000 CH 1 350.000 HU NTE RR IVE R 1620.000 .000 1460.000 1440.00 0 1660.000 TP CH 1751.000 1500.131 CITY OF MAITLAND RL 16.000 1520.000 1420.000 RL 12.000 1740 .500 FROM PITNACREE TO DUNGOG GENERAL NOTES 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm CONTROL LINE MC SCALE 1 000 500 FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS DRAWING.000 1580.2.000 1760 .000 1400.

4.1(a) CH 214. TYP SLAB 50 45 020 OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK = 87 510 ALONG CONTROL LINE MC00 42 480 50 6 050 APPROACH SLAB W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No WD.620 RL 27.dgn 0 . CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES.A. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM.027 CO NT ROL LIN EM C 0 0 FENCE LINE EXISTING ROADS TREES SEWER MAIN MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES TELEPHONE LINE WATER MAIN FIGURE 18.100 1 2 FENCES HIGHWAY No 1 CITY OF WOLLONGONG RL 27. TYP DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL MIN CLEARANCE REQUIRED = 5 300 MIN CLEARANCE PROVIDED = 5 600 WOODLANDS CREEK BRIDGE SITE APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 MR 185 ACCESS RAMP ON CONTROL LINE MC00 REINFORCED SOIL WALL SPAN 1 SPAN 2 REINFORCED SOIL WALL DATUM RL 5.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 APPROX EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 CHAINAGE ON CONTROL LINE MC00 LOCALITY PLAN THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 70km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY NOT TO SCALE ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES 0 2 4 6 8 10m SCALE 2 1 OR AS SHOWN.590 RL 26.003 FIBRE OPTIC CABLE GAS MAIN CH 302.SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SOUTHERN REGIONAL OFFICE 90 CROWN STREET WOLLONGONG PO BOX 477 WOLLONGONG NSW 2500 PHONE (02) 4221-2460 FACSIMILE (02) 4221-2777 KD554PS DENOTES LOCATION OF TELEPHONE SINGLE MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCE CONCRETE PIT PRELIMINARY PLAN 1 CAD No KP2F1841(a).R132.387 BRIDGE No 2 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK FENCE AND MAIN ROAD No 185 ACCESS RAMPS AT BULLI PASS INTERCHANGE PROPOSAL SKETCH .6 050 APPROACH STEEL SAFETY BARRIER (THRIE BEAM). LEGEND INVERT OR OBVERT OF PIPE CH 259.B04. FENCE MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND POWER POLES 1 2 UNDERGROUND STORMWATER PIPES DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.

dgn 2 0 .DOWNSTREAM UPSTREAM BRIDGE No 2 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK AND MAIN ROAD No 185 ACCESS RAMPS BRIDGE No 1 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK 525 6 900 MEDIUM LEVEL BARRIER 19 250 CONTROL LINE MC00 11 300 525 75 THICK ASPHALT ·100 UPVC PIPE MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND POWER POLES MR 185 LAWRENCE APPROXIMATE EXISTING TELEPHONE TWIN CONCRETE PIT SURFACE LEVEL HARGRAVE DRIVE MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES AND POWER POLES ·1200 CAST-IN PLACE PILES SECTION TELEPHONE TWIN CONCRETE PIT TELEPHONE SINGLE CONCRETE PIT TELEPHONE SINGLE CONCRETE PIT MINOR TRANSMISSION LINES 1 1 RADIAL BRIDGE No 3 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK 50 000 LENGTH OF VERTICAL CURVE UNDERGROUND STORM WATER TREE MINOR TRANSMISSION LINES BRIDGE No 4 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK VERTICAL CURVE DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE FIGURE 18.4. HIGHWAY No 1 CITY OF WOLLONGONG FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET SEE SHEET No 1 BRIDGE No 2 OVER WOODLANDS CREEK AND MAIN ROAD No 185 ACCESS RAMPS AT BULLI PASS INTERCHANGE PROPOSAL SKETCH .1(b) GENERAL NOTES 0 10 20 30m SCALE 10 5 OR AS SHOWN.SHEET B PREPARED BY CLIENT SOUTHERN REGIONAL OFFICE 90 CROWN STREET WOLLONGONG PO BOX 477 WOLLONGONG NSW 2500 PHONE (02) 4221-2460 FACSIMILE (02) 4221-2777 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 INVERT OR OBVERT OF PIPE FENCE LINE EXISTING ROADS TREES SEWER MAIN MAJOR TRANSMISSION LINES TELEPHONE LINE WATER MAIN FIBRE OPTIC CABLE PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 KD554PS PRELIMINARY SITE PLAN GAS MAIN CAD No KP2F1841(b).

1(a) MANAGER. 14/08/2007 9:59:54 AM .dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.EXISTING BRIDGE PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED SKETCH No KA567 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY 413 FIGURE 18. plan as existing ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 181 CITY OF HAWKESBURY BRIDGE OVER MACDONALD RIVER AT ST ALBANS HERITAGE CONCEPT SKETCH DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.dgn for details of proposed changes to spans 1. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT . 2 and 3 see sheet no 2 top of deck for details of proposed changes to span 6 see sheet no 4 SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3 SPAN 6 SPAN 4 abutment a centreline centreline centreline SPAN 5 abutment b centreline pier 2 pier 1 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 5 9 6 7 7 8 8 9 ELEVATION as existing centreline centreline centreline 9 10 9 10 bridge centreline pier 5 pier 3 pier 4 10 10 10 10 9 144 10 668 10 668 36 023 36 023 9 848 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH GENERAL NOTES 0 2 4 6 8 10m SCALE 2 1 OR AS SHOWN. BRIDGE REHABILITATION PROJECTS SHEET No 1 ISSUE CAD No KP2F1810A.10.FROM ST ALBANS 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 5 9 for details of proposed changes to spans 4 and 5 see sheet no 3 6 7 7 8 8 9 TO WISEMANS FERRY K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810A.

SPANS 1. 2 and 3 top of deck remove existing timber headstocks 2 5 existing stone facing to be maintained remove existing timber pier timber beams over spans 1.1 5 2 5 remove existing stress laminated timber deck 3 5 remove existing guardRAIL and posts remove existing concrete abutment over spans 1. BRIDGE REHABILITATION PROJECTS FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. SEE SHEET No 1. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 181 CITY OF HAWKESBURY BRIDGE OVER MACDONALD RIVER AT ST ALBANS HERITAGE CONCEPT SKETCH new steel piles and concrete pilecap GENERAL ARRANGEMENT .dgn 14/08/2007 10:11:10 AM .dgn K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810B. 2 and 3 new composite concrete 3 5 and posts new steel guardRAILS top of deck new steel piles and concrete abutment existing stone facing to be maintained 2 5 new timber TRESTLE pier new timber TRESTLE pier 10 668 SPAN 1 SPAN 2 approx existing surface level SPAN 3 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. 2 AND 3 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123 1 5 10 478 10 668 3 5 PREPARED DESIGN PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED SKETCH No KA567 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY GENERAL NOTES 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm elevation showing proposed OR AS SHOWN. SHEET No 2 ISSUE CAD No KP2F1810B. DRAWING 413 SCALE 1 000 500 FIGURE 18. 2 and 3 remove existing timber pier remove existing SPAN 1 SPAN 2 approx existing surface level SPAN 3 cut back existing timber piles below ground level cut back existing timber piles below ground level elevation showing existing 1 5 3 5 10 712 1 5 2 5 and timber deck over spans 1.10(b) MANAGER.

4 6 modify existing anchor blocks *typical* 5 9 remove existing splice *typical* remove existing sway braces *typical* modify existing anchor blocks *typical* 4 6 5 9 ELEVATION AS EXISTING 4 6 5 9 new splice as detailed on sheet no 13 *typical* new sway braces as detailed on sheet no 12 *typical* D 11 B 11 A 11 C 11 E 13 provide extension to existing cross girder as shown on sheet no 14 and add sway brace as shown on sheet no 12 provide extension to existing cross girder as shown on sheet no 14 and add sway brace as shown on sheet no 12 4 6 5 9 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 181 CITY OF HAWKESBURY ELEVATION AS PROPOSED BRIDGE OVER MACDONALD RIVER AT ST ALBANS HERITAGE CONCEPT SKETCH GENERAL ARRANGEMENT . BRIDGE REHABILITATION PROJECTS SHEET No 3 ISSUE CAD No KP2F1810C.TYPICAL TRUSS GENERAL NOTES 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123 SCALE 1 000 500 OR AS SHOWN.10(c) MANAGER. K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810C. CHECKED SKETCH No KA567 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY 413 FIGURE 18. TYPICAL TRUSS DETAILS PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.dgn 14/08/2007 10:29:29 AM . SEE SHEET No 1.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

dgn 14/08/2007 10:17:06 AM . K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810D.SPAN 6 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED SKETCH No KA567 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY 413 FIGURE 18. BRIDGE REHABILITATION PROJECTS SHEET No 4 ISSUE CAD No KP2F1810D. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.10(d) MANAGER. SEE SHEET No 1.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.8 PIER 5 CENTRELINE remove existing stress laminated timber deck over span 6 9 remove existing guardRAIL and posts PIER 5 CENTRELINE new composite concrete and timber deck 8 9 new steel guardRAIL and posts REMOVE TIMBER CAPPING top of deck existing concrete remove existing timber beams over span 6 existing stone facing to be maintained existing steel piles SPAN 6 SPAN 6 existing stone facing to be maintained abutment CURTAIN WALL TO BE EXTENDED TO TOP OF DECK existing timber pier approx existing surface level approx existing surface level existing concrete pilecap and piles 8 9 8 9 GENERAL NOTES 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm SCALE 1 000 500 OR AS SHOWN. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW elevation showing existing elevation showing proposed MAIN ROAD No 181 CITY OF HAWKESBURY BRIDGE OVER MACDONALD RIVER AT ST ALBANS HERITAGE CONCEPT SKETCH GENERAL ARRANGEMENT .

SEE SHEET No 1. BRIDGE REHABILITATION PROJECTS SHEET No 5 ISSUE CAD No KP2F1810E.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT SYDNEY ASSET MANAGEMENT 85 FLUSHCOMBE ROAD BLACKTOWN PO BOX 558 BLACKTOWN NSW 2148 PHONE (02) 8814-2939 FACSIMILE (02) 8814-2123 abutment a pier 2 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING PHONE (02) 8837-0855 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED SKETCH No KA567 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY 413 FIGURE 18.10(e) MANAGER.dgn 14/08/2007 10:52:28 AM . FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. steel guardrails TOP OF DECK and posts steel guardrails and posts steel guardrails and posts stone facing stress laminated timber deck with timber girders timber piles rubble fill AND BRACING SECTION 2 1-2 AS EXISTING ground level ground timber piles level SECTION 1 1-2 AS EXISTING SECTION 3 1-2 AS EXISTING 4 698 4 698 4 698 new steel railings TOP OF DECK fall new steel railings fall new steel railings fall fall and posts existing stone facing to be maintained fall and posts fall and posts composite concrete composite concrete concrete abutment deck with timber girders deck with timber girders new timber rubble fill TRESTLE pier SECTION 2 2 AS PROPOSED ground level GENERAL NOTES 0 1 000 2 000 3 000mm SCALE ground existing timber piles to be cut down to clear new structure concrete pilecap steel piles steel piles ISSUE DATE REVISION level 1 000 500 OR AS SHOWN. PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 181 CITY OF HAWKESBURY BRIDGE OVER MACDONALD RIVER AT ST ALBANS HERITAGE CONCEPT SKETCH SECTION 1 2 AS PROPOSED SECTION 3 2 AS PROPOSED GENERAL ARRANGEMENT .SECTIONS .stress laminated timber deck with timber girders stress laminated timber deck with timber girders 4 572 timber CAPWALES timber CAPWALES K:\Bridge\Users\Ian\SDMANUAL-MASTER\2006SKETCHES\KP2F1810E.

SECTION 19 GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION .

1 above. 19. the minimum number of boreholes for bridge foundations shall be one borehole for each pier and one for each abutment.4 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AS PART OF DESIGN CONSTRUCT MAINTAIN PROJECTS The provisions of Clause 19. is supplied to the Contractor as part of the Contract Documents. For twin bridges. in the form of a report. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 . including all test results.1 and 19. The cover sheet for all bridge drawings that will become the property of the Authority. recommendations for types of foundations and design values for the design of foundations. shall cross-reference the geotechnical reports on which the design is based and a cross-reference to the bridge drawings (including Registration Number) shall be placed on the geotechnical report. 19. except the cross-reference to the geotechnical report detailed in Clause 19. these requirements shall be for each bridge. No geotechnical information. the Contractor is responsible for undertaking geotechnical and foundation study for each structure in the project sufficient to provide all information for design and construction of the structure.2 are applicable. if preferred.1 GENERAL GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION Foundation test bores are taken at bridge sites in nominated locations to establish both the type and strength of the foundation material. shall be recorded on the drawings. The locations of boreholes may be shown on the Plan view on the General Arrangement drawing. whether prepared by the Bridge Section or by Consultants. shall be prepared and provided for the Authority’s review. Although the Authority may make available to the Contractor results of any preliminary geotechnical investigation that may have been undertaken at the project site.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Geotechnical Information 19 19.2 MINIMUM EXTENT OF GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION Unless otherwise specified by the Authority. A separate geotechnical report containing all information obtained from bore holes.3 BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS INVITED BY THE AUTHORITY Geotechnical information. 19. The information obtained from the test bores is shown on either a “NON-CORE DRILL HOLE GEOLOGICAL LOG” or a “CORED DRILL HOLE LOG” sheet which is prepared by the drilling contractor.

SECTION 20 COVER SHEETS .

1 GENERAL COVER SHEETS The first sheet of any set of bridge construction plans prepared by the Authority.75 SM 1600. original design loading and Registration No of Plans being included.2 Clause 1. RTA CONTRACTS Prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20. The Cover Sheet provides information regarding the content of the set of bridge construction drawings.CONSULTANT DESIGN May be prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20. it shall not contain the consultant’s reference number in any form.1(d) The information shown on the right hand side of each of the Figures listed above is pertinent to the design shown and is indicative only. year of construction. road number. Consultants preparing designs for the Authority may choose to provide an alternative type of Cover Sheet where additional information is required to be shown.1(a) COUNCIL CONTRACTS Prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20. A full list of required information is provided in AS 5100.2 Clause 1. all necessary loading information as stated in AS 5100. the local government area name and a listing of the drawings contained in the set. the Cover Sheet shall not be reissued unless information on the Cover Sheet is found to be incorrect or it has been changed.1(c) OUTSIDE BODY CONTRACTS . Any construction loading applicable should also be specified and a suitable diagram provided. relevant information regarding any existing structure. Once issued as part of the approved set of drawings.1(b) RTA CONTRACTS . The referenced Geotechnical Report is a requirement under Chief Bridge Engineer Circular 2000/09 and this information must appear on the drawing. road name. For widened bridges.2.RTA DESIGN Prepared in accordance with sample drawing Figure 20.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Cover Sheets 20 20.2. Any alternative type of Cover Sheet must be submitted to the Authority for consideration and approval prior to use.1. There are four types of cover sheets. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 2 .1. The Cover Sheet also carry the year that the design was approved or accepted by the RTA ie NEW BRIDGE 2007 – see Figures.1. This sheet shall be numbered 1 and where prepared by consultants. by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority shall be the “Cover Sheet”. Where a set of construction plans are prepared for a bridge widening.1.g 0. a suitable Locality Plan. the Cover Sheet shall contain references to the existing bridge with the Bridge Number. road type. the design information provided should be shown as a factored standard loading where applicable e.

OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 2 .1.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Cover Sheets A typical Cover Sheet for a widened bridge is shown in Figure 30.1.

5mm TEXT PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 USE 7mm TEXT DESIGNED AND PRODUCED UNDER A QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFIED AS COMPLYING WITH ISO/AS 9001 BY AN ACCREDITED CERTIFICATION BODY REGISTRATION No OF PLANS USE 5mm TEXT 0017 453 BC 6538 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 15 ISSUE A FIGURE 20.BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING: SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS USE 5mm TEXT NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: ROUTE FACTOR: DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.CONCRETE 6 ABUTMENTS .2007 BRIDGE No 10253 USE 10mm CLOSED TEXT DESIGN FILE: 5M2364 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 .DETAILS 15 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM 3 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE 4 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT USE 2.3km SOUTH OF NARRANDERA THE YEAR IN WHICH THE DESIGN WAS USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT USE ONE DECIMAL PLACE APPROVED OR ACCEPTED BY THE RTA USE 5mm TEXT NEW BRIDGE .SHEET A 10 DECK .2-2004 BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: USE 3.2-2004 WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.2 AY N YANCO D E HW 14 R A STUR T HW Y LEETON 5 ABUTMENTS .REINFORCEMENT 7 PIERS 8 7m SPAN PSC PLANK N A R R A 100mm FLOOD DATA: 100 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2000 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 100 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: MR 596 RA IL W A Y K NEWELL HWY C MORUNDAH SH 17 Y A 2000 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: N O C BRIDGE SITE ee k MR 385 PREPARED BY T R IL O D E R IE REFERENCE REPORTS GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: DURABILITY ASSESSMENT REPORT: JE Co lo m bo Cr TO URANA BRIDGE SECTION 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 LOCALITY PLAN USE 5mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 600kmBY ROAD FROM SYDNEY 0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50Km USE 3.1.PANELS 14 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .SHEET C 12 DECK .5mm TEXT RA ILW ARDLETHAN WIND LOADING: AS 5100.5mm TEXT 100mm IMPORTANCE FACTOR: ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: SITE FACTOR: DESIGN CATEGORY: 1 COVER SHEET 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT TO 9 DECK .SHEET B 11 DECK .1 (a) CAD No: .SHEET D 13 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .STANDARD A1 BORDER OUTLINE (771mm x 566mm) USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT ROAD TYPE AND NUMBER ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW USE 10mm TEXT HIGHWAY No 17 NEWELL HIGHWAY ROAD NAME USE 20mm CLOSED TEXT SHIRE OF URANA LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAME BRIDGE OVER COLOMBO CREEK AT 33.

SHEET A 11 DECK CONCRETE .CONCRETE 9 GIRDERS .5mm TEXT 100 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2000 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 100 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: SITE YOUNG PREPARED BY MR 78 BRIDGE MR 239 2000 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: USE 3.8km SOUTH OF GRENFELL USE 5mm TEXT USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT USE ONE DECIMAL PLACE EXISTING TIMBER BRIDGE .BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING: NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: 1 COVER SHEET 100mm 10 DECK CONCRETE .SHEET B 15 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .CONCRETE DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.2-2004 BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: IMPORTANCE FACTOR: ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: SITE FACTOR: DESIGN CATEGORY: SH 17 FORBES La ch lan CANOWINDRA 5 ABUTMENTS .1567 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 .1102 USE 10mm CLOSED TEXT NEW BRIDGE 2007 BRIDGE No 10589 USE 5mm TEXT SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS USE 5mm TEXT DESIGN FILE: 483.REINFORCEMENT 6 PIER CONCRETE MR 310 M R 56 R e iv MR 23 6 7 PIER REINFORCEMENT USE 2.DETAILS 17 APPROACH SLABS 18 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM ROUTE FACTOR: 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 3 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT 4 ABUTMENTS .SHEET C 13 DECK REINFORCEMENT .SHEET B 12 DECK CONCRETE .5mm TEXT r 100mm 8 GIRDERS .5mm TEXT 5mm DIA MIN BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET REFERENCE REPORTS GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: DURABILITY ASSESSMENT REPORT: PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 LOCALITY PLAN USE 5mm TEXT 10 5 0 10 20 30 40 50km PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 USE 3.1939 BRIDGE No 251 REGN No OF PLANS-0239 483 BC 0503 GENERAL FILE No 483.1.STANDARD A1 USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT BORDER OUTLINE (771mm x 566mm) COUNCIL OF WEDDIN USE 10mm CLOSED TEXT MAIN ROAD No 239 HENRY LAWSON WAY USE 20mm CLOSED TEXT BRIDGE OVER TYAGONG CREEK AT 15.5mm TEXT DESIGNED AND PRODUCED UNDER A QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFIED AS COMPLYING WITH ISO/AS 9001 BY AN ACCREDITED CERTIFICATION BODY USE 7mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 388 km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY REGISTRATION No OF PLANS USE 5mm TEXT 0239 483 BC 0111 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 18 ISSUE A FIGURE 20.REINFORCEMENT WIND LOADING: AS 5100.SHEET A 14 DECK REINFORCEMENT .1(b) CAD No: .2-2004 WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.PANELS 16 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .2 COWRA MID WESTE RN HW Y GRENFELL SH 6 R lw y Burrangong Ck Tyagong Ck FLOOD DATA: USE 3.

2-2004 WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.5mm TEXT CAD No: RI VE R DUBBO REFERENCE REPORTS CONSULTANT GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: USE 3.SHEET C 11 DECK .1(c) .1.PANELS 13 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .5mm TEXT 2000 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: LOCALITY PLAN USE 5mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 586km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY 0 10 20 30 40 50km 10 5 USE 2.7/45.BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING: SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS USE 10mm TEXT 100mm NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: ROUTE FACTOR: DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM USE 5mm TEXT 1 COVER SHEET 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 3 PILES AND PILE LAYOUT (NOT IN CONTRACT) 4 ABUTMENTS .5mm TEXT SH 5 ABUTMENTS .SHEET A 9 DECK .CONCRETE EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.127 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 .2-2004 8 DECK .5mm TEXT DURABILITY ASSESSMENT REPORT: USE 7mm TEXT REGISTRATION No OF PLANS USE 5mm TEXT 0007 045 BC 2468 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 14 ISSUE A FIGURE 20.5mm TEXT BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: IMPORTANCE FACTOR: ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: SITE FACTOR: DESIGN CATEGORY: USE 3.DETAILS 14 BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM USE 3.2km WEST OF NYNGAN USE 5mm TEXT USE 15mmTEXT NEW BRIDGE .STANDARD A1 BORDER OUTLINE (771mm x 566mm) USE 15mm TEXT ROAD TYPE AND NUMBER ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW USE 10mm TEXT HIGHWAY No 7 MITCHELL HIGHWAY ROAD NAME USE 20mm TEXT SHIRE OF BOGAN LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAME BRIDGE OVER BOGAN RIVER AT 1.SHEET D 12 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING .SHEET B 10 DECK .2 18 BO GA N 5mm DIA 100mm MIN BRIDGE SITE NYNGAN TO SH O U R K 57 B SH 11 7 M MR E IT WARREN FLOOD DATA: 100 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 2000 YEAR FLOW VELOCITY: 100 YEAR FLOOD LEVEL: CH EL L NEVERTIRE H IG H W A TRANGIE Y USE 2.2006 BRIDGE No 10743 DESIGN FILE No .REINFORCEMENT 6 PIERS 7 10m SPAN PSC PLANK (NOT IN CONTRACT) WIND LOADING: AS 5100.

5mm TEXT NEW SOUTH WALES Jerilderie DESIGN TRAFFIC SPEED: 100 km PER HOUR TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: MEDIUM EARTHQUAKE LOADING: AS 5100.20/42.SHEET B REINFORCEMENT .2007 BRIDGE No 10147 100mm SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS USE 5mm TEXT DESIGN FILE No .2-2004 M Murra y WIND TERRAIN CATEGORY: AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL ULS: R = AVERAGE RECURRENCE INTERVAL SLS: R = River VICTORIA Ri ur ve ra y r 10 11 NET PRESSURE COEFFICIENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH D2 OF AS 1170.STANDARD A1 BORDER OUTLINE (771 x 566mm) LOGO SUPPLIED BY CLIENT MURRAY IRRIGATION LIMITED ACN 067 197 933 USE 10mm TEXT ROAD TYPE AND NUMBER HIGHWAY No 20 RIVERINA HIGHWAY SHIRE OF CONARGO USE 20mm CLOSED TEXT LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA NAME ROAD NAME BRIDGE OVER MAYRUNG CHANNEL AT 20.1(d) CAD No: .1.2-2004 BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION: IMPORTANCE FACTOR: ACCELERATION COEFFICIENT: SITE FACTOR: DESIGN CATEGORY: USE 2.SHEET A REINFORCEMENT .1953 REGISTRATION No OF PLANS: 0020 092 BC 0114 USE 10mm CLOSED TEXT NEW BRIDGE .SHEET B REINFORCEMENT .5mm TEXT PREPARED BY REFERENCE REPORTS GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT: HYDRAULIC MODELLING AND WATERWAYS REQUIREMENTS REPORT: DURABILITY ASSESSMENT REPORT: 0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50km BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 678km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 USE 7mm TEXT DESIGNED AND PRODUCED UNDER A QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFIED AS COMPLYING WITH ISO/AS 9001 BY AN ACCREDITED CERTIFICATION BODY REGISTRATION No OF PLANS USE 5mm TEXT 0020 092 BC 0115 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 11 ISSUE A FIGURE 20.SHEET A CONCRETE .2 USE 5mm TEXT LOCALITY PLAN USE 3.146 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 .SHEET C TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER DETAILS BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM USE 3.BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC LOADING: NUMBER OF HEAVY VEHICLES PER LANE PER DAY: ROUTE FACTOR: 1 2 COVER SHEET GENERAL ARRANGEMENT-SHEET A GENERAL ARRANGEMENT SHEET B CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE CONCRETE .5mm TEXT 3 4 DENILIQUIN 100mm NE WE LL HIG HW AY 5 6 7 8 9 RIVERINA HIG HW AY FINLEY Berrigan HIGHWAY COBB BRIDGE SITE Mathoura Tocumwal WIND LOADING: AS 5100.8km WEST OF FINLEY USE ONE DECIMAL PLACE USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT USE 5mm TEXT EXISTING BRIDGE .

SECTION 21 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS .

1(d). a suite of General Arrangement drawings shall be created and the titles General Arrangement . approach slabs and steel safety barriers in the approaches as appropriate Issue 1 – Revision 1 (22 September 2010) Page 1 of 3 OTB005 .2 PLAN VIEW Plan views shall contain the following information: An outline of the structure The watercourse. piles. 21. railway line or road under the structure Any existing structures including the Reduced Level of the deck The location of any public utilities The Base centreline and Carriageway centreline as appropriate Chainages on the Base centreline at the ends of deck and at each pier centreline together with the reduced level at each location The bearing or radius of the Base centreline as appropriate For bridges over roads.Sheet B etc shall be used.1(b). Typical General Arrangement drawings for a variety of bridge construction types are shown in Figures 21. a suitable skew diagram and/or vertical alignment diagram as appropriate and a list of "General Notes" which apply to the entire set of drawings.1(c) and 21.1. 21.1 GENERAL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS In all cases. 21. the coordinates of the intersection point of the control line for the bridge and the centreline of the underlying roadway. footways and railings as appropriate Joints in the deck surface The position of name plates The outlines of the structural elements ie abutments.Sheet A. General Arrangement . footings and columns etc where the scale of the drawing permits Horizontal clearances as appropriate The location of any vertical clearance referenced from the Elevation Contours of the existing surface Shapes and slopes of any embankments Extent of any embankment protection required Extent of any channel excavation required The direction of flow of the watercourse or conventional tidal representation The compass direction of True North indicated by a northpoint The outline of concrete safety barrier extensions.1.1.1. piers. by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority. Sheet No 2 of each set of bridge construction drawings prepared by the Authority. shall be the "General Arrangement” drawing. The General Arrangement drawing shall contain a note which describes the thickness and composition of the bituminous surfacing and waterproofing system on the structure. a site plan. as well as the chainage on the control line for the bridge structure at that point The outline of parapets. The “General Arrangement” gives an overall view of the bridge as it will appear once constructed and it shall include a plan.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual General Arrangement Drawings 21 21. an elevation. a typical cross section. Where more than one sheet is necessary to show all the required details. The General Arrangement drawing shall not contain any construction sequence information or any construction requirement information.1(a).

Navigational clearances above Mean High Water Springs for navigable waterways The calculated High Flood Levels .3 ELEVATION Elevations shall contain the following information as appropriate: The outline of the elevation face of the structure projected from the Plan view showing foundation type. approach slabs and steel safety barriers in the approaches Contract levels of foundation elements Bearing articlulation in the longitudinal direction represented by the letters “F” for fixed. including the date of occurence Vertical and horizontal clearances for structures over roads and/or railways including the approximate design surface level of any road or railway line under the structure at the Base centreline Vertical and horizontal clearances for opening span bridges both open and closed The existing surface on the Base centreline projected from contour lines. abutments. “R” for restrained and “E” for expansion Expansion joint locations. parapet extensions. represented by the letters “EJ” Joints in the superstructure represented by a single heavy line Chainages. existing surface levels and design surface levels at the ends of deck and at each pier on the Control Line or Base centreline given in a Datum block beneath the Elevation Structure location with respect to nearest major towns ie FROM / TO - 21.5 OTB005 SKEW DIAGRAM Issue 1 – Revision 1 (22 September 2010) Page 2 of 3 . Proposed cross section for channel excavation Form and extent of any embankments and any required embankment protection whether above or below the existing natural surface. superstructure and railings. NORTH or SOUTH.4 TYPICAL CROSS SECTION Typical cross sections shall contain the following information: General form of the piers or abutments including foundation elements Outline of the superstructure elements Overall width of the superstructure Width between concrete safety barriers Height of traffic barrier railings above deck level Widths of concrete safety barriers and/or footways Clear width of footways Base centreline and/or Carriageway centreline and/or Control Line Crossfall or superelevation represented by an arrow and % sign Type of wearing surface Indication of orientation with respect to stream flow or compass point ie UPSTREAM or DOWNSTREAM.both the 1in 100 year ARI and 1 in 2000 year ARI values The reported High Flood Level. piers. The overall length of deck The number and length of spans The grade on the deck (represented by an arrow and %sign) or the reduced level of the deck as appropriate The normal water level or stream condition ie normally dry etc Mean High Water Springs and Mean Low Water Springs for tidal waters.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual General Arrangement Drawings 21. 21.

21.7 - SITE PLAN Base centreline. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 1 (22 September 2010) Page 3 of 3 . including the position of any Tangent Points etc The position and chainage of each end of the bridge The existing bridge (if applicable) including the RL of the existing deck Survey Marks and Bench Marks (including RL) Road boundaries The location of any existing public utilities The location and description of any nearby features that are likely to affect the construction of the new bridge Northpoint 21. 21. Any necessary additional information may be added as required.5. for both right and left hand skews are shown in Figure 21.8 GENERAL NOTES The General Notes on the General Arrangement Drawing shall be in the format shown on the current issue of RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 with the blank spaces being filled in with the appropriate information. Skew Diagrams shall contain the following information: A dimension for the vertical side of the triangle (normally 10 000).RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual General Arrangement Drawings Skew Diagrams shall be in the following format: A right angle triangle with the base parallel to the Control Line or Base Centreline. the hypotenuse parallel to the abutment and pier centrelines and with the skew angle designated at the apex of the triangle. A dimension for the base and hypotenuse of the triangle calculated from the vertical dimension and the skew angle Conventional Skew Diagrams.6 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT DIAGRAM Vertical alignment diagrams shall contain the following information: The length of the curve The grade on the road at each end of the curve The chainage and reduced level at each end of the curve The position of the bridge indicated by a heavy line together with a chainage and reduced level at each end of the bridge The chainage and reduced level of the intersection point of the approach grades on the Base centreline.

STEEL SAFETY BARRIERS.5 DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES. SPRAYED SAM SEAL OR ANY WORK IN THE APPROACHES EXCEPT THE APPROACH SLABS.200 BASE BEARING 8 56’ 39. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM.2 5 2.200 APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON PARAPET CH 216.200 NAME PLATE ON PARAPET CH 283.900 BRIDGE OVER TALBRAGAR RIVER AT TROY GENERAL ARRANGEMENT QA RECORDS COMPLETED PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET MANAGER. EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT.3" ABUTMENT B CH 283.1. THE BRIDGEWORKS DO NOT INCLUDE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING BRIDGE.200 APPROACH SLAB SECTION 1 - RC DRIVEN PILES 1 - GENERAL NOTES SCALE: 0 5 10 15m OR AS SHOWN.5 EMBANKMENT PROTECTION SHALL BE TAKEN 600mm MINIMUM BELOW EXISTING LEVEL (TYP) E SPAN 1 E SPAN 2 F SPAN 3 E 150 NWL RL 247.900 RL 265.3" CH 250.DOWNSTREAM 3000 APPROACH SLAB OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK = 101 300 33 500 33 500 33 500 3000 APPROACH SLAB 400 600 4500 15 SPRAYED SAM 100 DUCT EJ DOUBLE DOUBLE SEAL BASE c L UPSTREAM 4500 DESIGNED SURFACE LEVEL RL 265. EXISTING BRIDGE (TO BE DEMOLISHED) RL 265. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES.600 RL 265.1(a) L BASE c ABUTMENT A CH 182.000 APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE ON BASE c L STORMWATER 1500 DEEP PSC SUPER "T" GIRDERS PIPE L CHAINAGE ALONG BASE c STEEL SAFETY BARRIER THRIE BEAM 1 - CH 182. F DENOTES FIXED BEARING. FROM DUBBO NEW BRIDGE TO GILGANDRA HIGHWAY No 7 CITY OF DUBBO FIGURE 21.200 CALCULATED HFL RL 262.000 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 243.dgn 0 . BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS CLIENT WESTERN REGIONAL OFFICE 51-55 CURRAJONG STREET PARKES PO BOX 334 PARKES NSW 2870 PHONE (02) 6861-1444 FACSIMILE (02) 6861-1414 PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 DATE FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 0007 381 BC 1234 APPROVED SITE PLAN PRELIMINARY 0 10 5 10 20 30 40 50m SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) B10846 DATE 2 CAD No KP2F2111A.000 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 241. E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING.000 DATUM RL 240.0 STORMWATER PIPE FOUNDATION MATERIAL: SAND/SANDY LOAM 150 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 245.200 600 FROM DUBBO STEEL SAFETY BARRIER THRIE BEAM 400 TO GILGANDRA DESIGNED SURFACE EJ L ON BASEc RL 265.500 RL 265.000 RL 265. EMBANKMENT PROTECTION.600 BEARING 8 56’ 39.

000 APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL L ON BASE c SPAN 1 SPAN 2 SPAN 3 SPAN 4 SPAN 5 EXISTING BRIDGE L CHAINAGE ON BASE c RL 141. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DATE 0246 451 BC 1234 APPROVED B10589 PRELIMINARY PLAN SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) FIGURE 21.700 RL 142.A .B04.TYP DOUBLE SEAL DESIGNED SURFACE LEVEL RL 142. STEEL NAME PLATE ON PARAPET APPROACH SLAB CH 943.0 EMBANKMENT PROTECTION SHALL SURFACE BE TAKEN 600mm MINIMUM BELOW EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL (TYP) 12m SPAN PSC CONTRACT LEVEL RL 123.TYP 0 1000 2000 3000mm 1000 500 DATUM RL 118.300 R R R 1 IN 100 YEAR ARI HFL RL 140.F02.000 BASE c L R DENOTES RESTRAINED BEARING.300 MAIN ROAD No 246 SHIRE OF HUME SAFETY BARRIER. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.500 RADIAL SECTION 1 - PLANKS . CH 919.087 RL 142.300 CH 931.FROM HOWLONG 3000 APPROACH SLAB OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK = 60 600 3000 APPROACH SLAB TO CHILTERN UPSTREAM 10 200 9000 DOWNSTREAM 300 5 AT 12 000 = 60 000 300 600 4500 15mm SPRAYED SAM DOUBLE L BASE c 4500 600 W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No WD.TYP DECK RL 142.000 BRIDGE OVER FRENCH’S CREEK 1 - AT 1.300 APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON PARAPET CH 895. THE BRIDGEWORKS DO NOT INCLUDE SPRAYED SAM DOUBLE DOUBLE SEAL. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES.R132.A .dgn 0 .300 CH 882.9km SOUTH OF HOWLONG GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PREPARED BY QA RECORDS COMPLETED BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 MANAGER.300 L ON BASE c STEEL SAFETY BARRIER (THRIE BEAM) . EMBANKMENT FILL AND PROTECTION OR ANY WORKS IN THE APPROACHES EXCEPT APPROACH SLABS.500 R R R DIA 100 UPVC PIPES APPROX LEVEL OF EMBANKMENT FILL TO UNDERSIDE OF ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK PRIOR TO DRIVING OF PILES NWL RL 247.300 ELEVATION CH 943.000 CH 907.R132. REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AHD. 1(b) DATE 2 CAD No KP2F2111B. 1.700 ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT A SITE PLAN 0 25 50 75m 25 125 POSTS AND BLOCKOUT PIECES IN APPROACHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD. 1 CH 882.000 RL 142.397 RL 142.TYP EXISTING BRIDGE 1961 GENERAL NOTES 0 2 4 6 8 10m SCALES BRIDGE No 643 2 1 OR AS SHOWN.300 TP CH 961.000 TP CH 799.

RL 3.345 6.440 6.214% SCALES AS SHOWN.MAY 1982 (RICHMOND TO WILBERFORCE).5 E TO 1 APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE I.0 APPROX DOWNSTREAM 11 650 UPSTREAM W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.700 END OF APPROACH SLAB DATUM RL -5.0 - (TYP) CH 89.BO4.685 6. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DATE PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 0123 291 BC 0256 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PRELIMINARY 3640 APPROVED DRAWING PLAN 0 1 2 3 4 5m SKEW DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) MANAGER. SUBSOIL DRAINS. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS B10256 1 0.L. REFER TO ROAD PLANS REG No 0181 091 BA 2500. THE PROBABLE 100 YEAR HFL IS RL 16. 0 10000 0 5.5 POSTS AND BLOCKOUT PIECES IN APPROACHES IN ACCORDANCE 1 McKENZIES CREEK R 2200 000 WITH RTA DRAWING No MD. EXISTING TIMBER BRIDGE (1947) RL 6. GABIONS.FO2.440 CH 223.0 RL 6.440 6.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.0 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 MANAGER.3 205. ROAD APPROACHES.FROM McGRATHS HILL 3000 APPROACH SLAB 320 15000 320 OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK ON CONTROL LINE 15 640 3000 APPROACH SLAB TO PITT TOWN * 100 YEAR HFL RL 16.A 4.R132.685 ABUTMENT B CONTROL LINE McGRATHS HILL TO PITT TOWN 1 0.045 RL 6.685 RL 6. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE AND CHANNEL SHAPING AND PROTECTION.045 FROM CH 208. BASED ON LOWER HAWKESBURY RIVER FLOOD PLAIN ATLAS .685 McKENZIES CHAINAGE ON CONTROL LINE ABUTMENT A ELEVATION 0 1 2 3 4 5m CH 208. REDUCED LEVELS ARE TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM.181 FOR DETAILS OF NEW CHANNEL CH 239.R132.045 RL 6.0 0 RL 6. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 123 SHIRE OF HAWKESBURY 0 BRIDGE OVER McKENZIES CREEK FIGURE 21. CH 205.500 6.355 5.9 87% GENERAL NOTES 0.5 SHEET No DATE 2 ISSUE 0 CAD No KP2F2111C.306 RL 9.045 208.306 RL 6.800 CONTRACT LEVEL RL -5.2 5.000 TO BE DEMOLISHED BRIDGE NUMBER 589 NAME PLATE ON CONCRETE PARAPET IP CH 164. PROFILE AND RL 6. 106 42 .2km NORTH OF McGRATHS HILL GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 1 20 00 00" QA RECORDS COMPLETED BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 - 3.191 75000 75000 LENGTH OF VC APPROACH SLAB CH 208.685 226.0 PREPARED BY AT 1. THE BRIDGEWORKS INCLUDE THE DEMOLITION OF THE EXISTING BRIDGE BUT EXCLUDE THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SIDE TRACK.1.345 VERTICAL ALIGNMENT NOT TO SCALE * CALCULATED HFL BASED ON McKENZIES CREEK CATCHMENT WITHOUT BACKWATER FROM THE HAWKESBURY RIVER.045 ABUTMENT A CH 223. (NOT IN BRIDGEWORKS) 15m PSC PLANKS INTEGRAL ENERGY FOUNDATION MATERIAL: SAND / SANDY CLAY CONTRACT LEVEL RL -2.000 ABUTMENT B CH 223.355 END OF APPROACH SLAB CONTRACT LEVEL SECTION 1 - F DENOTES FIXED BEARING E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT 1 0.A (TYP) 1/125 DIA UPVC DUCT FOR TELSTRA * CALCULATED 100 YEAR HFL RL 7.24 (INCLUDING AFFLUX) 325 5 500 5 500 325 TRAFFIC BARRIER CONTROL LINE 75 THICK ASPHALT (NOT IN BRIDGEWORKS) DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL 3% RAILING 1/150 DIA UPVC DUCT FOR AGL 2/125 DIA UPVC DUCTS FOR INTEGRAL ENERGY EJ 3% APPROXIMATE EXISTING SURFACE F1 .1 EXISTING TIMBER BRIDGE RL 6.351 BATTER PROTECTION REFER TO SHEET No 14 CR EE K 5.0 6.50 2/125 DIA UPVC DUCTS FOR EXISTING CHANNEL SHALL BE SHAPED TO THE TRAPEZOIDAL PROFILE AS SHOWN ON SHEET No 14 8700 (8200 SQUARE TO CHANNEL) BASE OF CHANNEL SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH 230 THICK ROCK MATTRESS AND EMBANKMENTS SHALL BE STABILISED WITH JUTE MESH AND GRASSED TO PREVENT SCOUR APPROXIMATE EXISTING CHANNEL. CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES.306 ALIGNMENT. 4.685 RL 6. GUARDRAIL. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.045 223. KERB EXTENSIONS.0M INCLUDING BACKWATER FROM THE HAWKESBURY RIVER. 5.420 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE END OF DECK ABUTMENT A END OF DECK ABUTMENT B 6. 0 SITE PLAN NOT TO SCALE -3. 4.1(c) 4.420 CONTROL LINE R 2200 000 CH 226.355 APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON CONCRETE PARAPET EXISTING LIGHT POST FOR DETAILS OF GABIONS RETAINING FILL.5 0 1 2 3 4 5m 5.

BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS N 3145246.5 E LEVEL SHED SURFAC APPROX FINI 273. ABUTMENT A START OF CURVE CH 705.637 MAIN ROAD APPROACH SLAB NAME PLATE ON WINGWALL No 87 BEARING 68%%d 42’ 35. E DENOTES EXPANSION BEARING. FROM GUNDAGAI TO GUNDAGAI . TREATMENT OF EXCAVATED ROCK SURFACE.TYP E CONTRACT LEVEL 1. CONTROL LINE F NORTHBOUND 5450 MIN 2 TO 1 600 1.1. CH 825.500 FROM YASS SECTION 1 - 0 1000 2000 3000mm CONTROL LINE CONTROL LINE SOUTHBOUND NORTHBOUND 1000 500 1. EJ DENOTES EXPANSION JOINT.5 TO 1 CH 672.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON BRIDGE ¶ 270.210 276.210 RL 267.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.560 CHAINAGE ON BRIDGE ¶ ELEVATION TO YASS CONTRACT LEVEL RL 258. BRIDGEWORKS DO NOT INCLUDE EXCAVATION TO EXCAVATED ROCK SURFACE AND HW2 FINISHED DESIGN LEVELS.405 269.5 TO 1 CH 575.HO1.405 DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW HIGHWAY No 2 NORTHBOUND CARRIAGEWAY SOUTHBOUND CARRIAGEWAY SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI 1.560 RL 269.000 FINISHED DESIGN LEVEL ON HIGHWAY No 2 10 000 10 000 EXCAVATED END OF DECK ABUTMENT B ROCK SURFACE MIN * PSC VOIDED SLAB STEEL SAFETY BARRIERS IN BRIDGE APPROACHES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.488 267.7236% HIGHWAY No 2 5.560 682.5 TO 1 BRIDGE OVER HIGHWAY No 2 AT 82.0% DIA 100 CONTROL LINE SOUTHBOUND CLEARANCE CONTRACT LEVEL RL 266.8 271.R132. F DENOTES FIXED BEARING.910 CH 641.8 EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON BRIDGE ¶ 672.000 2 TO 1 BRIDGE LOCATION LENGTH OF CURVE = 250 000 CH 641.765 1 3.B 1 000 MIN ABUTMENT A END OF DECK EXCAVATED ROCK SURFACE DATUM RL 250.4km SOUTH OF YASS GENERAL ARRANGEMENT QA RECORDS COMPLETED AND DRAWINGS RECOMMENDED FOR APPROVAL BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 MANAGER. 5 TO 600 RL 264. STEEL SAFETY BARRIER OR ANY WORK IN THE APPROACHES EXCEPT 2 TO 1 1.378 2 TO 1 1.910 641.94 22% GENERAL NOTES 0 2 4 6 8 10m HIGHWAY No 2 SCALE 2 1 OR AS SHOWN.637 269.TO HIGHWAY No 2 FROM COOTAMUNDRA 3 000 APPROACH SLAB 350 SAFETY SCREEN POSTS INSTALLED TRULY VERTICAL * STEEL SAFETY BARRIER EJ E 2 TO 1 LEVEL SURFAC E NORTHERN SIDE 4 700 9 400 4 700 SOUTHERN SIDE OVERALL LENGTH OF DECK ON BRIDGE ¶ = 64 700 31 000 33 000 350 LOADING/UNLOADING RAMPS 3 000 ON BRIDGE ¶ SAFETY SCREEN BRIDGE ¶ APPROACH SLAB * STEEL SAFETY BARRIER EJ 75mm THICK ASPHALT STEEL TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 1300 TYP EXISTING APP ROXIMATE 3.066 1. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 ISSUE A CAD No D246GA.2" ON BRIDGE ¶ NAME PLATE ON WINGWALL APPROACH SLAB VERTICAL CURVE DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE FOR APPROACH SLABS.000 705.5 2 TO 1 TO 1 CH 662. END OF CURVE CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES.910 ISSUE RL 270. CH 705.000 REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AHD .095 5 TO 1 1 000 SPAN 1 PIER ¶ SPAN 2 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 258.582 E 241024.000 RL 271.210 - ABUTMENT B 1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.891 1 - PREPARED BY CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183 PHONE (02) 8837-0810 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DATE PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS APPROVED DESIGN DRAWING 0002 246 BC 2140 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: B10256 SENIOR BRIDGE ENGINEER (NEW DESIGN) DENOTES PLAN LOCATION POINT OF MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR CONSTRUCTION PLAN FIGURE 21.0% DUCTS . ASPHALT.3 IP CH 700.066 274.1(d) DATE MANAGER.

’L1’ AND ’L2’ ARE CALCULATED BY THE USE OF THE GIVEN DIMENSIONS AND THE SKEW ANGLE SKEW DIAGRAMS 10 000 ’L 2’ FIGURE 21.SKEW ANGLE ’L 2’ ’L1’ RIGHT HAND SKEW DIRECTION OF INCREASING CHAINAGE SKEW ANGLE 10 000 ’L1’ LEFT HAND SKEW DIRECTION OF INCREASING CHAINAGE IN BOTH CASES.5 .

SECTION 22 CONCRETE DETAILING .

greater than 20 x 20 mm. used to show the location of such elements as footings. Figures 22.e. Formed holes.6 inclusive show some typical examples of concrete detailing. 1:5.).e. 1:2 etc. the dimensions for the positioning of piles relative to pilecap/pier extremities shall not be shown on the pilecap/pier drawing.1 to 22. Plan views shall be drawn as a horizontal view taken immediately above the element under consideration. The drainage pipe shall extend a minimum of 75mm from the outer face to permit the drainage of water from the abutment. cast-in metal work. The location of formed holes and cast-in metal work shall be sufficiently dimensioned to enable their correct positioning inside the formwork. Dimensioning of concrete elements (whose details appear on a separate sheet) shall not be given. Unless otherwise specified by the design engineer. 1:10. the top surface of all abutment sill beams and headstocks shall be detailed to have a downward slope of approximately 2% from the front face to the curtain wall and a minimum 50mm diameter drainage pipe shall be provided through the side wall or wing wall at the low side of the abutment. 22. 22. may also be used to show reference markings. Cast-in items (where applicable) shall be cross referenced to the particular sheet where respective details are shown. It is important that sufficient information is shown to enable formwork to be built and erected and concrete quantities to be easily calculated. The detailing of standard chamfers and fillets i.2 DIMENSIONING Dimensioning of concrete items shall be in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual. 'General Notes' applicable to concrete detail sheets are shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 and those notes shall be used as the basis for all 'concrete' notes with any other required notes being added thereto. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 2 .e. construction joints and any necessary layers of mass concrete shall be shown. e.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Concrete Detailing 22 22. Non standard fillets i.3 PLAN VIEWS Plan views. standard chamfers and fillets shall be detailed to their correct size on any view or section where the scale is 1:10 or larger (i. columns.1 GENERAL CONCRETE DETAILING Concrete detail drawings should show the physical dimensions and levels of a concrete structure and should include any construction sequences specified by the designer. 20 x 20 mm. co-ordinates and chainages. should not be shown on small scale views or sections. However. headstocks etc. shall be shown in all instances and shall be either called up or dimensioned.g.

however. Sections.6 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints are not permitted in salt or brackish water in the range 0. 22. voided slabs and continuity connections. Such construction joints. Hidden details.5 SECTIONS Sections shall be drawn as a view from a cutting plane located through an element previously drawn as an Elevation or Plan. any change in direction of the cutting plane shall be shown by 0.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Concrete Detailing Hidden details such as piles. possible construction joints may be shown and marked 'OPTIONAL'. Where it may be possible to cast the whole of an element in one continuous operation but the quantity of concrete involved and the height of the element is large. such as abutment wing walls and associated fillets shall be shown as broken lines in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual.4 ELEVATIONS Elevations shall be drawn as a view seen from a vertical plane immediately in front of the element under consideration and shall be projected from that elements 'PLAN' view. pier columns) to avoid height related access and concrete compaction problems. Linework shall be in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual.7mm thick lines. where required.6 m below low water level to 0. Construction joints. Construction joints may also be required in tall members(i. Where section details cannot be shown on the sheet of origin. 22. where critical for design purposes e.e. shall be drawn adjacent to the plan or elevation to which they relate. shall be adequately located by dimensions on the drawings. continuous deck slabs.g. where possible. only the details at the cutting plane of the section should be shown. If a series of cutting planes are used to define section details. 22. shall be detailed on the drawings. Generally. The aesthetic aspect of construction joints in highly visible members should also be considered. they shall be cross referenced in accordance with Appendix A of AS 1100 Part 301. Construction joints are not permitted in prestressed concrete items except where directed by the designer. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 2 . details beyond the cutting plane may be included provided that the included details are not confusing to the main details being shown. columns and footings shall be shown as broken lines where appropriate in accordance with Section 7 of this Manual.6 m above high water level.

550 .165 .ABUTMENT B 300 50 BEARING MORTAR PADS AND RECESSES CJ 20 FOR BEARING DETAILS SEE SHEETS No X AND X ¶ OF BEARING 300 RL 242. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1.229 .ABUTMENT A RL 246.390 .ABUTMENT A RL 245.165 .585 .ABUTMENT B RL 247. X REQUIRED. FOR DETAILS OF EXPANSION JOINT AND COVER PLATE RECESSES.ABUTMENT B 50 50 1 400 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE 2 300 RL 241.364 .ABUTMENT A RL 242. 370 ¶ OF BEARINGS 2 300 DETAIL A - A 150 150 100 50 0 100 200 300 400 500mm FIGURE 22.310 .790 .390 .ABUTMENT A RL 243. 3 BEARING 339%%d 0’ 0" 2 10 BEARING ¶ BEARING ¶ 1 10 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW BEARING ¶ BEARING ¶ MAIN ROAD No 78 SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI 4 ABUTMENT A 0 ABUTMENT B BRIDGE OVER MAIN ROAD No 21 2.165 . 345 300 150 1120 350 B 1180 3% 3% 300 100 300 RL 244.RL 246.535 . DENOTES REDUCED LEVELS AT BACK FACE OF CURTAIN WALL.ABUTMENT A RL 247.565 .1 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.ABUT A CH 27 134.dgn .ABUTMENT B CONTROL LINE EXPANSION JOINT FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No X RL 246.ABUT B 2 650 DIA 45 x 300 DEEP RECESS (TYP) 3770 180 360 180 1 8 SPACES AT 500 = 4 000 250 250 DOWEL SPACING: 8 SPACES AT 500 = 4 000 CONTROL LINE 600 100 180 95 3 10 ¶ OF BEARINGS 95 95 MORTAR PAD 0 1000 2000 MAX 1745 MIN 1595 VARIES F 6 2 054 370 GENERAL NOTES GENERAL NOTES 3000mm SCALE 1000 500 OR AS SHOWN. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET.ABUTMENT A RL 247. 360 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa.450 .ABUTMENT B CJ RL 244.450 . EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.ABUTMENT A RL 245.ABUTMENT A RL 245.SHEET A 350 ALUMINIUM 92 EXTRUSION PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183 5 000 5 150 10 300 5 150 C PREPARED PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS DETAIL B DETAIL 500mm C - DESIGN DRAWING 0078 246 BC 2468 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER 0 100 200 300 400 2479 NOT TO SCALE ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. DIMENSIONS AND LEVELS SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO SUIT ACTUAL DECK LEVEL. DENOTES PORTION OF CURTAIN WALLS AND WING WALLS ABOVE CJ SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUCTED UNTIL DECK SLAB CONCRETE IN ADJACENT SPAN IS PLACED.150 . DENOTES REDUCED LEVELS AT FRONT FACE OF CURTAIN WALL.5 2 000 4 500 5 000 2 000 2 000 4 500 2 000 AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC ABUTMENTS CONCRETE . FOR DOWEL ASSEMBLY DETAILS SEE SHEET No X. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS PLAN 100 50 SHEET No 4 ISSUE A CAD No kp2f221. SEE 95 180 1120 SHEETS No XX AND XX.390 .229 .ABUTMENT B 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE ELEVATION SECTION 1 BEARING AND GIRDER ¶ 30 NOM DOWEL SPACING: 600 100 ELASTOMERIC 2 10 BEARING STRIP FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No 47 300 x 300 FILLET CH 26 993.ABUTMENT B END OF DECK ·20 x 300 LONG STAINLESS STEEL DOWEL GRADE 304 TO ASTM A276.ABUTMENT B RL 244.

659 RL 248.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.430 382 4 SCALE 1000 500 OR AS SHOWN. SEE SHEET No XX. FOR DETAILS SEE SHEETS No XX AND XX. DENOTES REDUCED LEVELS AT TOP FRONT EDGE OF WINGWALL.790 50 THICK MASS 6 11 5 CONCRETE 5 11 7 VIEW 2 9 VIEW 3 9 11 DETAIL E - ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT A 0 500 500 250 UNISTRUT CONCRETE INSERTS FOR DRAINAGE PIPE ARE NOT SHOWN.565 50 THICK MASS 1 400 1 400 CONCRETE 4 11 780 780 RL 242.TYP 392 5 1 200 300 29 RL 248.435 RL 248.565 SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI BRIDGE OVER MAIN ROAD No 21 AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC ABUTMENTS CONCRETE . 550 1 030 1 030 1 745 1 815 1 815 710 275 275 D - 1 280 1 745 21 FIGURE 22.790 50 THICK MASS 1 400 1 400 CONCRETE 4 11 780 780 6 11 50 THICK MASS CONCRETE RL 243.SHEET B PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183 5 11 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 7 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 VIEW 2 9 11 VIEW 3 9 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 0078 246 BC 2468 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT B MANAGER.NAME PLATE SET FLUSH RECESS FOR CONNECTION OF THRIE BEAM.2 DIA 100 UPVC PIPE FOR DETAILS 3 085 3 025 3 060 SEE SHEET No XX 3 120 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 78 RL 242.630 1 180 770 3 000 780 INCLUDED IN THE TENDER DOCUMENTS . BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS 2479 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 5 ISSUE A CAD No kp2f222. 1000 1500mm NAME PLATE SET FLUSH 4 11 RL 247.435 RL 247. .630 780 65 400 29 300 1 200 7 DIA 100 UPVC PIPE FOR DETAILS 11 6 11 5 11 3 000 WITH VERTICAL FACE OF CONCRETE BARRIER GENERAL NOTES 0 1000 2000 3000mm SEE SHEET No XX 770 1 180 1 180 770 3 000 780 RL 247.430 780 65 4 11 3 000 5 11 WITH VERTICAL FACE OF CONCRETE BARRIER 770 1 180 DIA 100 UPVC PIPE 7 FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No XX 11 6 11 RL 247.659 390 1 031 1 745 550 1 820 1 030 275 21 275 710 E - 1 270 1 755 1 815 5 DETAIL DIA 100 UPVC PIPE FOR DETAILS 3 050 3 025 3 085 3 120 SEE SHEET No XX 0 500 D 1000 1500mm 500 250 RL 243. FOR DETAILS OF CAST-IN ANCHOR ASSEMBLY SEE RTA DRAWING No RTAB032 RL 248.

600 125 90 210 35 5 55 5 175 125

600 175 35 265 175

600 210 90 55 35 5 125 175

600 265 35 125

5

390

THRIE BEAM CONNECTION RECESS

600

390

50mm DIA x 125 LONG UPVC PIPE 600 FOR ABUTMENT DRAINAGE TYPICAL EACH SIDE 1 745 340

550

550

ANCHOR AND 275 340 1 745 1 745 THRIE BEAM ¶ 1 745

ANCHOR AND THRIE BEAM ¶ 275

THRIE BEAM CONNECTION RECESS

SIDE WALL

180

180

DIA 100 UPVC PIPE

100 VARIES FROM ???? TO ???? VARIES FROM ???? TO ????

180

DIA 100 UPVC PIPE

180

VARIES FROM ???? TO ????

VARIES FROM ???? TO ????

75

DETAIL

F 4

0

100

200

300mm

100

50

500

150

150

500

125

375 600

100 1 400

100

375 600

125 1 400

VIEW

4 5

VIEW

6 5

SECTION

5 5

SECTION

7 5

GAPS BETWEEN CONDUITS SHALL BE SEALED WITH SILICONE SEALANT TO

GENERAL NOTES
0 500 1000 1500mm

PREVENT RELATIVE MOVEMENT AND WRAPPED WITH WATERPROOF TAPE TO 200 PREVENT THE INGRESS OF MORTAR - TYP DN 100 (AU) HD RIGID PLAIN INSULATING UPVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS TO AS/NZS 2053 WITH GALVANISED DRAW WIRE - TYP 50 ABUTMENT END

SCALE
500 250

OR AS SHOWN.

FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET, SEE SHEET No X.

FIGURE 22.3
8 APPROACH END 8 DN 125 (AU) HD RIGID PLAIN INSULATING UPVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS TO AS/NZS 2053 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW
MAIN ROAD No 78 SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI

BRIDGE OVER MAIN ROAD No 21
AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC ABUTMENT CONCRETE DETAILS - SHEET C
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183

PREPARED DESIGN

CHECKED

REGISTRATION No OF PLANS

UPVC CONDUIT DETAIL
0

0078 246 BC 2468
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER

DRAWING
100 200 300mm

2479

ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION
100 50
MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS

SHEET No

6

ISSUE

A

CAD No kp2f223.dgn

3 9 600 4 800 RL 244.770 - PIER 1 RL 245.160 - PIER 2 CONTROL LINE 1 RL 244.915 - PIER 1 RL 245.305 - PIER 2 4 800 RL 244.770 - PIER 1 RL 245.160 - PIER 2 144 1 300 180 DIA 45 x 300 DEEP RECESS (TYP) NCF 180 RL 242.615 - PIER 1 RL 243.005 - PIER 2 3 360 180 ¶ OF BEARINGS 370 370 ¶ OF BEARINGS 95 95 2 500 ¶ OF PIER 1 250 1 250

BEARING AND GIRDER ¶ 30 NOM MORTAR PAD

3%

3%

1 240

150 SOFFIT OF HEADSTOCK TYP

916

DETAIL
250 TYP 7 505 - PIER 3 8 115 - PIER 1
100 50

A -

NCF

0

100

200

300

400

500mm

DIA 2 000

SECTION

3 -

0

500

1000

1500mm

500

250

2 -

NCF 100 CJ

2 CH 27 028.850 - PIER 1 1 500 CONTROL LINE CH 27 098.850 - PIER 2 SCALE
1000 500

GENERAL NOTES
0 1000 2000 3000mm

OR AS SHOWN.

BEARING 339%%d 0.0’ 0.0"

RL 234.000 - PIER 2 RL 233.000 - PIER 1 50 THICK TYP MASS CONCRETE 50

CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION FOR HEADSTOCK: A. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION ELSEWHERE: B1. MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 4 150 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. CJ DENOTES CONSTRUCTION JOINT. DENOTES RL ON TOP OF CONCRETE.

ELEVATION
¶ OF PIER

FIGURE 22.4
8 300
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

9 600 4 800 4 800

ISSUE

DATE

REVISION

180

1 200

1 200

2 300

95

360 PREP CHECK AUTH SHIRE OF GUNDAGAI

DIA 45 RECESS

¶ OF BEARINGS

A -

CH 27 028.850 - PIER 1 CONTROL LINE CH 27 098.850 - PIER 2 4 150

ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW
MAIN ROAD No 78

¶ OF PIER

BRIDGE OVER MAIN ROAD No 21
AT 4km EAST OF COOLAC PIERS - CONCRETE

1 250

¶ OF BEARINGS

2 500

¶ OF BEARINGS 1 250
PREPARED BY CLIENT SOUTH WEST REGIONAL OFFICE 1 SIMMONS STREET WAGGA WAGGA PO BOX 484 WAGGA WAGGA NSW 2650 PHONE (02) 6938-1111 FACSIMILE (02) 6938-1183

370

370

95
BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055

MORTAR PADS 4 150 BEARING ¶ 2 000 BEARING ¶ 2 000 BEARING ¶ 2 000 BEARING ¶ 2 000 BEARING ¶ 8 300 4 150 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING

CHECKED

REGISTRATION No OF PLANS

0078 246 BC 2468
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER

2479

VIEW

1 -

SECTION

2 MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS

ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No

10

ISSUE

A

CAD No kp2f224.dgn

UPSTREAM

HOLDING DOWN BOLTS DOWNSTREAM CONTROL LINE MCN1 1000

RL 417.120 200 RL 416.802

200

M24 HOLDING DOWN BOLTS SEE SHEET No XX

100

100

PILES

c OF PIER L

ELEVATION SECTION 1 -

CONTROL LINE MCN1 ABUTMENT B SIDE HOLDING DOWN BOLT SPACING 1 ’B’ ’C’ 10 SPACES AT ’D’ APPROX ’B’

¶ OF PIER BEARING 217 38’ 48"

GENERAL NOTES
0 200 400 600 800 1000mm

SCALE 1 CH ’x" ’E’
200 100

OR AS SHOWN

CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40 MPa

HOLDING DOWN BOLT SPACING 10 SPACES AT ’F’ L A

EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. CO-ORDINATES SHOWN ARE ABBREVIATED FOR TRUE EASTING ADD 300 000, AND FOR TRUE NORTHING ADD 6 480 000

ABUTMENT A SIDE

FIGURE 22.5
PLAN
MAIN ROAD No 67 SHIRE OF YASS

BRIDGE OVER WET WATER CREEK
AT 34km WEST OF YASS PIER CONCRETE
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 CLIENT INSERT RELEVANT CLIENT DETAILS HERE

TABLE 1
PIER No 1 2 3 CH ’x’ 58 128.215 58 140.415 58 152.615 EASTING 986.717 979.027 971.682 NORTHING 1 142.952 1 152.424 1 162.165 L 7980 8050 8130 A 1435 1445 1460 B 215 255 295 C 644 659 676 D 636 642 649 E 506 498 489 F 632 636 642 PA’x’ 1 2 3 PA’y’ 4 5 6 PK’x’ 1 2 3 PEZ’x’ 1 2 3

FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055

0067 258 BC 1258
10571
PRELIMINARY

7
CAD No kp2f225.dgn

3

FROM ALBURY 34 910 335 35 000 35 000 34 910

TO CULCAIRN

SPACING OF ANCHOR BOLT GROUPS FOR TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING: 55 SPACES AT 2 530 = 139 150 (TYPICAL BOTH SIDES)

335 ABUTMENT B CH 133.760

ABUTMENT A

END OF S/S

¶ PIER 2

1 CH 26km 993.940 SPAN 1

SPAN 2 CH 27km 028.850

SPAN 3 CH 063.850

¶ PIER 3

¶ PIER 1

SPAN 4 CH 098.850

CONTROL LINE

BEARING 339%%d 00’ 00.0"

ONLY SHOW km VALUE WHERE THE 1 CHANGE FROM ONE km VALUE TO THE NEXT OCCURS WITHIN THE STRUCTURE

2 -

2 -

PLAN
0 2 4 6 8 10m 2 1

3 -

¶ OF PIER 2

10 200 600 4 500 4 500 600

1 430 40 GAP

1 430

115

CONTROL LINE

115 TOP OF PARAPET

3 75 THICK ASPHALT AND WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 1 2
200

3

2

3%
1 145

3%
A 30 GAP 30 GAP

70 THICK ’TRANSFLOOR’ TYP 25 TYP 35 PERMANENT FORM WORK PANEL (TYP)

90 TYP 25 30 HAUNCH ON TYP GIRDER ¶ (TYP) TYP 35

250

250 CONTACT SURFACES SHALL BE SEALED WITH HIGH DENSITY EXPANDED POLYURETHANE FOAM (WITH A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 400kPa) COMPLYING WITH ASTM D-1621 OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 FORMED RECESSES APPROX 80 70 PROJECTION DEEP TO PERMIT ADJUSTMENT OF RAILING POST. RECESSES SHALL BE FILLED WITH CEMENT GROUT OR MORTAR AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF RAILING 5 125 35 95 600 325 140 115 3 -

VIEW

2 -

0

500

1000

1500mm

500

250

SECTION

1
435

FIGURE 22.6
ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH
THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

680
0 500 1000 1500mm

340

20 MIN

GAP 890

ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW
180 NCF 315 155 1 145 MAIN ROAD No 78 CITY OF ALBURY

500

250

BRIDGE OVER MAIN SOUTHERN RAILWAY AT 27.5km NORTH OF ALBURY

GENERAL NOTES
SCALES AS SHOWN. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: A 255 MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 40 MPa. EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. S/S DENOTES BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE. CONCRETE IN CROSS GIRDERS AT PIERS AND ABUTMENTS SHALL BE PLACED AFTER 26 250 PREPARED M30 TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING ANCHOR BOLTS SEE SHEET No XX CJ

DECK - SHEET A
PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CLIENT INSERT RELEVANT CLIENT DETAILS HERE

CHECKED

REGISTRATION No OF PLANS

SECTION

3 -

PLACEMENT OF BRACING AND PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF DECK FORMWORK. SEE SHEET No ?? FOR REDUCED LEVELS AT POINTS 1-3. DENOTES VALUE AT SUPPORT AND VARIES ELSEWHERE DUE TO VERTICAL CURVE
1500mm 250 125

DETAIL

A -

DESIGN DRAWING
500 750mm

0078 202 BC 2468
RTA BRIDGE NUMBER

END OF S/S

2479

0

500

1000

0

250

ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANAGER, BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS

500

250

SHEET No

16

ISSUE

A

CAD No kp2f226.dgn

SECTION 23

STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING

and the location of formed holes shall also be checked to ensure interference is minimised. pile to pilecap and footing to column. the first bars placed will be in the cross girders or diaphragms as these bars must be placed before the main slab reinforcement. dowels. 23. Numbering shall start at D1 2 The location of reinforcing bars in relation to each other. Plans and Views of bridge components shall be treated as being transparent with the applicable reinforcement details being added. .1 (A) and 3. shall be identified OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 March 2010) Page 1 of 3 . the numbering of reinforcement. where the bar that is placed closest to the bottom face and placed first. eg 1 In a pier spread footing. P3 etc In bridge decks where cross girders and/or diaphragms are used.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Steel Reinforcement Detailing 23 23. a “Z” suffix shall be added to the bar shape code with the first non-standard shape being “AZ”. Where the location of the cast-in item is critical.g.2 BAR AND FABRIC DETAILING The detailing of reinforcement shall be in accordance with the Authority's Manual "Steel Reinforcement Detailing" (Appendix A to this Section). Variations within a particular non-standard bar shape. should be closely examined to ensure that bars may be easily placed and that concrete compaction in that area can be achieved.1 LAYOUT STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING The layout of a reinforcement drawing shall be in accordance with the principles outlined in Section 22 of this Manual. Irrespective of bar shape. Where interference is of a minor nature only and is not critical e. anchor bolts etc." Australian Standard bar shapes. as shown in Tables 3.1(B) of AS 1100 Part 501. bars may be adjusted slightly where necessary to clear formed holes and dowels. whether bars or fabric. Elevations. a suitable note to be added to the drawing would be. shall be numbered P1 with the next bar being placed being numbered P2.e. . Bar marking shall be in accordance with Clauses 2 and 3 of Appendix A to this section. particularly in connection details such as column to headstock. The prefix 'Sectional' shall not be used with any sub-title. The location of cast-in metal work i. ie same general shape with different leg lengths. . reinforcement shall be detailed to suit the particular application. . See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB031. Where the shape of a particular bar does not conform to the “Standard” bar shapes as shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB031. shall be in sequential order of bar placement and shall proceed from the bottom to the top of the element under consideration wherever possible and/or practical. the placing of shear reinforcement. "the spacing of . have been adopted for use along with bar shapes that are commonly used by RTA Bridge Engineering.

Where non-standard bars require fitment bends and hooks. the lapped portions of bars shall be in contact. The development length of a bar in compression must be straight.3 Development lengths for a bar in compression Development lengths for Grade D500N bars in compression. Clause 13.3. Any subsequent non-standard bar shapes shall be numbered 'BZ'.5. contain deemed-to-comply development lengths for Grade D500N bars to develop the full yield strength of the bar including the conditions for their use.3 23. 23. Section 13. the splice lengths will need to be calculated separately. (ii) Bars in a splice shall provide minimum clear spacing of 1.4. with the exception of bars in a horizontal position with more than 300 mm of concrete cast below the bar.5 times the diameter of the bar. eg “AZ1”. 'CZ' etc. 1. “AZ2”. 23.1 General (i) Where lapped splices are used. are given in Table 3 of Appendix A to this section. Table 1 contains development lengths of bars in general position. 23. 23.1.4. Tables 1 and 2 in Appendix A to this section. 23. which leaves an approximate clear spacing between the bars of 120mm and in most cases. this and any other special features of any non-standard bars shall be specified in the Bar Shapes Diagram.5. A bend or a standard hook are not considered effective in developing stress in reinforcement in compression.2 OTB005 Lapped splices for bars in tension Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 March 2010) Page 2 of 3 .3.c. Lsy. For information not covered by this Clause refer to AS 5100.1 DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS General This Clause provides information on development and lap lengths in common situations.5 times the maximum nominal size of the aggregate or 40 mm between adjacent parallel bars. As a general rule.3.3.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Steel Reinforcement Detailing by the use of the next available numerical suffix within that particular bar shape.4 Splicing of reinforcement.3. Development lengths for these bars are given in Table 2.3. and all nonstandard shapes shall be clearly defined in the "BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM" so that bending to the correct size and shape can be achieved. 23.2 Development lengths for a bar in tension Formulae for calculation of development lengths of bars in tension are provided in AS 5100. the centre to centre spacing of reinforcement in deck slabs is 150mm.

3 Lsy.3 Lapped splices for bars in compression For formulae for the length of splices for bars in compression refer to AS 5100.5. Where bars are spliced at points of maximum stress and it is not possible to stagger the splices. “Unless shown otherwise on the drawings. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (05 March 2010) Page 3 of 3 .3.3. be not less than values given in Table 3 of Appendix A to this section. 23.5. Lsy.t. Tensile reinforcement shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress and not more than 50% of the total area of tensile reinforcement shall be spliced in any section.4.2 above. Clause 13.2. for most applications.5.t . The following note shall be placed in the General Notes on relevant sheets where reinforcement is detailed. In cases where the ratio of cross-sectional area of ties. the lap length shall be not less than 1. the designer may need to be consulted.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Steel Reinforcement Detailing The lap splice length of bars in tension shall be not less than the development length.8 times the value provided in Table 3 may be applicable. Lap splice lengths for Grade D500N bars in compression shall. specified in Clause 23. a reduced lap length of 0. laps on adjacent bars on any face shall be staggered (offset) by no less than the lap length”.5 (b) and (c) of AS 5100. For identification of bars in compression.2. fitments or helixes to the main compression reinforcement exceeds the limits specified in Clauses 13.

Revision 1 (05 March 2010) .STEEL REINFORCEMENT DETAILING APPENDIX A Issue 1 .RTA STRUCTURAL DRAFTING AND DETAILING MANUAL SECTION 23 .

.........................................................................................CONTENTS CLAUSE No TOPIC PAGE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 22 INTRODUCTION..... DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR IN TENSION..... 38 38 38 37 .............................................. LAPPED SPLICE LENGTH FOR A BAR IN COMPRESSION.................................................. 1 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT..................... TABLE 4 .... LAPPED SPLICES FOR REINFORCING MESH IN TENSION................... DETAILING LARGE AREAS OF REINFORCEMENT................... DEVELOPMENT LENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT............ ARRANGEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT....................... 2 6 7 5 8 NUMBER OF BARS IN A SET................................ BASIC PRINCIPLES..... SINGLE BARS OR SETS OF A SMALL NUMBER OF BARS........ 12 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT....... TABLE 2 ......... SPACING OF BARS..................................................... CONCRETE DETAILING...............DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR BARS IN TENSION ......TOP BARS....... NOMENCLATURE........................................................................................GENERAL BARS......................................................................DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR BARS IN COMPRESSION........................................................................ REINFORCING FABRIC.......................................................... 15 16 19 20 23 27 29 30 30 31 31 33 34 35 36 36 TABLE 1 ..................... LAPS IN REINFORCEMENT........................................................ LAYERS OF REINFORCEMENT.........................DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR BARS IN TENSION ................BAR MASSES............. SIZE AND GRADE OF REINFORCING BAR................................ DETAILING REINFORCEMENT IN SECTIONS............ LINE WEIGHTS.............. ACTUAL COVER TO LAPPED REINFORCEMENT...... TABLE 3 ....................... CLEAR SPACING AT LAPS..............................................................................

-1- 1 INTRODUCTION Generally. The layout of a reinforcement drawing should follow the procedure set out in Section 22 of the RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual.Part 5: Structural Drafting. The word "Sectional" shall not be used in any title or sub-title. . Sub-titles shall be ELEVATION. this document has been prepared to conform to the requirements of AS/NZS 1101. VIEW and PLAN.Structural Engineering Drawing and Austroads Guide to Bridge Technology . Steel reinforcement should be generally detailed as set out in this document and in accordance with the requirements of AS 5100-Bridge Design. The elevations. views and plans should be treated as "transparent" and the reinforcement added.501 .

DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT A typical example of describing a set of reinforcing bars is:Bar mark A2 14-N16-S-300EF Information for placing Spacing of bars along limit line in millimetres Bar shape code Bar size in millimetres Bar structural properties (default grade is D500N) Number of bars in the set Bar number in sequence Structure element denotation Note: 1. Grade 250N) A8 14-W10-SP-300 (for plain round reinforcing wire. the standard bar shapes as shown on 3. grade 500 steel. the size of bar should be prefixed by a grade designation D250N for Grade 250 deformed reinforcing bar. "B" to Abutment B. "A" could refer to Abutment A. 4. normal ductility) is required.-2- 2. shall be used. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB031. it should be indicated as follows: A8 14-D250N12-S-300 Other examples include: A8 14-R12-S-300 (for plain round reinforcing bar. 2. normal ductility R for plain round reinforcing bar. Grade 500L) . Where possible. For example. Grade 500L Where a Grade 250 deformed reinforcing bar with normal ductility is required. A letter should prefix the bar sequence number to aid in detailing bars in various elements of a bridge.2 of the RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual. Where a standard bar shape does not suit the application. "P" to piers and "D" to the deck steel. Grade R250N W for round reinforcing bar. Where a grade of steel other than D500N (deformed bars. The annotation "mm" is NOT used. There are NO full stops. 5. a non-standard bar shape shall be created in accordance with Clause 23.

-3- 3 NOMENCLATURE To facilitate use of the method of detailing given in this Manual.¶ of BAR or ¶ of a BUNDLE OF BARS 4 Detail line 5 Circle at junction of the typical bar and the limit line 6 Starting dimension to limit bar. the nomenclature given in Figure 3a shall be used. Starting and closing dimensions are necessary when using "EQUAL SPACES" and an approximate dimension for the equal spaces shall be shown. 6 50 45 3 2 5 D2 10-N12-S-300 45 1 3 4 D1 10-N12-S-300 FIGURE 3a 1 Typical bar 2 Limit line 3 Limit bar . Closing dimension is not given. . except where non-nominal cover is required.

5mm TYPICAL-SINGLE BAR OR GROUP 0.25mm 5mm Use 4mm diameter circle (at Scale 1:1) for bundles of bars. D1 16-N12-L-300EF FIGURE 4a .7mm CIRCLE 3mm DIAMETER 7mm (PREFERRED) 0.3mm or 0.5mm LIMIT BAR 0.-4- 4. CONCRETE OUTLINE 0.7mm FOR FOR 2 OR MORE BARS IN A BUNDLE 0. LINE WEIGHTS To obtain uniformity in detailing of reinforcement on drawings the line thicknesses shown in Figure 4a shall be used.

or TYPICAL GROUP of any SET of bars is drawn. the set of bars shown in Figure 5a would be detailed as shown in Figure 5b. For example.-5- 5 BASIC PRINCIPLES The basic principle of detailing reinforcement is that only ONE TYPICAL BAR. D1 13 SPACES AT 300 60 DECK SLAB ASSUMED FIGURE 5a 60 D1 14-N12-S-300 FIGURE 5b .

However. in Figure 5d the bar marking is written directly on the typical bar.-6Figures 5c and 5d show alternative methods for designating the reinforcement. these methods of detailing should only be considered where overcrowding of the detail would not occur. In Figure 5c the bar marking is written on an extension of the limit line. D1 13-N12-S-100EF 50 100 60 D3 12-N12-L-100 DECK SLAB ASSUMED D2 12-N12-S-100EF FIGURE 5b 60 D1 13-12-S-100EF D3 12-N12-L-100 50 100 D2 12-N12-S-100EF FIGURE 5C . the preferred method is that which is shown in Figure 5b.

-760 D3 13-N12-S-100 D2 12-N12-L-100 50 100 D1 12-N12-S-100EF FIGURE 5D A5 5-N12-S-100EF 100 A4 12-N12-L-100 100 50 60 A1 5-N12-S-100EF A3 8-N12-S-100EF A2 7-N12-S-100EF DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR FIGURE 5e .

A1 2-N16-L-200 OR OR A1 2-N16-L-200 A1 2-N16-L-200 May be used when bars are too close to enclose FIGURE 6b arrowhead .-8- 6. SINGLE BARS OR SETS OF A SMALL NUMBER OF BARS Where single bars occur they shall detailed as shown in Figure 6a. A1 1-N12-V FIGURE 6a Where a set of a small number of bars occur and space is limited they may be detailed using the most suitable alternative method as shown in Figure 6b.

OR b) bars are at an irregular spacing. Figure 6c shows an example.-9- NOTE: It may be necessary in some instances to detail all the bars for various reasons. 1 70 1 - 100 A25 1-N12-LL 150 A25 1-N12-LL 80 A24 4-N12-T DETAIL A - Number of bars should be shown = = = A25 = Bar mark shown only A24 VIEW 1 - FIGURE 6c . eg:a) to ensure that they can be fitted in.

-10When showing bars in elevation do not show bars in section. 1 - P2 P1 NC I P1 1 - RR O CT E P2 ELEVATION FIGURE 6d VIEW 1 - 1 - PIER ASSUMED P2 P1 70 70 9 BUNDLES OF P1 2-N28-LL-200 (Indicating 9 bundles of 2 bars) 1 - 5 BUNDLES OF P2 2-N28-LL-200 (Indicating 5 bundles of 2 bars) ELEVATION VIEW 1 - FIGURE 6e CORRECT METHOD PIER ASSUMED . Figure 6e shows the correct method to use. Figure 6d shows ’LL’ bars as in section but this is not how they appear in elevation.

A1 16-N16-S-200 A1 1-16-S ALTERNATIVE 1 (Preferred) A1 17-N16-S-200 APPROX DIMENSION REQUIRED IF ALTERNATIVE 2 COVER IS NOT NOMINAL FIGURE 6f .-11The term "equal spaces" shall only be used when the spacing of several (say. then one of the alternatives shown in Figure 6f shall be adopted. Where the spacing of numerous bars. 7 bars) is to be indicated. (say. more than 7) needs to be shown and the overall dimension between the limit bars divided by the number of spaces gives a value not ending in 0 or 5.

Ideally. NUMBER OF BARS IN A SET The number of bars in a set of bars (as shown in Clause 5) is detailed as:Bar mark number of bars-bar type bar size-bar shape-spacing eg A1 14-N12-HT-200 The number of bars for any set of bars. The remaining views and sections should only be used to show the bar marks and the arrangement of the bars. 7b. When reference is made to the bar in any other view or section. Typical examples are shown in Figures 7a. the total number of bars should be called up in one or two main views. as well as the complete bar description shall be shown once and ONCE ONLY on the drawing.-12- 7. A2 1-N12-L-150 (a set of bundles of bars) FIGURE 7a . 7c and 7d. preferably in plan or elevation. (a) A set of bars A1 14-N12-V-150 (a set of single bars) OR 14 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N12-V-150. only the bar mark shall be shown.

Figure 7c shows a bundle of bars in section. In this case one or two lines are sufficient to represent the bundle. column. 14 BUNDLES OF A1 2-N12-HT-200 14 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N12-HT-200.5mm may be used for the typical bars (but not the limit bar). Figure 7d shows the set of the same bundles of bars in elevation. BUNDLE OF BARS A2 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 SET OF BARS FIGURE 7c: SECTION FIGURE 7d: ELEVATION . A2 1-N12-K-200 FIGURE 7b Note: Where bars are drawn in a bundle a line of thickness of 0. Not all the bars need to be shown where the number within a bundle exceeds a practical pictorial representation.-13- (b) Bundles of bars When two or more bars are placed side by side (eg fitments in a parapet. etc) they shall be called up in bundles and shown by two lines. Figure 7e shows the correct representation of the bars in elevation.

Allowing for scaling eg Scale 1:20 allow 30mm between bars.-14Allow 1.5mm between bars for clarity. A2 2-N16-A-200 4mm CIRCLE FIGURE 7e: CORRECT METHOD 10 BUNDLES OF A2 2-N16-A-200 A1 10-N16-HT-200 FIGURE 7f: ALTERNATIVE METHOD Where there are several sets of bars or bundles of bars in a small area they are detailed as:- 4 SETS OF 6 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N16-HT-200. 10 BUNDLES OF A1 1-N16-HT-200. A2 2-N16-A-200 FIGURE 7g .

USE WHERE PREFERRED METHOD IS NOT CONVENIENT FIGURE 8a . COVER 65 PREFERRED 65 COVER ALTERNATIVE. where such detailing is necessary.-15- 8 COVER TO REINFORCEMENT Drawings on which reinforcement is detailed shall contain a note which states the required cover to the reinforcement. Where there is a suite of drawings to depict an element within a set of drawings. the note shall be provided on one sheet only." Figure 8a shows the method of detailing cover on the drawings. Example:"Nominal cover to reinforcement nearest to the concrete surface shall be 50mm. unless specified otherwise.

5mm BETWEEN 600 BARS FOR CLARITY FIGURE 9a: First preference A straight line at 600 30 to the bar FIGURE 9b: Alternative method The length of lap should only appear on the drawing. as shown in Figures 8a and 8b. LAPS IN REINFORCEMENT Straight laps in reinforcement are detailed as shown in Figures 9a and 9b. if not covered in the General Notes.-16- 9. . ALLOW 1.

3 of the RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual . MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BAR D1 FIGURE 9c: Incorrect method MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BAR D1 FIGURE 9d: Correct method b) Where specific location of laps is required.-17Laps need not be shown unless they are required in a specific location. In this case different bar marks should be shown. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BAR D1 GIVE DIMENSION D2 FIGURE 9e OR MAXIMUM LENGTH OF BAR D1 (’x’ LONG) D2 FIGURE 9f: Preferred As shown in Clause 18. a) When lap location does not matter.

.... . . .1) . 10 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR. THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LAP LENGTHS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: BAR SIZE (mm): a)HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: b) OTHER BARS: .. . the required lap length shall be shown ( the lap length being that required for the smaller sized bar ).. Where laps in longitudinal bars are not detailed eg in deck slabs... UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED...5-Clause 13. . GIVE VALUES AS APPLICABLE (See AS 5100...-18- c) Where bars of different diameter lap... ... .. the following notes shall appear in the General Notes. ... SHOW LAP LENGTH GIVE DIMENSION FIGURE 9f Lap lengths for various size bars that are lapped on a drawing should be shown in General Notes. ... ..... ...... . . 2 and 3 on pages 37 and 38... Acceptable minimum lap lengths are set out in Tables 1. . . LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS... .. ..

COVER WHICH IS OTHER THAN NOMINAL MUST BE SHOWN 840 DEVELOPMENT LENGTH P1 10-N28-S SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 1 - FIGURE 10a .-19- 10 DEVELOPMENT LENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT The development length of reinforcement for any bars which are anchored in concrete (as distinct from laps) shall be indicated on the drawings only if different from that shown in the table. Acceptable minimum development and lap lengths are set out in Tables 1. 2 and 3 on pages 37 and 38 of this document.

(a) When all bars in section are of the same mark FITMENT HOOKS SHALL BE SHOWN CORRECTLY TO SCALE . Bars should be approximately in proportion with the scale of drawings. . are indicated by a circle when designating the bar mark.-20- 11.THIS WILL ENSURE THEY FIT (REFER TO RTAB031) 3 EQUAL SPACES P2 SHADED CIRCLE SHALL BE 2mm DIAMETER WHEN PRINTED ON A1 SIZE SHEET 3 EQUAL SPACES P1 FITMENT BENDS SHALL BE DRAWN TO SCALE FIGURE 11a Arrows indicate the limits of P2 bars in the section Note: Sufficient dimensions for the spacing of the reinforcement are necessary in this section to permit dimensions of fitments to be calculated. (ii) Fitments and other bars shown as a line in section. etc. Dimensions are necessary where bars would foul dowel locations or recesses. The following is to be noted:- (i) Bars in section (shown as filled in circles) are indicated by arrows when designating the bar mark. DETAILING REINFORCEMENT IN SECTIONS Examples of reinforced concrete members are given in Figures 11a 11b and 11c.

3 EQUAL SPACES . Showing the number of equal spaces is optional.-21- (b) More than one bar mark in a section P4 P3 P3 P1 P2 3 EQUAL SPACES FIGURE 11b This method may be used where there are only one or two bars of the same mark.

-22- A9 A10 3 EQUAL SPACES A8 A7 A5 A6 FIGURE 11c .

in the General Notes. as in the faces of deck slabs or walls. A1 12-N16-S-100FF A2 11-N12-S-150EF 1 - 1 - PLAN FIGURE 12a Note: In Figure 12a the number of bars shown in the notation "A2 11-N12-S-150EF" applies to each face. the abbreviations used to denote reinforcement placement information shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 1100.Table 3.501 . Therefore. A2 A3 A1 IN SLABS AND WALLS CHECK SECTION 1 - TO ENSURE THE CLEAR DISTANCE IS AT LEAST THAT REQUIRED IN AS 5100-BRIDGE DESIGN A3 12-N12-S-100NF. as they are included in Australian Standard terminology. .2. LAYERS OF REINFORCEMENT Where layers of reinforcement are to be detailed. It is not necessary to explain the denotations NF etc. the total number of A2 bars is 22. An example of usage is given in Figure 12a.-23- 12.

the upper bars cannot be placed directly over corresponding lower bars. In this case it is generally sufficient to show one typical bar to cover both upper and lower bars. D3 12-N16-S-100FF DIMENSION SHOULD ALLOW FOR COVER PLUS ONE BAR DIAMETER 1 D1 11-N12-LL-200FF. D2 11-N16-LL-200NF 1 - PLAN FIGURE 12b . D4 D1 AND D2 D3 VIEW 1 - D4 12-N12-S-100NF. This being due to side legs lapping. as shown in Figure 12b.-24- Where bars such as ’LL’ bars are to be placed at near and far faces at equivalent spacing.

Figure 12c shows the detailing of bars of different length or shape. D2 D1 SECTION 1 - D2 10-N16-L-100NF 1 - 1 - D1 10-N20-S-100FF PLAN FIGURE 12c .-25- If bars on the near face and the far face are of different length or shape. then it is necessary to detail each layer separately.

In this case layers shall be numbered as shown in Figure 12d. FF2 PLAN FIGURE 12d . FF2 1 - 1 - P2 11-N28-S-150NF1. P3 P1 P2 NF1 NF2 NF3 P4 FF2 FF1 P2 P4 SECTION 1 - P1 19-N28-S-150NF1. eg deep pile caps. FF1 P4 6-N24-S-300NF2. NF3. FF1 P3 10-N24-SP-300NF2. NF3.-26Sometimes it may be necessary to detail more layers of reinforcement than those on near face and far faces.

5 times the diameter and the clear distance shall be not less than 1. see Figure 13a.4-2. h DEFORMED BAR HEIGHT RANGE (h) OF DEFORMATIONS BAR SIZE 10 12 16 20 24 HEIGHT 0.8-1. .5 times the size of the aggregate. Considerable thought should be given to:a) Ease of placing bars b) Ensuring that bars can fit where they are supposed to be placed. Minimum spacing centre to centre of parallel bars shall be 2.6-1.6-3.4 BAR SIZE 28 32 36 40 HEIGHT 1.) c) Fitment type bars have a thickness of 2 diameters where ends overlap at hooks. Concrete pump hoses require an access of 125mm x 125mm.0 FIGURE 13a .8-3.0-2. (Large scale details may be of assistance.5-1. however 200mm x 200mm is desirable to accommodate other discharge tubes etc.5.0 0. These access holes should be spaced at no more than 1500mm centres.0-4.8 1.Deformed bars e) Providing sufficient access between bars to place and vibrate concrete .2 0.-2713 SPACING OF BARS Spacing of bars shall be as required by AS 5100.0 1.ESPECIALLY WHERE BARS ARE LAPPED. Vibrator access of 60mm x 60mm at 750mm centres should be provided. Preferably these access holes should continue to the soffit.6 2.2-2.6 1. Maximum spacing of temperature and shrinkage reinforcement shall be 200mm for ·12 bars and 300mm for ·16 bars.2 1. d) The deformations on deformed bars.

check that bars clear these items. j) Where closely spaced bars need to be spliced. i) In post-tensioned work special attention should be paid to bars in end-block areas. See Figure 13b. or formed recesses are incorporated.Types of bar splices . should be checked to ensure no clashes take place. g) The arrangement of bars at connections such as piles to pile-caps. DOUBLE SPLICE CRANKED BAR FIGURE 13b . eg bolts and dowels. columns to headstocks etc. Every effort should be made to ensure bars fit without clashing and sufficient room is allowed for placing and vibrating concrete. h) Where cast-in items. thought should be given to cranking bars or double splicing so continuing bars shall have the same location.-28f) The location of starter bars in columns should be clearly defined to facilitate lapping with main vertical reinforcement.

The reference numbers and other details of the fabric are given in AS/NZS 4671.-29- 14. FIGURE 14b . (a) Rectangular or square shaped fabric Indicates the direction of reinforcement nearest to the concrete surface Direction of main reinforcement D12 1-R500RL718-F-FF Wire type and strength grade Reference number for mesh D15 1-R500SL102-F-FF FIGURE 14a (b) Trapezoidal shaped fabric Shape code for fabric D10 1-R500RL718-CZ-FF Non standard shape Note: Show cross section of the fabric for non-symmetrical shapes in the Bar Shapes Diagram. REINFORCING FABRIC Reinforcing fabric is detailed as shown in Figures 14a and 14b.

This is done in order to present a pictorial view of the reinforcement. c) The use of match lines. Where a drawing necessitates more break lines. Larger areas are drawn in full but are split into more than one part. two or three). Although the drawing is ’not to scale’. thought should be given to keeping the drawing in reasonable proportion to actual dimensions. consideration should be given as outlined in Option ’c’. 2 2 1 1 a) 1 2 b) < 1 2 FIGURE 15a . LAPPED SPLICES FOR REINFORCING FABRIC IN TENSION A lapped splice for reinforcing fabric in tension shall be made so that the two outermost transverse bars of one sheet of fabric overlap the two outermost transverse bars of the sheet being lapped as shown in Figure 15a. .LAPPED SPLICES FOR REINFORCING FABRIC 16. there are several options which can be considered:- a) The drawing may be drawn not to scale.-30- 15. DETAILING LARGE AREAS OF REINFORCEMENT When detailing large areas of reinforcement and it is impractical to show the plan and/or elevation in full (eg continuous decks). These should be kept to a minimum (say. b) The drawing may be drawn to scale but with break lines.

18. it is preferable to show concrete dimensions on a separate view to that showing the reinforcement detail. A little thought in detailing the reinforcement will ensure a clear picture of the layout of the bars. Reinforcement shall be numbered from the ‘bottom’ up in sequential order of placement ie the first bar placed.-31- 17. CONCRETE DETAILING In more complex reinforced concrete elements such as abutments. . On simple details the concrete dimensions and reinforcement details can be shown on the same view. Figure 17a shows an example of a badly detailed section. irrespective of shape. Figure 17b shows the same section redetailed in a more orderly fashion. shall be P1 with the next bar placed being P2 etc. ARRANGEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT The clear arrangement of reinforcement in a view or section is important.

-32- A18 A20 A21 VARIABLE LAP 350 min CONSTRUCTION JOINT A17 A19 A16 A12 A12 A15 A14 A13 NOT ACCEPTABLE FIGURE 17a A20 A21 A17 CJ A18 A19 A16 A15 A14 A12 A13 ACCEPTABLE FIGURE 17b .

Such bars are commonly referred to as hard drawn wire. 10. Grade R250N plain reinforcing bars are available in 6 metre lengths only. 32. 28. 24. 24. 16.2 Stocking of Reinforcing Bars The lengths of Grade D500N deformed reinforcement bars normally stocked by suppliers in Australia are shown in the table below. 36 and 40mm diameter Plain round bars:. 28. 12. BAR SIZE (mm) Grade D500N 10 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 6 9 LENGTH (m) 10 12 15 18 .10. 20.6. The standard bar sizes are: Deformed bars:. 19.1 Reinforcing Bar Reinforcing bars are available as either deformed ribbed (D). 16.-3319 SIZE AND GRADE OF REINFORCING BAR 19. deformed Indented (I) or plain round bars (R) to AS/NZS 4671. 32 and 36 mm diameter Small diameter bars. 20. may be hard drawn into bars of smaller diameter for use in the manufacture of reinforcing mesh. both deformed ribbed and plain round. 12.

-34-

20

CLEAR SPACING AT LAPS

Where laps in reinforcement are staggered, the clear spacing used in calculations for required lap lengths shall be "S" as shown in Figure 20a.

"S" = Clear Spacing CJ

FIGURE 20a

Where laps in reinforcement are not staggered, the clear spacing used in calculations for required lap lengths shall be "S" as shown in Figure 20b.

"S" = Clear Spacing CJ

FIGURE 20b

-35-

21

ACTUAL COVER TO LAPPED REINFORCEMENT

The figues given in Table 1 on Page 37 are based on the minimum cover to the bar or fitment. For calculation purposes, the actual cover to the bar being lapped, as shown in Figure 20a, shall be used.

65 NOMINAL COVER

ACTUAL COVER TO LAPPED BAR
THE MINIMUM COVER EQUALS THE NOMINAL COVER MINUS A FIXING TOLERANCE OF -5mm

FIGURE 21.a

-36-

22

DEVELOPMENT LENGTH FOR A BAR IN TENSION

The development length (L sy.t ), to develop the yield strength (f ) of a sy deformed bar in tension shall be calculated as follows:

L k F sy.t = k 7 8 sy A b (2a + d ) b f’ c

Where

k = 1.25 for a horizontal bar with more than 300mm of concrete 7 cast below the bar

= 1.0 for all other bars

k = 1.7 for bars in slabs and walls if the clear distance 8 between adjacent parallel bars developing stress is not less than 150mm

= 2.2 for longitudinal bars in beams and columns with fitments

= 2.4 for any other longitudinal bar

A = cross-sectional area of the reinforcing bar

2a = twice the minimum cover to the deformed bar or the clear distance between adjacent parallel bars developing stress, whichever is less. Minimum cover is nominal cover minus a fixing tolerance of 5mm. L d sy.t shall not be less than 25k 7 b

23

LAPPED SPLICE LENGTH FOR A BAR IN COMPRESSION

The minimum length of a lapped splice for deformed bars in compression (L sy.c) shall be calculated as follows:

L sy sy.c = (0.125f -22)dbfor f sygreater than 400MPa but L sy.c shall not be less than 300mm

-37-

TABLE 1 TENSILE DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS (L sy.t ) FOR DEFORMED BARS - GRADE 500N - GENERAL BARS
Combination of Minimum Values

L (mm) Bar Size 10 12
300

F’c MPa
40 50 40 50 32 40 50 25 32 40 50 40 50

Nominal cover to nearest bar or fitment (mm) 55 50, 70 45 45 45 40 35 35 30, 35 25, 30 25 25 25 300 400 650 250 300 550 250 300 400 250 400

16

20
500

24
600

28
750

32
950

36
1150

40
1400

250

300

400

500

650

850

1100

1300

1600

550

750

950

1200

1500

1750

800

950

1250

1600

NR

NR

900

1200

1500

NR

NR

NR

NR Denotes not recommended Values above the double line are governed by sy.t L is greater than or equal to 25d b

Intermediate values of L sy.t shall not be interpolated

The development length L sy.t given in Tables 1 and 2 shall be deemed to comply with Clause 13.1.2.1 of AS 5100.5 provided that the following conditions are met:

(i)

In slabs and walls, the clear distance between adjacent parallel bars developing stress shall not be less than 150 mm.

(ii)

For beams and columns, fitments are provided and the clear distance between bars shall not be less than twice the nominal cover.

(iii)

The minimum bar size for fitments shall be 6 mm for bars and 10 mm for bars 20 mm.

20 mm

(iv)

Allowances, such as for casting against ground, shall not be included in the nominal cover for the purpose of determination of development lengths.

-38-

TABLE 2 TENSILE DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS (Lsy.t ) FOR DEFORMED BARS - GRADE 500N - TOP BARS
Combination of Minimum Values

L (mm) Bar Size 10 12
400

F’c MPa
40 50 40 50 32 40 50 25 32 40 50 40 50

Nominal cover to nearest bar or fitment (mm) 55 50, 70 45 45 45 40 35 35 30, 35 25, 30 25 25 25 400 500 850 350 400 650 350 400 500 350 500

16

20
650

24
750

28
950

32
1150

36
1450

40
1750

350

400

500

650

800

1050

1350

1650

2000

700

900

1200

1500

1850

2200

950

1200

600

2000

NR

NR

1200

1550

1950

NR

NR

NR

NR Denotes not recommended Values above the double line are governed by L 1.25 x 25 d

b

Intermediate values of L sy.t shall not be interpolated

Where a bar ends with a standard hook or cog complying with Clause 13.1.2.6 of AS5100.5, the development length at that end of the bar measured from the outside of the hook or cog shall be taken as 0.5 L sy.t .

TABLE 3 DEVELOPMENT AND LAP LENGTHS FOR GRADE D500N BARS IN COMPRESSION
L (mm) BAR SIZE 12 DEVELOPMENT LENGTH (20db ) LAP LENGTH 240 500 16 320 650 20 400 850 24 480 1000 28 560 1150 32 640 1300 36 720 1500 40 800 1650

83 32 6.99 40 9.47 24 3.617 12 0.58 20 2.888 16 1.86 .55 28 4.31 36 7.-39- TABLE 4 BAR MASSES BAR SIZE (mm) MASS (kg/m) 10 0.

SECTION 24 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE .

1 PRE-TENSIONED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PSC Planks In simple cases. 24.Appendix H. 24. no "STANDARD" drawing for a particular span exists.2.. is required. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 for typical 'GENERAL NOTES' for prestressed concrete. This would include variations for skew angles and reduced span lengths. The method of detailing Precast Prestressed Concrete I-Girders shall be as shown in Figures 24..RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Prestressed Concrete 24 24. such as the inclusion of cast-in items must be carefully considered with respect to strand and/or void locations.2. any modifications to the drawings.2(b). the drawing is not considered to be an RTA "Standard Drawing" and must be signed by the designer. such as in PSC plank deck designs. The details which are shown on Drawing Number RTAB033 shall be adhered to. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 3 . If the "Standard Drawing" is used on the basis of a one-off design where the span exceeds the standard span and/or the prestress is altered in any way. If the "Standard Drawing" is altered or added to in any way. Where RTA Standard Bridge Drawings are used for "non-standard" applications. . except for title block information. no additional detailing of tendons etc. the text adjacent to the title block shall be amended to read "MODIFIED RTA DRAWING No. drawing practice for the detailing of prestressed concrete items shall be in accordance with the principles outlined in this Manual. as RTA Standard Bridge Drawings No RTAB060 to RTAB072 inclusive are sufficiently detailed for standard applications. Standard cross Sections of Precast Prestressed Concrete I-Girders shall conform to details as shown in AS5100 – Bridge Design.2(a) and 24.".2 24. drafter and the checkers of the design and drafting. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB033 details the adopted standard cross Sections for SUPER-T Girders. Typical details (such as strand and reinforcement layout) for Super-T Girders shall be in accordance with details shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawings RTAB033A to RTAB033F inclusive. further information relevant to prestressed concrete shall be shown on the drawings and this will include specifying tendon requirements as well as the detailing of appropriate anchorages.2..1 GENERAL PRESTRESSED CONCRETE In general.2.2 Precast Prestressed Concrete Girders As Precast Prestressed Concrete Girders are individually designed for span requirements. In addition to general details. Section 5 .

When detailing post-tensioned prestressed concrete.e. Comprehensive detailing in both Plan and Elevation/Section shall be provided to ensure correct placement can be achieved and that required clearances for anchorages are maintained. Sufficient space allowed for use of tendon jacks.e. SHARP BENDS SHALL BE AVOIDED.2 Tendon Profiles Tendon profiles shall be sufficiently detailed to enable correct stressing duct placement and careful attention must be given to minimum bend radii recommendations from posttensioning manufacturers i.3. for the designer not to specify one single point where the strands may be deflected but a length range where the deflection is possible. Bridges are generally detailed for a typical "size" strand prestressing system and any variation to the details as shown shall be covered by an appropriate "PRESTRESSING SYSTEM" note.3. 24. 24.3.3. That deflected strands are not fouled by elements cast into the member i.3.3 OTB005 Ducts Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 3 .3. Various prestressed concrete girder manufacturers have different casting beds and providing a range whare the strands may be deflected reduces the need to request variations to the approved design. particular attention must be given to:The physical dimensions of anchorages.1 POST-TENSIONED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE General Several post-tensioning systems are currently being used in bridge applications. 24. where possible. It should be noted that it is considered to be good practice. anchor bolts for bearings etc.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Prestressed Concrete When detailing Precast.1(a) and 24.1(c) – 24. Arrangement of end block/diaphragm reinforcement with respect to anchorages and tendons to facilitate the placement and vibration of concrete/ (large scale details are appropriate in most cases). in accordance with the requirements of Section 23 of this Manual are provided as Figures 24.1(f) inclusive. the following shall be checked thoroughly:That the deflection point of strands is correctly dimensioned.3 24.1(b) for the required level of detailing. Prestressed Concrete items with deflected strands. Sample reinforcement drawings. See Figures 24. The spacing between anchorages.3. ferrules. See RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 for typical 'GENERAL NOTES' for prestressed concrete. ducts for transverse reinforcement.

whilst not usually detailed. appropriate oversize ducts shall be specified on the drawings.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Prestressed Concrete Ducting detailed on drawings shall be in accordance with stressing system manufacturer's recommendations for the system used. Where misalignment of ducting is possible during construction. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 3 . Duct supports. shall be closely examined with regard to placement of non-stressed reinforcement to ensure correct placement is achieved.

THE DIMENSIONS OF THE GIRDERS CONFORM TO AS 5100. THE SIZE AND LOCATION OF THESE HOLES SHALL BE 1 2 B 3 5 SUBMITTED TO THE PRINICPAL’S REPRESENTATIVE FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO GIRDER MANUFACTURE THE AREA SHOWN STIPPLED (BOTH ENDS) SHALL BE ROUGHENED TO EXPOSE THE COARSE AGGREGATE.2.1 - 2 - ABUTMENT A END 27 000 ABUTMENT B END 500 6/·40 HOLES (GIRDER TYPE A) OR 80 340 6/CAST-IN FERRULES (GIRDER TYPE B) TOP SURFACE SHALL BE ROUGHENED DURING MANUFACTURE TO EXPOSE THE COARSE AGGREGATE TO AN AVERAGE DEPTH OF 3mm EXCEPT A 50mm EDGE STRIP SHALL BE FINISHED WITH A STEEL FLOAT TO PROVIDE SEATING FOR PERMANENT FORMWORK PANELS . CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE DRILLED OR OTHERWISE DISTURBED ONCE INITIAL SET HAS OCCURRED. 255 175 275 150 275 255 A .VARIATIONS IN 300 300 SECTION WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. WELDING SYMBOLS CONFORM TO AS 1101 PART 3. 150 130 1150 545 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 40 HOLES CAST-IN FERRULES c OF GIRDERS 320 320 ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 30 HOLE FIGURE 24. UPON REMOVAL OF FORMWORK. 95 GRADE 250 TO AS 3679 ·16 x 190 LONG STEEL BAR. HOLES SHALL BE FILLED WITH DRY PACK MORTAR. GIRDERS SHALL ONLY BE LIFTED USING LIFTING DEVICES WHICH ARE ACCEPTABLE STEEL FLOAT FINISH .5 TYPE 3 STANDARD PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE BEAM SECTIONS.SEE VIEW 1 500 340 80 - IF HOLES FOR THE SUPPORT OF DECK AND PARAPET FORMWORK ARE REQUIRED THEY SHALL HAVE 30mm COVER TO REINFORCEMENT AND STRANDS. TO AN AVERAGE DEPTH OF 3mm ON THE FACES WHERE EITHER 40 HOLES OR CAST-IN FERRULES ARE SHOWN. CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1 ‘SCHROEDER P21’ 140 320 CAST-IN SOCKETS MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 50MPa. TRANSPORT AND HANDLING. GRADE 250 TO AS 3679 500 250 95 A 50 72 3 M24 TAPPED HOLE A B ABUTMENT A VIEW 0 ABUTMENT B GIRDER LAYOUT BDENOTES GIRDER TYPE NOT TO SCALE DETAIL 0 100 A 200 300mm 3 100 200 300mm END END 100 50 100 50 GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN. THE METHOD OF B - ELEVATION GIRDER TYPE A .TYP TO RELEVANT NSW REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS. THE OUTER FACES OF GIRDERS TYPE B SHALL NOT BE ROUGHENED.2(a) GIRDERS . 24 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 450 EXTENT OF ROUGHENED SURFACE FOR DECK 50 50 100 50 DETAIL 0 100 B 200 300mm EDGES OF SOFFIT AND ENDS ONLY SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20mm. SUBJECT TO APPROVAL BY THE PRINCIPAL’S REPRESENTATIVE. 3 MASS OF EACH GIRDER IS APPROXIMATELY 22t(BASED ON DENSITY 2600kg/m ) DURING STORAGE. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS 0 100 200 300 400 500mm GIRDER TYPE B 0 100 200 300 400 500mm 100 50 GIRDER TYPE A 0 100 200 300 400 100 50 100 50 SHEET No 1 ISSUE CAD No KP2F2422A.2 REQUIRED 0 500 1000 1500mm ROUGHENING SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE SUPERINTENDENT B A A A INNER GIRDERS A OUTER GIRDERS ·40 x 72 LONG STEEL BAR. AN ALTERNATIVE TO THAT SHOWN MAY BE USED. FERRULE ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED TO AS 1214.6 REQUIRED GIRDER TYPE B . GIRDERS SHALL BE IN AN UPRIGHT POSITION AND SUPPORTED NOT MORE THAN 500mm FROM EACH END. MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE AT TRANSFER OF PRESTRESS SHALL BE 35MPa.CONCRETE PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET 20 x 20 CHAMFER 150 500 ON THESE EDGES OF SOFFIT ONLY 77 77 ‘SCHROEDER P21’ ELECTROPLATED STEEL CAST-IN SOCKETS: M16 x 100 LONG WITH ·12 x 100 LONG DOWELS OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. 64 REQUIRED PREPARED PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS VIEW 1 - SECTION 2 - SECTION 2 - DESIGN DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: 500mm MANAGER.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

ORDINARY.2. AT 20 C AVERAGE TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY IN THE RANGE OF 50%-75%. RELAX 2. 1-12-Z-2G AND 2-12-L-1G-300 230 2 - MIDPOINT OF GIRDER 2 500 MAX 2 000 MIN 150 6-12-U-1G-130 225 40 18/·12. AFTER STEAM CURING. 1-12-Z-2G AND 2-12-L-1G-200 13 BUNDLES OF 1-12-Z-1G. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE 500mm AT ENDS OF GIRDER AT DEFLECTION POINTS STRANDS NOT SHOWN STRANDS NOT SHOWN 0 500mm 100 200 300 400 STRAND PATTERN CROSS SECTIONS REINFORCEMENT NOT SHOWN 0 100 200 300 400 500mm GIRDER TYPE B SHOWN GIRDER TYPE A SIMILIAR 0 100 200 300 400 100 50 SURFACE SHALL BE 30mm IF NO DIMENSION SHOWN. 100 50 100 50 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. HOG OF GIRDER WILL INCREASE TO APPROX 35mm 90 DAYS AFTER TRANSFER 55 = = 55 = 131 = = = 55 55 = = = 55 = = = = 24-S-2G 24-S-2G IF GIRDER REMAINS UNLOADED. TENSILE STRENGTH 1870 MPa. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 ISSUE CAD No KP2F2422B. TO AS/NZS 4672.. AFTER TRANSFER OF PRESTRESS. THE CALCULATED DEFLECTION DUE TO THE MASS OF DECK CONCRETE IS..7 LOW RELAXATION SUPER GRADE STRANDS (NON DEFLECTED) 1 - 14/·12. -GIRDER SUPPORTED AT 500mm FROM EACH END. CALCULATED HOG OF GIRDER AT 28 DAYS IS 33mm ASSUMING: -DENSITY=2600kg/m 3 -ELASTIC MODULUS AT TRANSFER=33 700 MPa.2(b) GIRDERS .mm. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM S A ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW Z A A L U B FIGURE 24. 55 107 = 45 80 126 80 107 83 80 174 80 83 SECTION 1 - SECTION 2 GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN.1 WITH MINIMUM BREAKING FORCE OF 184 kN. DIAMETER 12. 2-12-L-1G AND 1-12-Z-2G-115 CLOSED END OF BAR 290 100 1-12-Z-1G AND 1-12-Z-2G-200 6-16-S-4G 150 2-12-L-1G-100 18 BUNDLES OF 1-12-Z-1G. STRANDS SHALL BE CUT FLUSH WITH THE 125 125 12-U-1G 12-L-1G 12-L-1G ENDS OF GIRDER AND EXPOSED STRANDS SEALED AGAINST CORROSION BY THE APPLICATION OF AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN. 100 100 20-S-3G 110 200 150 150 12-Z-1G 12-Z-1G -NO LOADS EXCEPT GIRDER SELF WEIGHT. 125 125 115 DEFLECTED STRANDS 12-Z-2G 12-Z-2G THE FORCE REMAINING IN EACH 12.dgn .REINFORCEMENT 250 C = BEND DIA 250 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET B A PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 A A PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 B B PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS C A RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER..7mm. -STORAGE IN OPEN AIR. 4-24-S-2G AND 2 ¶ OF GIRDER HALF ELEVATION INNER CONTOURS OF GIRDER NOT SHOWN 0 500 1000 1500mm 4-20-S-3G SPACED AS SHOWN IN LAYOUT OF S BARS 500 250 = TO BE BENT 45 = 16-S-4G 16-S-4G ON SITE TO BE BENT ON SITE 500 20-S-3G 28-S-1G 24-S-2G S BARS LAYOUT PRESTRESSING NOTES STRANDS SHALL BE 7 WIRE.7 LOW RELAXATION SUPER GRADE STRANDS (DEFLECTED) 2-28-S-1G.7mm DIAMETER STRAND AT MIDPOINT OF THE GIRDER IMMEDIATELY AFTER RELEASE OF THE TENSIONING JACK SHALL BE 138KN. 210 125 24-S-2G 70 45 28-S-1G 24-S-2G 28-S-1G 45 -STEAM CURING AT 70 C FOR 8 HOURS AFTER CASTING.STRAND DEFLECTION POINT 57 BUNDLES OF 1 29 BUNDLES OF 3 BUNDLES OF 1-12-Z-1G.

TENSILE STRENGTH 1870 MPa.72 950 c PIER L 34 475 END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT A 38 475 2 3. THE TENDONS SHALL BE STRESSED FROM BOTH ENDS AND THE ORDER OF STRESSING SHALL BE 3. Y2 AND Y3 ARE THE L VERTICAL HEIGHTS TOc OF DUCT AS SHOWN DENOTES DIMENSIONS FOR DUCT PROFILES 1 AND 3 ONLY DENOTES DIMENSIONS FOR DUCT PROFILES 5 AND 7 ONLY THE BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE HAS BEEN DETAILED FOR A TYPICAL 12. 275 1375 1200 1375 275 100 1375 1375 1375 275 115mm ID STEEL DUCT FOR TENDON THE JACKING FORCE HAS BEEN CALCULATED ASSUMING THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PARAMETERS MODULUS OF ELASTICITY OF TENDONS Es = 193 000MPa VIEW 1 - SECTION 2 - DRAW-IN AT LOCK OFF = 6mm ANCHORAGE FRICTION = 0 COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION BETWEEN TENDON AND DUCT = 0.4.008 1000 500 1000 500 525 520 520 520 520 500 515 515 515 DUCT PROFILE 1075 1075 945 1020 1260 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270 1270 1260 1000 640 740 460 430 865 535 575 685 955 795 395 325 365 1140 1015 1150 535 660 550 350 330 315 785 800 730 680 590 530 860 515 515 610 910 ‘Y1’ ‘Y2’ DUCTS AND GROUTING TENDON DUCTS SHALL BE SEMI-RIGID STEEL SHEATHING 115mm INSIDE DIAMETER (SEE RTA SPECIFICATION No B113 FOR DETAILED REQUIREMENTS AND PLACING TOLERANCES). JACKING FORCE PER TENDON MAY BE TAKEN TO A MAXIMUM OF 5789kN (85% OF MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD) IN ORDER TO OVERCOME FRICTION LOSSES HIGHER THAN THE CALCULATED VALUES.6.8 505 390 THE CALCULATED MAXIMUM FRICTION LOSS FOR TENDONS IS 10%. TO AS/NZS 4672. RELAX 2. AIR BLEEDER TUBES SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL CROWN POINTS AND SAG POINTS OF EACH DUCT 2. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SHEET No FIGURE 24. THE TENDON DUCT SHALL BE PLACED TO A SMOOTH PROFILE PASSING THROUGH THE SPECIFIED POINTS SHOWN ON DUCT PROFILE.4 390 505 (SEE SPECIFICATION FOR DETAILED GROUTING REQUIREMENTS).20 3000mm 0 1000 2000 3000mm 0 1000 2000 UNINTENTIONAL ANGULAR DEVIATION OF TENDON PROFILE = 0. THE JACKING FORCE FOR EACH TENDON SHALL BE 5108kN (75% OF MINIMUM 525 BREAKING LOAD). ORDINARY. FULL DETAILS OF THE PROPOSED 4 2 4 2 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM INCLUDING ANY REQUIRED MODIFICATIONS TO THE DESIGN (SEE SPECIFICATION).7.5. 5.1.1 (a) CAD No KP2F2431A.‘X’ 1 - 1155 .262% STRESSING FACE END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE ABUTMENT B 1 A 2 STRESSING FACE B 2 ‘Y2’ ‘Y3’ ‘Y1’ ‘X’ ‘Y3’ 2 820 4 SPACES AT 1000 = 4000 11 SPACES AT 2000 = 22 000 13 SPACES AT 1000 = 13000 13 SPACES AT 2000 = 26 000 820 4 SPACES AT 1000 = 4000 ‘X’ 1155 . SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR CONSIDERATION AT THE TIME OF TENDER.8.7 390 505 FRICTION LOSSES AND TENDON ELONGATION 6. 100 ANCHORAGE 16 REQUIRED 1 3 5 7 1 1075 2 2 4 6 8 3 4 6 5 8 Y3 7 1375 1550 1375 100 275 TENDON No (TYP) 1375 1375 1375 100 PRESTRESSING SYSTEM MULTISTRAND SYSTEM PRESTRESSING DATA 965 VOIDS EACH TENDON SHALL BE COMPRISED OF 37/7 WIRE.7mm NOT TO SCALE STRAND PRESTRESSING SYSTEM.2. MANAGER. .‘X’ 1240 1240 1075 1205 1205 VERTICAL OFFSET Y2 AND Y3 1075 945 785 895 1010 990 435 465 485 400 450 525 525 525 525 365 Y1 SEE TABLE I FOR DIMENSION ‘X’ DIMENSIONS Y1.3 GROUT POINTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT ALL ANCHORAGES. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW TABLE I TENDON No DIMENSION ‘X’ ABUTMENT A 505 ABUTMENT B 390 THE METHOD OF FIXING DUCTS AND THE METHOD OF JOINTING AND SEALING OF DUCTS AT CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATION.dgn 1 ISSUE THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE SHALL BE 40MPa MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT THE TIME OF STRESSING SHALL BE 35MPa CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION:B1.1 WITH MINIMUM BREAKING FORCE OF 6810 kN PER TENDON. IF THE CALCULATED ELONGATION IS OBTAINED AT A JACKING FORCE LESS THAN 5108kN.3. THE STRESSING SHALL CONTINUE TO 5108kN AT EACH END BEFORE LOCKING OFF TENDON. 1. EXPECTED TOTAL AVERAGE ELONGATION PER TENDON IS 480mm. DIAMETER 12.7mm.

7mm DIA 115mm I.7mm DIA STRAND TENDONS (TYP) 5 4 400 490 520 430 400 490 DETAIL A 1 STRAND TENDONS (TYP) 405 545 DETAIL FOR DIMENSION ‘X’ SEE SHEET No 1 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm B 1 6 515 375 7 405 545 FOR DIMENSION ‘X’ SEE SHEET No 1 200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm 8 515 375 200 100 DIMENSION ‘L’ IS THE HORIZONTAL DISTANCE MEASURED PARALLEL TO CENTRE LINE OF THE BRIDGE FROM THE END OF THE SUPERSTRUCTURE TO CENTRE OF THE ANCHOR STRESSING FACE. TENDON No 1 TENDON No 2 TENDON No 3 TENDON No 4 (40) 25 15 TYP GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE DENOTES DIMENSION FOR TENDONS 1 AND 7 DENOTES DIMENSION FOR TENDONS 3 AND 5 (90 OR 100) FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. SEE SHEET No 1. STEEL DUCTS FOR 37/12.3.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. 40 185 165 350 175 350 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH BLOCKOUT .D.D. .1 (b) RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: 100 50 MANAGER. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 ISSUE CAD No KP2F2431B.STRESSING END CAP STRESSING END CAP ANCHORAGES 40 ANCHORAGES 90 100 ‘X’ ‘X’ TABLE II 1075 ‘L’ TENDON No ABUTMENT A 1 520 ABUTMENT B 430 1075 800 525 525 800 2 40 3 25 115mm I. STEEL DUCTS FOR 37/12.TYP ‘L’ 175 1375 ‘L’ ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW VIEW 4 16 FOR VALUE OF ‘L’ SEE TABLE II END CAP AND BLOCKOUTS SHALL BE POURED AFTER STESSING AND GROUTING OF TENDONS DENOTES DIMENSIONS BEFORE PRESTRESSING ABUTMENT A END SHOWN ABUTMENT B END SIMILIAR FIGURES SHOWN IN BRACKETS REFER TO ABUTMENT B 0 100 200 300 400 500mm PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS FIGURE 24.

. 16-V-11D .. 1-20-V-1D NF. 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D 1 0..5 PI 16-D-1D BUNDLE TYPE B CONSISTS OF: 2-16-HT-1D. . REINFORCEMENT MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY WHERE NECESSARY TO CLEAR BUNDLE TYPE F CONSISTS OF: 2-16-HT-2D. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 1 ISSUE CAD No KP2F2431C... .. FORMED HOLES AND RECESSES.. UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. . .. LENGTH OF BAR SHALL BE 12 000mm AND PLACED SYMMETRICALLY ABOUT ¶ OF PIER 2 2 13-12-S-9D SPACED AS SHOWN IN DETAIL A 2 PLAN 16-V-10D. THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: 0 50 BUNDLE TYPE A CONSISTS OF: 1-16-VV-1D FF. . . 16-V-5D. 2-16-HT-4D AND 4-12-Q-1D 16-V-10D PLAN 16-D-2D STEEL DOWELS. . ANCHOR BOLTS. 1-20-V-1D NF..SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 500 16-S-1D 16-V-2D. 16-S-2D 20-S-6D ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW FIGURE 24. DRAINAGE PIPES.... 16-D-1D AND 16-D-2D NOT SHOWN 0 1 2 3 4 5m GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN. 16-V-4D.... 2-16-HT-2D AND 4-12-Q-1D BUNDLE TYPE C CONSISTS OF: 1-16-VV-2D FF. 16-S-2D. 16-S-7D AND 16-S-8D.. 2-16-HT-3D AND 4-12-Q-1D b) OTHER BARS: 0 50 BUNDLE TYPE E CONSISTS OF: 1-20-VV-3D FF. 16-V-6D AND 16-V-7D 3 4 2-16-V-7D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-7D AND 16-VV-7D 21-16-V-6D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-7D AND 16-VV-7D 77-20-S-6D LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D. 1-24-V-12D NF. ..1 (c) 500 500 TYP TYP DECK REINFORCEMENT .... 2-16-S-3D FF. 16-V-6D OR 16-V-7D 2-16-V-11D FF AND 2-16-D-2D NF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 3 2 110 GEORGE STREET 16-S-7D PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 SECTION 1 - PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS AND ARRANGED AS SHOWN IN LAYOUT DETAIL AND ARRANGED AS SHOWN IN LAYOUT DETAIL TRANSVERSE BARS NOT SHOWN DRAWING 0 1000 2000 3000mm RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: 1000 500 MANAGER. 16-V-3D OR 16-V-4D 2-16-V-10D NF AND 2-16-D-1D FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 3 2 TYP 16-VV-7D 16-V-5D.. NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 40mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE... 16-V-3D. 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D ER c L BAR SIZE: a)HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: N12 N16 N20 N24 N28 N32 N36 . 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D DENOTES VARIABLE LENGTH BAR.3.. * * * * 16-V-10D . 2-16-V-9D. . ..2 SETS OF 14 BUNDLES TYPE E-150 AND 2 SETS OF 7 BUNDLES TYPE F-300 2 SETS OF 24 BUNDLES TYPE C-150 AND 2 SETS OF 12 BUNDLES TYPE D-300 27-16-S-1D FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 2 2 2-16-V-2D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D AND 16-VV-7D 27-16-S-7D FF SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 2 2 195 BUNDLES TYPE A-150 AND 98 BUNDLES TYPE B-300 168 BUNDLES TYPE A-150 AND 84 BUNDLES TYPE B-300 3 4 905 2-16-V-5D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-7D AND 16-VV-7D 905 2 2 13-12-S-9D SPACED AS SHOWN IN DETAIL A 2 ER PI c L 2820 150 150 150 120 2800 75-16-S-8D SPACED AS 75-16-S-2D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 2 2 SHOWN IN SECTION 2 2 1 - 1 - 21-16-V-3D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D AND 16-VV-7D 2-16-V-4D FF LAPPED WITH 16-S-1D AND 16-VV-7D 25-16-VV-7D LAPPED WITH 16-V-2D. 2-16-S-3D FF.. BUNDLE TYPE D CONSISTS OF: 2-16-HT-1D. LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGTH. . 16-V-11D. 2-16-V-9D.dgn .. 16-V-11D UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. . 16-D-1D AND 16-D-2D LAYOUT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 16-S-8D 800 MIN (TYP) LAP THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. 2-16-S-3D FF...

16-HT-D3 AND 16-HT-4D) 16-V-9D 16-D-1D OR 16-V-11D 16-V-9D SCALE 500 250 0 500 1000 1500mm OR AS SHOWN.SHEET B PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 SECTION 3 1 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER. 20-S-6D OR 16-S-8D 20-V-1D OR 24-V-12D C PA LS ES 2 EQ 6 EQUAL SPACES 2 EQ SPACES 16-VV-1D 6 EQUAL SPACES 2 EQ SPACES 6 EQUAL SPACES 2 EQ SPACES SPACES UA 75 300 16-S-3D BENT ON SITE 500 SECTION 2 1 DETAIL A - 0 100 200 300 400 500mm 100 50 20-S-6D A 16-HT-2D 16-HT-2D GENERAL NOTES 16-S-3D 16-S-3D 12-Q-1D (TIED TO 16-HT-2D. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 ISSUE CAD No KP2F2431D.1 (d) DECK REINFORCEMENT .16-S-2D OR 16-S-8D 10 EQUAL SPACES 16-HT-2D 20-V-1D 16-HT-2D 10 EQUAL SPACES A - 16-HT-1D 16-HT-1D 16-AZ-1D 400 400 LS PA CE Q 6E UA 16-S-3D S 20-V-1D 12-S-9D 16-S-3D 16-K-1D 300 75 6E Q 8 EQUAL SPACES 8 EQUAL SPACES 12-Q-1D (TIED TO 16-HT-1D AND 16-HT-2D) 16-S-1D OR 16-S-7D 16-S-2D. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. SEE SHEET No 1.3. 16-V-2D OR 16-V-5D AL QU 3E S CE SPA 3E QU AL SPA CE S ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 300 2 EQ SPACES 16-VV-2D OR 20-VV-D3 16-V-3D OR 16-V-6D (TYP) 2 EQ SPACES ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 16-V-4D OR 16-V-7D 16-HT-3D OR 16-HT-4D FIGURE 24.dgn . 120 0 (T Y P) 16-D-2D OR 16-V-10D THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

SHEET C PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 10 90 0 50 0 YP ) 5 00 (T (T 50 0 YP ) 9 BUNDLES OF 2-16-N-2D-215 0 50 YP 5-16-E-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN VIEW 5 ) PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 (T PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 20-V-15D 5 9-S-14D-215FF 7 BUNDLES OF 2-16-N-215 9 BUNDLES TYPE H SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 8 - 20-BZ-1D 20-VV-6D 20-VV-6D 20-BZ-1D 2 SETS OF 8 BUNDLES OF 20-VL-1D 20-V-13D 300 (TYP) DESIGN 9-16-S-14D-215 8 ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER.dgn SHEET No 3 ISSUE . 2-16-L-1D. 5-12-S-17D. 15-16-S-12D LAPPED WITH LONGITUDINAL DECK REINFORCEMENT SEE SHEET No 1 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D SECTION 6 - 16-HT-5D 20-V-1D 16-E-2D SECTION 6 SETS OF 3-20-BZ-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 7 - 4 16-S-13D 16-S-13D 12-V-14D 150 100=400 20-VV-6D 20-BZ-1D 4 AT 16-S-16D 1200 20-S-15D 20-VV-5D 3 SETS OF 6-20-VV-6D SPACED AS 16-AZ-1D SHOWN IN SECTION 7 - 12-V-14D 6-20-V-13D SPACED AS 20-VV-6D 20-V-1D SHOWN IN SECTION 7 12-V-14D 16-AZ-1D 6 AT 100 16-S-13D 125 20-BZ-1D 16-S-3D 16-K-1D 12-S-9D 16-K-1D 16-S-3D 12-S-9D 16-N-1D 16-E-1D 16-N-2D 5 AT 200 16-E-1D =1000 =600 SECTION DISPLACE BAR INWARDS TO CLEAR EXPANSION JOINT ANCHOR BOLT 7 20-V-1D EQUAL SPACES 12-V-15D-100NF 250 16-S-12D 16-S-13D 20-V-13D 12-V-14D 250 300 (TYP) 250 16-L-1D 20-S-15D (TYP) 5-12-S-17D-220NF 20-VL-1D 16-S-14D 16-S-13D 16-S-14D 16-L-1D 16-S-3D 12-V-14D 16-S-18D VIEW 5-16-S-18D-200FF 5 - 5-16-S-18D-200FF 2 SETS OF 3-20-VL-1D SPACED AS 20-BZ-1D IN SECTION 7 - 20-VL-1D 16-N-2D 2 SETS OF 13-16-HT-5D-100 2 SETS OF 13-16-P-1D-100 3 SETS OF 6 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-2D-100 16-S-16D 7 6 4 SETS OF 1 BUNDLE OF 4-16-E-2D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 7 - 72-16-S-13D LAPPED WITH LONGITUDINAL DECK REINFORCEMENT SEE SHEET No 1 16-S-14D 20-S-15D SECTION GENERAL NOTES 0 500 8 1000 1500mm SCALE 500 250 OR AS SHOWN. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.16-S-13D 20-V-1D 16-HT-5D AND 16-HT-6D 16-S-13D 16-AZ-1D 20-V-1D 16-K-1D 12-S-9D (TYP) 675 (TYP) 16-HT-6D (TYP) 16-E-2D 16-AZ-1D 12-V-14D 16-HT-5D 920 (TYP) 16-K-1D 12-S-9D 16-S-16D 12-S-17D 20-VV-6D 16-S-3D 500 SQ 16-P-1D 1050 16-P-1D BUNDLE TYPE G CONSISTS OF: 16-S-3D 1-20-VV FF. ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 15-16-S-12D LAPPED WITH LONGITUDINAL DECK P) 8 - (T 9 BUNDLES TYPE G-150 16-S-18D 4 5-16-E-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN VIEW 5 - Y REINFORCEMENT SEE SHEET No 3 16-S-18D 4 - FIGURE 24. SEE SHEET No 1.1-12-V-14D NF. 1-20-V-1D.1 (e) DECK REINFORCEMENT . 2-16-S-3D FF. 1-20-V-1D NF. 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D 1100 (TYP) (TYP) 20-S-15D 16-S-13D 20-VV-5D 1-20-S-15D FF. 2-16-L-1D. 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D BUNDLE TYPE H CONSISTS OF: 250 16-HT-5D 20-VV-5D BUNDLE TYPE J CONSISTS OF: 16-S-12D 6-16-S-16D -200FF 16-S-13D 16-S-12D 10-20-S-15D FF. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS 1 BUNDLE TYPE J 20-BZ-1D 7 6 - 5 DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER 1-16-HT-5D AND 2-16-HT-6D-100 PLAN 12-S-9D NOT SHOWN 2 SETS OF 8 BUNDLES OF 1-16-P-1D AND 2-16-HT-6D-100 CAD No KP2F2431E. 2-16-S-3D FF. 2-16-S-3D FF.3.

16-E-4D AND 16-G-1D BARS SHALL HAVE LEG LENGTHS OF 1900mm 20-VV-4D 16-VV-7D SECTION 10 - SECTION 9 - 10 16-V-5D FF. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 20-S-6D ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW FIGURE 24. AND 2/DL1-16 AT 175 10 BUNDLES OF 1-20-VV-4D FF. 16-V-6D FF OR 16-V-D7 FF 7 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-4D.SHEET D PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS PLAN TENDONS NOT SHOWN 12-S-9D NOT SHOWN DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER.3. 2-16-K-1D AND 2-16-AZ-1D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 10 - 6-20-S-11D SPACED AS SHOWN IN SECTION 10 - DECK REINFORCEMENT . 16-V-6D OR 16-V-7D 5-16-S-10D-300EF 20-VV-4D 16-E-3D. SEE SHEET No 1. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS DESIGN SHEET No 4 ISSUE CAD No KP2F2431F. 16-V-3D FF OR 16-V-4D FF 10 2 SETS OF 3 GROUPS OF 4/DK4-16. 1-28-V-8D NF. 2-16-E-3D AND 2-16-G-1D-215 GENERAL NOTES 0 500 1000 1500mm SCALE 500 250 OR AS SHOWN. 16-V-3D OR 16-V-4D 16-G-1D 16-VV-7D 16-V-7D. 2-16-E-3D AND 2-16-G-1D-215 7 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-4D. . 16-E-4D AND 16-G-1D 16-D-1D AND 16-V-11D 460 16-D-2D AND 16-V-10D 16-V-2D. 9 16-VV-7D PIER c L 175 175 175 175 175 9 FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.1 (f) 16-S-10D 16-V-2D FF. 2/DK3-16. 2-16-E-3D AND 2-16-G-1D-175 2 SETS OF 3 BUNDLES OF 4-16-E-4D. 2-16-S-3D FF.9 EQUAL SPACES 20-S-11D 20-S-6D 28-V-8D 20-S-11D 16-E-3D 28-V-8D 20-S-6D 16-E-4D 16-S-3D 16-S-3D 16-S-10D 16-E-3D.

SECTION 25 STRUCTURAL STEELWORK .

1-300 " where 300 following the Australian Standard number indicates the grade of the steel in the plate or section. In the majority of cases. The spacing of bolt holes and the edge distances to all plates shall be provided on these assembly drawings. For simple fabrication work. would require an elevation and sections to depict different plate sizes and part plans to show all relevant details. 25. A fabricated item with a longitudinal axis of symmetry.1(c) and 25. such as bridge girders that are made from rolled steel sections.1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL STEELWORK In all bridge construction and bridge rehabilitation drawings prepared by the Authority. 25. A universal beam type girder would require an elevation and cross section. an assembly drawing showing all components in their final position in the structure shall be provided. showing the method of detailing steel girders and their individual elements are shown in Figures 25.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Structural Steelwork 25 25. where structural steel elements are specified. Each item of fabricated steelwork shall be detailed in the form that the item is released from the fabrication shop with each and every part that is attached in the fabrication shop shown as part of the total assembly. the material used shall be in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard and this shall be stated on the drawings in the following manner: " Steel plate shall conform to AS/NZS 3678-300 " " Steel sections shall conform to AS/NZS 3679.1(a). Conventional practice is such that the holes in these plates are match drilled with the hole locations provided at the ends of each girder and in this case the detailing of each splice plate is not required as the assembly of the bolted splice is drawn in elevation.1(d). Where items are to be bolted or welded together in the field. Where girders are bolted together in the field. such as a built-up plate girder.1(b). Typical steelwork drawings. plan and cross section. Structural steelwork drawings shall show sufficient detail for the complete fabrication of a particular item or sufficient detail to enable the fabricator to prepare detailed shop drawings for the particular item. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (18 February 2009) Page 1 of 3 . the quantity of those items be shown separately with the detail of the item. A tapered plate would require a plan and a section. universal beams and built-up plate girders. eg where steel cross girders are to be attached to the main girders. the individual splice plates are supplied separately to the girders. with enlarged details of the more complex portions as necessary eg A normal plate with holes in it would require a plan view only. it is sufficient to detail a fabricated item in one or two views. steel trough girder or steel box girder. Fabricated items that form part of the total assembly need not be detailed as separate items nor shall the quantity of those items be shown separately unless unduly complicated and in such a case. shop drawings are not usually prepared. by Consultants for the Authority or for bridges that will become the property of the Authority.

Typical web diagrams are shown in Figure 25. 25. property class 8. Vertical dimensions may be related to a horizontal datum as shown in Figure 25. thread length. such as bolts. 25. thread type and surface finish indicated as appropriate.8 CORNER CUTS AND CUT-OUTS When detailing the fabrication and assembly of steel members.1. Bolts shall not be described on drawings as M20 x 400 8.1(d).2 STANDARD ITEMS Standard items. all shear connectors shall be shown. 25. overall dimensions of steel items shall be provided to enable the correct manufacture of the items.3 NON-STANDARD ITEMS All non-standard items shall be fully detailed with all relevant dimensions. radial corner cuts shall be provided to enhance weld clearance and the method of detailing corner cuts shall be as shown in Figure 25. The size and length of shear connectors is a design consideration.8/S and nut under any circumstances as the various Australian Standards for the bolts. the web diagram may be detailed with the chord horizontal. 25.5 WEB DIAGRAMS Web diagrams shall be fully detailed to incorporate any camber requirements.6 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS The detailing of each and every shear connector in the plan and elevation of a girder is not necessary.8 to AS/NZS 1252. normal series to AS 1237.5. property class 8 to AS/NZS 1252 and 2 washers. 25. thread length 150. suitable clearance shall be provided between the web stiffener and the flange to allow for maintenance and painting requirements.1 or alternatively.5. they shall be sufficiently described to enable correct identification eg M20 x 400 long high strength steel bolt. shear connectors need only be shown where a change in pitch occurs. nuts and screws need not be detailed fully. however care shall be exercised to ensure that the shear connector detailed is appropriate and available. Where the appearance of the girder is of aesthetic importance. 25.4 CLOSING DIMENSIONS In accordance with industry practice. with nut. In cross sections and enlarged details. nuts and the bolting category specified are not the same. If items are not fully detailed. In elevations. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (18 February 2009) Page 2 of 3 . Dimensions required for the correct positioning of holes etc in items shall be provided from one end only and as such no closing dimensions shall be given on the drawings. the top and bottom edges of the web plates shall be cut to form smooth curves to provide for the required camber.7 WEB STIFFENERS Where web stiffeners are provided and are not required to be welded to a flange.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Structural Steelwork 25.

the following note shall be included in the General Notes on the drawing: “Edges to be protective treated shall be rounded to a radius of 1." See Clause 25. ie for large items.10 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT The required protective treatment shall be specified on the drawings and it shall be appropriate for the item under consideration. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 2 (18 February 2009) Page 3 of 3 . Where fabricated steel items have been hot-dip galvanized and the surface of the protective coating has been disturbed or damaged for any reason. Drawings shall also contain the following note as appropriate: "All lifting lugs shall be cut off by a suitable method after final positioning of the girder and the remaining stub shall be ground flush with the top flange. In all cases where protective treatment of steelwork is required. standard plate widths shall be specified as this will reduce the need for plate stripping etc during fabrication of steel plate items.12 INTERMITTENT WELDS Where structural steel sections or plates are joined together and the method of joining is by welding.9 LIFTING LUGS Steel girders and any other large fabricated steel item shall be detailed to include the provision of lifting lugs at suitable locations to facilitate the erection of the item. welds shall be continuous for the full length of the interface in order to prevent long term crevice corrosion occurring. Intermittent welds shall not be used in structural applications. thickness.1(d). 25.10 of this Manual for the details of the renovation of galvanized surfaces where the item provided with lifting lugs has been hot-dip galvanized.11 PLATE NOMENCLATURE Steel plate sizes shall be shown on drawings using the width. the following note shall be included in the General Notes on the drawing: “Damaged galvanized surfaces shall be renovated in accordance with RTA Specification B241”. length method eg 200 x 16 PLATE x 525 Where possible. the drawing shall clearly detail where the cut-outs are required and shall also include any relevant welding requirements as shown in Figure 25.5mm unless noted otherwise”. 25. 25. it may be inappropriate to specify that the item be hot-dip galvanized after manufacture.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Structural Steelwork Where cut-outs are required in steel plates to provide clearance to existing members. 25.

1 CAD No KP2F251A. GIRDERS . L DENOTES DIMENSIONS ON c GIRDER.. TEMPORARY TOP FLANGE AND CROSS BRACING SHALL BE INSTALLED TYP 1000 753 27462 2155 156 504 800 1800 PRIOR TO TRANSPORT OF GIRDERS TO SITE. FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No 4 4 SOUTHERN SIDE 4 4 1920 FOR GIRDER TEMPORARY BRACING DETAILS.. 1(a) SOUTHERN SIDE 300 c OF GIRDER AND BEARING L NORTHERN SIDE GENERAL NOTES 0 500 1000 1500mm SCALE: 500 250 6 L 120 x 25 P L 200 x 25 P TYP 25 P DIAPHRAGM L GIRDER No H1 H2 TABLE I L1 L2 L3 R FOR GIRDER LAYOUT. OF FOR DETAILS OF BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATES SEE SHEET No . CROSS FRAMES AND DIAPHRAGMS SHALL BE PLACED RADIALLY IN PLAN. SEE SHEET No . FOR DIMENSIONS OF WEB PLATES SEE SHEET No .. FOR DIMENSIONS OF BOTTOM FLANGE PLATES SEE SHEET No . SEE SHEET No 1920 c L BOLTS FOR OF TEMPORARY BRACING TEMPORARY BRACING 200 x 20 P x 4025 L 1 c OF GIRDER L 1 - 315 560 560 360 x 25 2000 TOP FLANGE L P 2500 2 AT 2000 = 4000 L 200 x 25 P 12 400 x 4 AT 2000 = 8000 2000 L 200 x 25 Px 4400 2000 400 2000 1500 L L2 (ALONG cOF WEB) c OF BEARING L NORTHERN SIDE PLAN 3 CURVATURE NOT SHOWN 5 4 4 4 FIGURE 25..SHEET A PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 1A R40 CORNER CUT (TYP) BEARING ATTACHMENT 900 900 PLATE 1B 1000 722 28276 2347 149 500 800 FOR GENERAL DETAILS OF GIRDER SEE SHEET No . FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No . L DENOTES HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS ALONG c GIRDER.2 4 L 16P L 25 P TOP FLANGE CROSS FRAMES FOR DETAILS. SEE SHEET R 40 (TYP) 6 25 P BOTTOM FLANGE L HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) T T No 4 2 4 SECTION 1 - 3 VARIES (SEE WEB PLATE DETAILS) L3 (ALONG cOF WEB) L 22 x 150 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS (TYP) cOF BOLTS FOR L 5 VARIES ¶ OF ACCESS OPENING..dgn . OF SECTION 3 - T INDICATES THE POSITION OF TEMPORARY CROSS BRACING. SEE SHEET No 4 DIAPHRAGM AND CROSS FRAMES SHALL BE BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATE FOR GIRDERS 1A AND 1B VERTICAL 200 x 20 P L TYP 6 200 x 20 P L 6 TYP FOR DETAILS OF FLANGE STIFFENERS AT FIELD JOINTS..

SEE SHEET No 1.1(b) NORTHERN SIDE 2 4 4 4 PLAN CURVATURE NOT SHOWN GENERAL NOTES 0 500 1000 1500mm TABLE I GIRDER No H2 H3 R SCALE: 500 250 GIRDERS . SEE SHEET No 4 T L 28 P BOTTOM FLANGE T 8 2 AT 2000 = 4000 2000 2000 2 AT 2000 = 4000 2000 2000 HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE SECTION 6 - 2 4 SOUTHERN SIDE 125 4 4 L 200 x 25 P L 20 P c L DIAPHRAGM FOR GIRDER TEMPORARY BRACING DETAILS.dgn .SHEET B FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.L 16 P CROSS FRAMES AND DIAPHRAGMS SHALL BE VERTICAL L 28 P TOP FLANGE CROSS FRAMES FOR DETAILS. SEE SHEET No 4 TYP 6 200 x 25 P L FOR DETAILS OF FLANGE STIFFENERS AT FIELD JOINTS. SEE SHEET No 22 x 150 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS (TYP) 6 - c OF GIRDER L 6 - cOF BOLTS FOR L TEMPORARY BRACING 1000 1920 300 360 x 28 L P TOP FLANGE cOF BOLTS FOR L TEMPORARY BRACING 1920 1000 300 9300 9300 FIGURE 25. PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 2A 722 617 500 800 2B 753 651 504 800 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 2 CAD No KP2F251B.

PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET TYP 3B 651 517 27 421 255 2025 504 800 PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 1800 SECTION 8 3 CAD No KP2F251C. SEE SHEET No 4 DIAPHRAGM AND CROSS FRAMES SHALL BE VERTICAL TYP 6 TYP 6 200 x 20 P L 200 x 20 P L R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) FOR DETAILS OF FLANGE STIFFENERS AT FIELD JOINTS. SEE SHEET No 4 T 25 P BOTTOM FLANGE L T R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE 6 BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATE FOR GIRDERS 3A AND 3B SECTION 7 2 - 4 8 - 4 4 SOUTHERN SIDE 125 5 4 ¶ OF ACCESS OPENING.dgn . SEE SHEET No c L BOLTS FOR OF 140 TEMPORARY BRACING TEMPORARY BRACING L 200 x 20 Px 4035 7 c OF GIRDER L 7 - 22 x 150 STUD WELDED SHEAR 200 x 25 Px 4400 L 360 x 25 2000 4 AT 2000 = 8000 125 2 AT 2000 = 4000 SHEAR CONNECTOR SPACING: 106 SPACES AT 250 = 26 500 GIRDER 3A 105 SPACES AT 250 = 26 250 GIRDER 3B L L2 (ALONG cOF WEB) 2500 L TOP FLANGE P 2000 560 VARIES CONNECTORS (TYP) 1500 2000 300 400 2000 NORTHERN SIDE 4 4 5 4 c OF BEARINGS L PLAN CURVATURE NOT SHOWN 8 - FIGURE 25. SEE SHEET No 1.2 L 16P 4 L 25 P TOP FLANGE CROSS FRAMES FOR DETAILS. 1(c) SOUTHERN SIDE c OF GIRDER AND BEARING L NORTHERN R 300 SIDE GENERAL NOTES 6 L 120 x 25 P L 200 x 25 P R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) BEARING ATTACHMENT 900 900 PLATE 3A 617 561 27 720 250 2047 500 800 TYP 25 P DIAPHRAGM L GIRDER No H3 H4 0 500 1000 1500mm TABLE I L1 L2 L3 R SCALE: 500 250 GIRDERS . FOR DETAILS SEE SHEET No 4 SHEAR CONNECTOR SPACING: 113 SPACES AT 250 = 28 250 GIRDER 3A 112 SPACES AT 250 = 28 000 GIRDER 3B 220 220 L L3 (ALONG cOF WEB) 1920 cOF BOLTS FOR L 200 x 25 P x 12 400 L FOR GIRDER TEMPORARY BRACING DETAILS.SHEET C FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.

. TOP FLANGES. DIAPHRAGMS AND LIFTING LUGS SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 3678-.SEE DETAIL 350 380 350 380 10 450 TYP 450 C 1800 - WELDING SYMBOLS COMPLY WITH AS 1101... HOT-DIP GALVANIZED SIZE 10 NORMAL SERIES PLAIN WASHERS R40 CORNER CUTS (TYP) SECTION 4 1 4 2 600 800 4 3 1000mm 250 x 25 PLATE DETAIL A - TO AS 1237..IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS/NZS 1554....1(d) 100 100 50 TYP 22 ¶ OF GIRDER 10 10 6 6 TYP 200 x 20 PLATE 6 6 TYP TYP 22 TYP TYP 10 10 6 175 x 25 PLATE 16 PLATE TYP 16 PLATE TYP 250 x 25 PLATE 6 6 GIRDERS .SEE DETAIL R130 HINGE BRACKET SEE DETAIL A 10 250 HINGE .3.TYP 5 26 200 40 5 6 6 HANDLE 60 0 HINGE PIN 2 REQUIRED PER COVER 10 20 30 40 50mm 50 11 - SHOP WELDS SHALL STOP 50mm SHORT OF END OF STIFFENER. 50 SECTION R100 ¶ OF GIRDER AND ACCESS OPENING 0 20 40 60 10 80 100mm 100 TYP 10 10 16 PLATE 6 6 175 x 25 PLATE 16 PLATE NO MORE THAN TWO FULL PENETRATION BUTT WELD SPLICES SHALL BE USED IN EACH GIRDER WEB TO MAKE UP THE FULL LENGTH SHOWN..1 (2 REQUIRED PER COVER) 80 100mm 0 200 PLAN 400 ACCESS OPENING COVER 4 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 0 100 200 300 400 500mm 20 10 0 20 40 60 200 100 360 180 100 100 c OF GIRDER L 360 180 100 FIGURE 25.3 ·12 x 55 LONG PIN THREAD LENGTH 35mm 6 3 ·6 x 12 LONG SLOT FOR PADLOCK TOTAL OF 4 "LOCKWOOD" PADLOCKS OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED 10 5 DRILL 4 HOLE 300 TYP 600 11 200 x 25 PLATE 6 THICK COVER PLATE 10 GP ..... ALL OTHER STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 3678-250. STEEL IN BOTTOM FLANGES SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 3678-.BEND FROM 12 BAR 6 THICK COVER PLATE 2mm CHAMFER RUBBER GASKET DRILL 18 HOLE 25 THICK FLANGE GP 3 HEXAGON NUT ISO 4034 M12-10 TO AS 1112. THE CONTRACTOR MUST SUBMIT FULL DETAILS OF METHOD OF CLAMPING 200 x 25 PLATE 6 TYP 6 PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY FORMWORK TO TOP FLANGE OF GIRDERS.SEE DETAIL 30 R5 HINGE 2 REQUIRED PER COVER HINGE BRACKET 4 REQUIRED PER COVER 50mm 30 40 INSIDE FACE OF WEB PLATE 50mm SECTION 0 100 200 9 300 400 500mm BOTTOM FLANGE 10 5 0 10 20 ·3 SPLIT PIN (2 REQUIRED PER COVER) 10 5 0 10 20 30 40 1 4 EXTERNAL FACE OF FLANGE PLATE GP 100 50 DETAIL OF TRANSITION OF BOTTOM FLANGE 5 DETAIL OF TRANSITION OF TOP FLANGE GP 5 6 THICK COVER PLATE ¶ OF ACCESS OPENING 4 THICK RUBBER GASKET SHALL BE COVER PLATE CUT FROM 6 PLATE GLUED AROUND OPENING 30 60 PLATE THICKNESSES AT FIELD WELDS PLATE THICKNESSES AT FIELD WELDS 360 180 c OF GIRDER L 360 180 100 25 THICK FLANGE TYP 22 100 100 100 GENERAL NOTES 0 100 200 300mm SCALE OR AS SHOWN. STEEL IN THE WEBS.... FIELD WELDS SHALL COMMENCE AT THESE POINTS DETAIL 0 20 40 60 B 80 ALL PADLOCKS SHALL BE KEYED ALIKE 3 KEYS SHALL BE SUPPLIED FOR EACH PADLOCK 100mm DRILL 11 HOLE R10 DRILL ·11 HOLE CUT FROM 10 PLATE R10 WELD GROUND FLUSH IN THE VICINITY OF THE STIFFENER ON INSIDE OF GIRDER EXTERNAL FACE OF FLANGE PLATE SECTION STIFFENERS AT FIELD WELDS 11 - DETAILS OF LONGITUDINAL FLANGE CUT FROM 5 PLATE R5 4 1 EXTERNAL FACE OF FLANGE PLATE WEB PLATE 20 10 B - HANDLE .SHEET D TYP PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 TYP 6 R40 CORNER CUTS-TYP 450 450 C - PHONE (02) 8837-0802 DETAIL C - R40 CORNER CUTS-TYP 1800 80 100mm FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 C - SECTION 2 1 2 3 800 1000mm 20 10 0 20 40 60 SECTION 5 1 5 3 800 1000mm 250 x 25 PLATE 0 200 400 600 0 200 400 600 200 100 200 100 CAD No KP2F251D..1... THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE . DRILLING OF TOP FLANGES IS NOT PERMITTED.dgn 4 .. 9 - 9 20 10 TYP HINGE PIN .

1 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW TABLE III . 1B.dgn . DIMENSION ’D’ INCLUDES AN ALLOWANCE FOR THE CALCULATED DEFLECTIONS SHOWN ON SHEET No .GIRDERS 1A. 2A. FIGURE 25. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS GIRDERS 2A AND 2B ’B’ SOUTHERN WEB 9317 9317 NORTHERN WEB 9283 9284 GIRDER WEB PLATES PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 GIRDER SOUTHERN WEB 1A 1B 3A 3B 890 879 754 749 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 PREPARED CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2551.REFER TO TABLE II ’A’ . GIRDER 1B DISTANCE ’X’ OFFSET ’D’ GIRDER 2A DISTANCE ’X’ OFFSET SOUTHERN WEB 2396 2372 2352 2352 2337 2322 2312 2305 2300 2298 2297 2297 0 2416 4049 4423 6430 8436 10443 12450 14457 16464 18470 18633 NORTHERN WEB 0 2407 4393 4407 6406 8406 10406 12405 14405 16404 18404 18567 2606 2606 2587 2569 2554 2541 2530 2523 2517 2517 2514 2511 ’D’ GIRDER 2B DISTANCE ’X’ OFFSET SOUTHERN WEB 0 13 2036 4059 6082 8105 10128 12150 14173 14338 16196 18633 NORTHERN WEB 0 13 2029 4045 6060 8076 10191 12107 14123 14287 16138 18567 2297 2296 2296 2295 2294 2291 2287 2282 2274 2267 2257 2247 2237 2225 2215 2215 ’D’ GIRDER 3A DISTANCE ’X’ OFFSET SOUTHERN WEB 0 1844 4262 5857 7864 9870 11876 13882 15887 17892 19897 21092 23907 25911 28053 29767 NORTHERN WEB 0 1837 4246 5836 7836 9836 11835 13835 15835 17834 19834 21833 23833 25833 27970 2511 2508 2505 2501 2495 2488 2478 2469 2455 2441 2425 2407 2388 2372 2353 2347 ’D’ GIRDER 3B DISTANCE ’X’ SOUTHERN WEB 0 1608 3630 5650 7670 9690 11708 13726 15743 17759 19775 21789 23942 25664 27751 29446 NORTHERN WEB 0 1602 3617 5631 7645 9658 11671 13683 15695 17706 19716 21726 23875 25593 27676 - GENERAL NOTES NOT TO SCALE.WEB DIMENSIONS GIRDERS 1A. 3A AND 3B ’L1’ ’L2’ NORTHERN WEB 895 884 757 752 SOUTHERN WEB 485 479 412 409 NORTHERN WEB 487 481 413 410 DESIGN DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER.REFER TO TABLE II ’L1’ 300 ’A’ .5.REFER TO TABLE II ’L2’ c OF L DIAPHRAGM 16 THICK PLATE 16 THICK PLATE 16 THICK PLATE ’L2’ ’L1’ 300 1500 1500 1500 ’D’ ’D’ ’X’ 90 ’X’ 90 ’X’ ’D’ 90 ’B’ .REFER TO TABLE III HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE 90 90 90 HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE GIRDERS 1A AND 1B DEVELOPED ELEVATION FOR VALUES OF ’D’ AND ’X’ REFER TO TABLE I FOR VALUES OF ’L1’ AND ’L2’ REFER TO TABLE IV GIRDERS 3A AND 3B DEVELOPED ELEVATION FOR VALUES OF ’D’ AND ’X’ REFER TO TABLE I GIRDERS 2A AND 2B DEVELOPED ELEVATION FOR VALUES OF ’D’ AND ’X’ REFER TO TABLE I FOR VALUES OF ’L1’ AND ’L2’ REFER TO TABLE IV TABLE I . 2B.’A’ .PLATE LENGTHS ’A’ GIRDER SOUTHERN WEB 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 28425 27618 18633 18633 29767 29446 NORTHERN WEB 30623 29773 18567 18567 27970 27676 2A 2B GIRDER TABLE IV . ALL DIMENSIONS HAVE BEEN DEVELOPED INTO THE PLANE OF THE WEB.WEB OFFSETS .DIAPHRAM OFFSET TABLE II .. 1B. 3A AND 3B GIRDER 1A DISTANCE ’X’ OFFSET ’D’ SOUTHERN WEB 2665 2637 2618 2608 2603 2593 2579 2564 2548 2532 2513 2495 2475 2454 2433 2412 2396 0 2782 4343 5025 6350 8357 10364 12370 14377 16384 18391 20398 22404 24411 26418 28016 NORTHERN WEB 0 2301 5072 6628 7304 8628 10627 12627 14627 16626 18626 20625 22625 24625 26624 28624 30216 2846 2829 2821 2813 2801 2789 2777 2764 2750 2735 2719 2702 2684 2664 2650 2645 2625 2606 OFFSET ’D’ SOUTHERN WEB 0 1335 3358 5381 7404 9427 11449 13472 15495 17518 19541 21563 23174 23586 25609 27618 NORTHERN WEB 0 1569 2253 3584 5600 7615 9631 11647 13662 15678 17693 19709 21725 23740 25345 25756 27771 29773 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.

SECTION 26 BARRIER RAILINGS .

Posts for all types of traffic barrier railings that are located on a structure where the grade of the structure exceeds 4% at any point.2. Straight panels shall be used for structures set out on horizontal curves where the radius of curvature is greater than or equal to 150 x the panel length for the longest panel used.3.3.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Barrier Railings 26 26. where the mid-ordinate offset for any panel is calculated to be less than 5mm. shall be detailed to be truly vertical for the full length of the structure.2. ie numbers of items required.1 GENERAL BARRIER RAILINGS The standard barrier types in current use by the RTA include: Steel Traffic Barrier Railings Steel Pedestrian Railings Aluminium Pedestrian Railings 26. the panel shall be detailed as being straight.2 Pedestrian Barrier Railings Refer to RTA Standard Bridge Drawings RTAB018 and RTAB019 for details of Steel and Aluminium Pedestrian Barrier Railings.1.3.2 DIMENSIONS 26. Where the radius of curvature of the structure is less than 150 x the panel length for the longest panel used.3 GEOMETRY 26. Detailing of traffic barrier railings in this instance will entail the calculation of vertical offsets from a given datum for each panel type as shown in Figure 26.2 Horizontal Curves All types of barriers on structures which are set out on a curved horizontal alignment need careful examination to ensure that the angular variation between panels can be accommodated at rail splices. 26. 26.1 Traffic Barrier Railings Refer to RTA Standard Bridge Drawings RTAB051 and RTAB052 for general details of Traffic Barrier Railings for Regular and Medium Performance Levels. the panels shall be detailed to suit the radius as appropriate however. Blank spaces are provided on these detail sheets for the addition of relevant information. 26.1 Grades and Vertical Curves Posts for all types of traffic barrier railings shall be perpendicular to the top of the concrete parapet or footway surface on which they are located in all cases where the grade of the structure does not exceed 4%. End posts and balusters for pedestrian barrier railings shall be detailed to be truly vertical in all instances. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 3 .

joints between adjacent panels shall occur at approximately the quarter point of the span between adjacent posts in the direction of travel as shown in Figure 26. Where a reduction in post spacing is required. On simply supported bridges and continuous bridges where expansion and or contraction joints are detailed. the post spacing shall be reduced rather than increased and if necessary an intermediate post spacing shall be used to reduce the visual impact of the change in spacing. joints between panels in traffic barrier railings may be placed at the most convenient locations. however as a general rule.4. For aesthetic considerations.1 Traffic Barrier Railings In all cases. the post spacing adopted should.2 Pedestrian Railings The maximum centre to centre spacing for supports in pedestrian railings shall be 1500mm.3. panel lengths should not exceed 5500mm and should not contain more than two railing posts. handling and erection.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Barrier Railings Figure 26. 26. 26. protective treatment. The maximum clear spacing between balusters in pedestrian railings shall be 130mm as defined in Clause 12. not be less than two-thirds of the post spacing used for the remainder of the structure. 26.1 Traffic Barrier Railings For ease of manufacture. in most cases. Where post spacing at the ends of structures is different to that adopted for the majority of the structure.1 – Bridge Design.4 JOINTS Bolted rather than welded joints between panels in traffic barrier railings should be used for maintenance and tolerance reasons. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB053 provides details of joints for Regular Performance Traffic Barrier Railings and RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB054 provides details of joints for Medium Performance Traffic Barrier Railings.6 PANEL LENGTHS 26.2 Pedestrian Railings OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 3 .5. Joints provided at these locations shall be detailed with a rail splice that is sufficient in length to accommodate the expected range of movement of the joint in the deck. post spacing in barrier railings shall be as even as is practical to suit the particular application and to reduce the number of different panel types to be used.2 shows the correct method for the detailing of curved traffic barrier railing panels and also illustrates the method used to calculate the mid-ordinate offset for all types of curved railing panels.5 POST SPACING 26. a joint in the railing (all types) shall be provided between the posts located either side of the joint in the deck. 26. 26.1 – Bridge Design. the form and geometry of all traffic barrier railings shall conform to the requirements of AS 5100.1(b) of AS 5100. On continuous bridges.5.6.6.

OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 3 .7 TERMINATION OF RAILINGS AT ENDS OF STRUCTURES Where traffic barrier railings terminate at a concrete end post/wing wall arrangement they shall be connected to that concrete end post or wing wall with a socket and spigot type joint. the rails shall be curved or sloped down. the ends of the rails shall be cut to match the skew.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Barrier Railings Panel lengths for pedestrian railings shall not exceed 2990mm. For skewed bridges. Other types of traffic barrier railing terminations are under investigation by the Authority. 26. Where traffic barrier railings are provided on top of an 820mm high Type F profile concrete safety barrier terminate.

1 MANAGER. SEE SHEET No.8 REQUIRED PANEL C .1 REQUIRED PLAN 4735 220 2550 1965 665 5370 2690 2015 615 3385 2550 220 248 281 PANEL D PANEL E PANEL F INSIDE ELEVATION PANEL D .. ..1 REQUIRED PANEL B .8 REQUIRED PANEL F . 177 A B B B B B B B B C ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH FROM EN TU C U R ST T A ER EN P SU TM F U B O A D R E TU C U R ST T B ER EN P SU TM F U B O A D R E ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW TO EN TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING PANELS PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 F E E E E E E E E D PANEL LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: FIGURE 26.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.3.3280 220 2445 615 2015 5370 2690 665 1965 4630 2445 220 172 281 243 PANEL A PANEL B PANEL C INSIDE ELEVATION PANEL A .1 REQUIRED PANEL E .1 REQUIRED PLAN GENERAL NOTES SCALE 200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2631.

14 REQUIRED PANEL F - PANELS SHALL BE BENT ON A CIRCULAR CURVE.3540 220 2600 720 2210 5870 2700 760 2170 4990 2600 220 PANEL A PANEL B PANEL C ELEVATION CALCULATION OF MID-ORDINATE OFFSET ’X’ ’X’ ’X’ PANEL A 1 REQUIRED PANEL B - REQUIRED 13 PANEL C- REQUIRED 1 C ’X’ PLAN 2 2 OFFSET ’X’ = R-1/2 4R .3.1/2 4x234 300 . R ON INSID E FACE OF R AIL ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW A B ENT A C B B WEST FROM B B B B B B B B B B ENT B ABUTM TO TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING PANELS PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 F E E E D PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 E E E E E E EAST E E E E E PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: PANEL LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE FIGURE 26.. SEE SHEET No .C 3530 220 2600 710 2130 5530 2700 700 2140 4960 2600 220 EXAMPLE : 2 2 FOR PANEL TYPE B : ’X’ = 234 300 .. R240 000 ABUTM PIER c L .dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2632. PLAN FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.2 MANAGER.5760 = 18 PANEL D PANEL E PANEL F ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES ’X’ ’X’ ’X’ SCALE REQUIRED 1 200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm OR AS SHOWN PANELD - 1 REQUIRED PANEL E..

INSIDE ELEVATION FIGURE 26.75L APPROX c OF JOINT L NOMINAL JOINT GAP PANEL TYPE . PANEL TYPE .25L APPROX 0.DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC SPAN BETWEEN ADJACENT POSTS = L 0...4 .

SECTION 27 BEARINGS .

hole size and spacing for dowels where applicable. thickness. Bearing types.1 Elastomeric Bearing Strips and Elastomeric Bearing Pads Sizes of these types of bearings shall conform to details given in AS 5100. other than elastomeric strip bearings.2 REDUCED LEVELS OF BEARINGS Where bearings are to be set on nominal thickness mortar pads. minor rotational movement and minor horizontal movement Expansion Bearings allow transfer of vertical loads as well as rotational and horizontal movement.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bearings 27 27. Where bearings are to be set on concrete plinths or where elastomeric pad/strip bearings are used and are set directly on the concrete surface. The calculated jacking loads and method of jacking (simultaneous) shall also be also specified on the drawings. maintenance and replacement. Fixed Bearings allow transfer of vertical and/or horizontal loads as well as rotational movement.3. Restrained Bearings allow transfer of vertical loads. Elastomeric Bearing Strips shall be detailed complete with width.1) OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 3 . the reduced level for the concrete surface shall be given. Spherical and Pot 27.3 BEARING TYPES The main types of bearings commonly used are: Elastomeric Bearing Strips and Pads Laminated Elastomeric Bearings Proprietary types such as confined Elastomers.3. 27. the reduced level for the top of the bearing shall be given so that any variation of design levels may be "taken out" in the thickness of the mortar pad. "restrained" or "expansion" and are denoted on General Arrangement drawings by the letters F. (See Figure 27. R and E. length. 27. The design position for the jacks required for the future lifting of the superstructure to replace the bearings shall be shown on the drawings. Bearings are normally referred to as either "fixed". shall be sufficiently detailed to allow for full inspection.4.1 GENERAL BEARINGS Bearings are provided in bridge structures to enable: the transmission of forces between the superstructure and the substructure relative movement between the superstructure and substructure without creating additional stresses.

Figures 27.1 shows required detailing and performance table for Non-Standard Elastomeric Bearings.e. These include confined elastomer ('POT TYPE') as well as spherical which have a combination of elastomeric. Bearings should be shown in sufficient detail to enable correct orientation and placement within the structure. size and thickness of steel plates Cover thickness to steel plates Hole details (including location and depth) Cover thickness to holes for steel plates (where hole detailed) Table of bearing performance requirements.3. Non-Standard Bearings. 95 x 20mm Thick and 125 x 25mm Thick Reference should be made to RTA Bridge Policy Circular 98/15 – “Multi Span Plank Bridges with Link Slabs – Guidelines for Bearing Selection” for guidance on the appropriate size to be used for each application. However.3(b) show the typical level of detailing required. Brand names for proprietary bearings shall not be shown on the drawings and proprietary bearings shall not be fully detailed.4 with Part Numbers from AS 5100.4 being quoted on the drawings.3. Any modifications to 'standard' bearings shall be sufficiently detailed to enable manufacture.3.3 Proprietary Bearing Types Several different types of proprietary bearings are extensively used in bridge designs.3. it is necessary to draw the outline of the bearing based on the dimension shown in the manufacturer's catalogue. The only dimensions given on the drawings shall be: OTB005 bearing height (excluding additional attachment plates) overall height of the bearing assembly including necessary attachment plates. width and thickness shall be given in all instances. metal and/or PTFE components. where used shall be sufficiently detailed to enable manufacture. length.2 Laminated Elastomeric Bearings Generally Laminated Elastomeric Bearings shall conform to AS 5100. 27. location and depth of required holes. however. Figure 27. The following information shall be given: Overall physical dimensions Number and thickness of internal rubber layers Number.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bearings Nominal bearing strip sizes are: 65 x 20mm Thick. Elastomeric Bearing Pads do not normally require detailing. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB050 shows the required level of detailing for the installation of Elastomeric Bearings where used with PSC I girders. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB033G shows the required level of detailing for the installation of Elastomeric Bearings where used with PSC Super T girders.3. i.3(a) and 27. “Standard” bearings require no specific detail except where holes are required for dowel pins etc. size. 27. Other types of proprietary bearings have combinations of metal elastomeric and/or PTFE components arranged in different forms to cater for the necessary restraints and movements. Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 3 .

washers. Standard bolts. spacing of bearing anchor bolts. Non-standard fasteners shall be drawn in detail with all necessary dimensions to enable fabrication. Attachment plates shall be shown as separate items and shall be fully detailed to enable fabrication. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 3 . or with the bridge structure where attachment plates are unnecessary.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bearings - plan dimensions of the upper and lower surfaces in contact with the attachment plates. dowels and other attachment devices for fastening bearings to attachment plates and for anchoring the bearings or attachment plates to the bridge structure shall be called up in detail.5 of this Manual).3(b). Attachment plates are required to be provided to allow for the future removal or replacement of the bearings. All necessary bolts.3. bearing performance requirements for each size and type of bearing used in the bridge structure shall be provided in a table format as shown in Figure 27. screws etc. In addition to the above. shall not be detailed separately but must be fully described. shall be used. nuts. General notes relating specifically to bearing drawings are shown on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 and where applicable. screws. (See Clause 29.

REQUIRED 0 150 300 450mm 150 75 150 75 BEARING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS CALCULATED COMPRESSIVE No OF INTERNAL RUBBER LAYERS OVERALL HEIGHT mm 10 kN/m 3 MEAN SHEAR STIFFNESS 3 CALCULATED ROTATIONAL STIFFNESS SHEAR DEFLECTION CAPACITY RATED LOAD AT ZERO ROTATION AT MAX SHEAR AT ZERO SHEAR kN kN RATED LOAD AT MAX ROTATION AS AT MAX SHEAR AT ZERO SHEAR kN kN PART No STIFFNESS AT ZERO SHEAR 10 kN/m kNm/rad mm THIS TYPE OF TABLE IS REQUIRED FOR STANDARD MODIFIED ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS AND NON-STANDARD ELASTOMERIC BEARINGS WHERE THE EXTENT OF THE MODIFICATION ALTERS THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE BEARINGS FIGURE 27.1 CAD No KP2F2731 . REQUIRED 0 150 300 450mm ELASTOMERIC BEARING (NON STANDARD) FOR BEARING PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SEE TABLE I ..4 MODIFIED AS SHOWN ..3.9140 605 13 AT 610 = 7930 65 605 25 HOLES 65 x 20 ELASTOMERIC BEARING STRIP PLAN ELASTOMERIC BEARING STRIP REQUIRED NOT TO SCALE 8 LAYERS OF 5mm THICK STEEL PLATE 38 x 10 DEEP RECESS 10 7 STEEL PLATE TYP 7 38 x 10 DEEP RECESS 10 7 7 TYP TYP 5 7 INTERNAL RUBBER LAYERS 10 124 129 SECTION NOT TO SCALE 1 - SECTION NOT TO SCALE 2 - 380 190 190 STEEL PLATES 190 380 190 STEEL PLATES 38 x 10 DEEP REC ESS IN ELASTOMER 240 38 x 10 DEEP REC ESS IN ELASTOMER 240 480 480 1 240 1 - 2 240 2 - ELASTOMERIC BEARING (MODIFIED STANDARD) AS PART NUMBER 070908R AS SPECIFIED IN AS 5100.

TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING BEARING 4 ELEVATION BEARING 1 ELEVATION BEARING 2 ELEVATION DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC (TYP) c OF BEARING L c OF BEARING L c OF BEARING L ATTACHMENT PLATE 92 TYPE T5 (SKEWED) RL ’X’ ATTACHMENT PLATE 129 TYPE T4 (SKEWED) ATTACHMENT PLATE 30 NOM RL ’X’ PLINTH MORTAR TYPE B3 (RADIAL) 137 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE T6 (SKEWED) ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B5 (RADIAL) RL ’X’ ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B4 (RADIAL) PLINTH 30 NOM MORTAR PAD HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS PAD HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 .TYP PAD 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING BEARING 6 ELEVATION BEARING 3 ELEVATION BEARING 5 ELEVATION ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW GENERAL NOTES 0 c OF BEARINGS ABUT A L c OF BEARINGS ABUT B L c OF BEARINGS AND PIER L 100 200 300mm SCALE 100 50 OR AS SHOWN. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET SEE SHEET No XX. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE KP2F2733A.M30 .TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 .3(a) 4 FROM BANGALOW 6 TO TWEED HEADS TABLE I BEARING LEVELS LOCATION ABUTMENT A 3 ABUTMENT A PIER PIER ABUTMENT B BEARING RL ’X’ MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MORTAR SHALL BE 40MPa.689 104. PAD HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 .M20 .M20 .M30 .3.235 105.8. PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 5 L BASE c 1 2 DENOTES FIXED BEARING DENOTES GUIDED SLIDING BEARING DENOTES FREE SLIDING BEARING DENOTES DIRECTION OF MOVEMENT FLAT ROUND WASHERS FOR HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL BOLTING SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 1252.M20 .TYP MORTAR 30 NOM 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED PAD 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 .dgn 30 NOM .666 102. PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS BEARING LOCATION LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: ABUTMENT B THE LENGTH OF HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS AS DETERMINED BY THE BEARING MANUFACTURER AND SHALL PROVIDE FOR FUTURE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF BEARING.8.5 AND WASHERS .M20 . ACTUAL DIMENSIONS TO BE ASCERTAINED FROM THE BEARING MANUFACTURER BEFORE ABUTMENT HEADSTOCK AND PIER COLUMN CONSTRUCTION.8. CAD No MANAGER. AND THE 1 4 2 5 3 6 102. DENOTES DIMENSIONS BASED ON THE NOMINAL HEIGHTS OF BEARINGS.TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED 90 FORMED HOLES SHALL BE GROUTED AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF BEARING ISO 4017 .5 AND WASHERS .5 MORTAR 30 NOM AND WASHERS .5 AND WASHERS . MORTAR SHALL BE DRY PACKED.242 DIMENSIONS OF THE MORTAR PADS AND/OR CONCRETE SURFACES ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY.728 104.8.727 105.8. FIGURE 27.2. SCREWS AND WASHERS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1214.c OF BEARING L c OF BEARING L c OF BEARING L RL ’X’ ATTACHMENT PLATE 167 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS ISO 4017 .5 AND WASHERS .5 AND WASHERS .TYP 8 ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE T1 179 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B1 RL ’X’ TYPE T3 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE T2 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B4 RL ’X’ MORTAR 30 NOM 92 (SKEWED) ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B2 (RADIAL) MORTAR PAD THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.8. HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS SHALL CONFORM TO AS 1110.

FOR DETAILS OF TOP ATTACHMENT PLATES. THE TRANSIT BOLTS SHALL NOT BE REMOVED UNTIL AFTER FINAL c OF BEARING L TOP PLATE TOP PLATE OF BEARING c OF BEARING PIER L ABUTMENT A OF BEARING c OF BEARING L INSTALLATION. b) THE VARIATIONS OF THE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS OF THE BEARINGS. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2734B THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.3(b) 6500 3300 870 + 21 - 0 . ALL ATTACHMENT PLATES SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE GP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS/NZS 1554 PART 1. SECTION 2 - SECTION 1 - 0 100 200 300mm 0 100 200 300mm 5 00’48" 10 33’50" BOTTOM PLATE BOTTOM PLATE OF BEARING EDGES TO BE PROTECTIVE TREATED SHALL BE ROUNDED TO A RADIUS OF 1.3.007 1 PREPARED BY GUIDED SLIDING POT TYPE 3 ABUTMENT B TRANVERSELY RESTRAINED 2500 900 415 + 45 - 0 . ANY BEARING TYPE PROPOSED SHALL COMPLY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 4 ABUTMENT A FREE SLIDING POT TYPE 2000 450 - 0 1 .007 1 AND REPLACEMENT. FROM THOSE DETAILED ARE SUCH THAT THE ALTERNATIVE BEARING ASSEMBLY CAN BE ACCOMMODATED WITHIN THE STRUCTURE.785 320 L 32 P 320 DRILL AND TAP FOR M30 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS FOR TYPE B2 AND M20 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS FOR TYPE B5 220 220 32 P L 360 285 L 32 P 220 180 130 570 DRILL AND TAP FOR M20 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS DRILL AND TAP FOR M20 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS 335 130 L 32 P 2 320 275 2 - 785 570 100 130 320 275 220 100 335 180 DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC 285 360 1 - 1 - 1 100 100 1 - 1 - 130 100 100 1 100 100 180 DRILL AND TAP FOR M30 275 275 HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS 180 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPES B2 AND B5 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B1 1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED TYPE B2. MANAGER. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT DETAILS OF PROPOSED BEARING MANUFACTURER AS REQUIRED BY THE SPECIFICATION. WELDING SYMBOLS COMPLY WITH AS 1101 PART 3.007 1 FIGURE 27. c) THE REQUIREMENT TO DESIGN AND DETAIL THE BEARING FOR FUTURE REMOVAL RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: 6 ABUTMENT B FREE SLIDING POT TYPE 2000 450 - + 45 - 1 . SUPPORTS SHALL NOT BE REMOVED UNTIL MORTAR REACHES A STRENGTH OF 40MPa. STEEL PLATES AND FLATS SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3678 GRADE 350. 1 REQUIRED TYPE B5 ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B3 1 REQUIRED ATTACHMENT PLATE TYPE B4 2 REQUIRED TAPPED HOLES FOR ATTACHMENT TO BEARING BOTTOM PLATE MAY VARY TO THAT DETAILED DEPENDING ON BEARING MANUFACTURER (TYP) 6/ 32 x 350 TYP 3 40 x 3 FLAT x 40 (TYP) GENERAL NOTES 0 100 200 300 400 500mm LONG GRADE 350 BARS TO AS/NZS 3679 WITH 45mm M30 THREAD AT ONE END TYP 10 32 x 350 LONG GRADE 350 STEEL BARS TO AS/NZS 3679 SCALE 100 50 OR AS SHOWN.007 1 WITH THE FOLLOWING: a) THE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS SHOWN IN TABLE II. THE PTFE/STAINLESS STEEL INTERFACES OF ALL BEARINGS SHALL BE HEAVILY LUBRICATED WITH AN APPROVED LUBRICANT AT TIME OF ASSEMBLY. THE BEARING ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE HELD TOGETHER WITH TRANSIT BOLTS TO PREVENT MISALIGNMENT AND DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS DURING TRANSIT AND TOP PLATE OF BEARING ERECTION. . ABUTMENT B HORIZONTAL ROTATION OF TOP PLATE OF BEARING NOT TO SCALE TABLE II BEARING PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS BEARING No LOCATION TYPE AND DESCRIPTION OF BEARING FIXED POT TYPE 1 ABUTMENT A LONGITUDINALLY AND TRANSVERSELY RESTRAINED 2 GUIDED SLIDING POT TYPE PIER TRANVERSELY RESTRAINED 2000 650 VERTICAL LOADS (kN) MAX MIN HORIZONTAL LOAD (kN) HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT LONGIT TRANS MAXIMUM ROTATION (RADIANS) No REQUIRED ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 385 TRANS 900 LONGIT - - .007 1 ATTACHMENT PLATES. INCLUDING THE PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 5 PIER FREE SLIDING POT TYPE 6500 3250 - + 21 - 1 . SEE SHEET No XX.5mm IF NO DIMENSION SHOWN. OF BEARING 100 50 100 50 90 00’00" BOTTOM PLATE OF BEARING INSTALLATION NOTES FROM TO THE TOP OF THE BEARING SHALL BE SET LEVEL TO RL’S SHOWN ON SHEET No XX AND BEARING SUPPORTED ON STEEL PACKING PRIOR TO THE PACKING OF MORTAR. STEEL FLATS SHALL BE WELDED TO ATTACHMENT PLATES PRIOR TO PROTECTIVE TREATMENT.007 1 TYPICAL POT-TYPE BEARINGS AND ASSOCIATED ATTACHMENT PLATES ARE DETAILED ON THE DRAWINGS.

SECTION 28 DECK JOINTS .

The edges of small movement deck joints on bridges do not usually have armouring.2. The function of the joint seal is to provide one or more of the following: to provide a smooth riding or walking surface across the joint gap to prevent penetration of solids into the joint gap to prevent penetration of water through the joint gap When the specified joint system to be used is not fully waterproof. the armour of its edges and a seal or cover for the joint gap. are met.3 Steel Fabricated Interlocking Finger Joints Generally.2 Compression Seal Joints The presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with the details shown in Figure 28.1 Small Movement Joints The presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with the details shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Numbers RTAB035 and RTAB035A.2 DETAILING OF JOINTS Deck joints currently used by the Authority may be divided into the following various categories: 28. provision shall be made for the protection of all elements below the joint gap.1 GENERAL DECK JOINTS Joints in bridge decks are provided to perform one or more of the following functions: to allow the deck to expand and contract in length due to changes in temperature and loading or due to the shrinkage and residual creep of the concrete to allow the ends of the deck to rotate as the deck deflects under load to allow for transverse movements on skewed and/or curved bridges to allow for any differential settlement of the substructure The majority of expansion joints consist of the joint gap. the joint shall be presented on the drawings in a detailed format to facilitate manufacture and installation. 28. Where proprietary items are detailed. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 3 . as stipulated on the drawing. the drawings shall include a suitable note to allow the Contractor to use an alternative type of joint providing that all the performance requirements. 28.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Deck Joints 28 28.2. where a proprietary item is not used and this type of joint is required.2.2. ie metal parts of girders and/or bearings from corrosion and concrete surfaces from staining. The armour of the joint edges and the joint seal can be supplied either as separate items or as a combined joint system.2. 28.

In all cases.2. 28.3. Access must be provided beneath the joint for maintenance purposes.2. If there is insufficient space beneath the joint to provide for access.4. Where WAE drawings for the existing joint installation are not available.2 Other Joint Types The rehabilitation of all bridge deck joints requires careful consideration. (b) and (c) illustrate the correct method for detailing steel fabricated interlocking finger joints and associated concrete safety barrier cover plates. the reinforcement shall be adjusted slightly to accommodate the anchoring devices where appropriate.2.2.3(a).5 Proprietary Aluminium Saw Tooth Joints This type of joint incorporates a compressed rubber seal below the saw teeth to seal the joint gap and examples of this type of joint are CIPEC Wd and ETIC EJ. 28.6 Modular Joints Modular type joints provide for large movements on larger bridges. The design of the joint must conform to the requirements of RTA Specification B316 and the joint recess shall be detailed completely to suit the type of joint used.2. cast-in anchors or other similar devices. the joint or joints shall be fully inspected and all necessary site measurements obtained prior to the detailing of OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 3 . Use of this type of joint on skewed bridges may present a hazard to traffic. provision shall be made to drain the ponding water so that the integrity of the joint is not compromised. steel interlocking finger type joints should be used. 28. dowels. the details for the location of such anchoring devices shall be clearly shown on the relevant concrete detail sheet. 28. 28. combined steel fingers and neoprene support systems (PSC-FT). Use of this type of joint is limited to straight and square bridges as the angles of the fingers are fixed. In all cases where joint systems are required to be anchored into the concrete by the use of anchor bolts. Presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with Figure 28. where there exists the possibility that water has the potential to pond behind a joint gap. Where the location of anchoring devices causes interference with the desired location of reinforcement in the concrete member. 28.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Deck Joints Figures 28.1 Small Movement Joints The method of rehabilitation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with the details shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB035B – Repair of Small Movement Joints with Sealants and RTA QA Specification B312.2.4 Elastomeric Strip Seal Joints The presentation of these types of joints shall be in accordance with Figure 28.3. the relevant WAE drawings for the bridge and the original joint should be obtained prior to the detailing of any joint rehabilitation or replacement and the WAE drawings used when undertaking a detailed inspection of the joint(s) in question and when calculating joint movements taking into account bridge configuration and articulation. ICL-NR). Transflex.3 REHABILITATION OF JOINTS 28.5. In all instances.7 Other Joint Types Joints covered by this category include moulded neoprene joints reinforced by plates and angles (Waboflex.2.

width of joint recess on both sides of the joint and the location of any fixtures used to anchor the joint as appropriate. Items to be measured accurately include span lengths and material type. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 3 . location of fixed and expansion bearings. joint opening width. Careful consideration should also be given to the condition of the fixtures used to anchor the joint as well as the condition of the material immediately adjacent to the joint recess as rehabilitation works to these items may be required to ensure that the joint replacement or rehabilitation will ensure satisfactory operation of the joint for the remaining design life of the bridge.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Deck Joints any joint rehabilitation or replacement.

1 WITH THE LOCATIONS OF THE SEAL SUPPORTS BEING ADJUSTED TO SUIT THE PROPOSED SEAL 225 MIN 10 FRONT FACE OF END OF SUPERSTRUCTURE 10 ABUTMENT CURTAIN WALL SECTION 1 - 1 - 0 100 200 300mm SECTION THROUGH EXPANSION JOINT 0 100 200 300 400 500mm 100 50 DENOTES DIMENSION AT 16 C. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2822 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. INSTALLATION OF SEAL SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN. THE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE 100 50 MOVEMENT OF THE JOINT GAP IS APPROX mm PER C. .HEAVY DUTY OPEN-CELL COMPRESSION SEAL OR EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: INSTALLATION WIDTH = mm mm mm mm COMPRESSION MOVEMENT = 10mm DEEP RECESS AT END OF DECK TO END OF COMPRESSION MIN 80 SEAL SHALL BE SEALED BEFORE INSTALLATION 5 ACCOMMODATE COMPRESSION SEAL EXPANSION MOVEMENT LENGTH = = 1 - R300 TYP EXPANSION JOINT ANGLES SHALL BE DETAILED IN ACCORDANCE WITH FIGURE 28.2. ABUTMENTS A AND B 5 10 5 FIGURE 28.2 2 0 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW EXPANSION JOINT ANGLES SPANS ? AND ? PLAN OF DECK JOINT AT ABUTMENTS A AND B COMPRESSION JOINT SEAL NOT SHOWN 0 100 200 300 400 500mm PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 100 50 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER.2.

53% (ABUTM ENT A) 2. ABUTMENT A SIMILAR 1 - 200 100 2 DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSIONS AT 16%%dC AT INSTALLATION. BOLTS SHALL BE GREASED PRIOR TO PLACEMENT. COVER PLATE TYPE E 270 70 140 110 830 190 110 140 70 ENT B) 6. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.. THE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE MOVEMENT OF THE JOINT GAP IS APPROX + –13mm PER 5%%dC.3(a) 130 ABUTMENT EXPANSION JOINTS AND COVER PLATES . DECK PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 FIGURE 28. 75 .33% (ABUTM 10 DEEP RECESS 300 FOOTWAY COVER PLATE TYPE A 410 45 ANCHOR SPACING: 16 AT 200 = 3 200 3 290 45 15 100 x 16 PLATE ATTACHED ELEVATION APPROACH SLAB TO EVERY SECOND FINGER CJ USING M8 x 28 LONG FLAT HEAD CAP SCREWS CJ CJ ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY 3 COVER PLATE TYPE C COVER PLATE TYPE B STEEL FABRICATED INTERLOCKING 1 FINGER PLATES COVER PLATE TYPE A 2 DECK ABUTMENT COVER PLATE TYPE E DECK 5 TYP 3mm THICK STAINLESS STEEL DRAINAGE TROUGH COVER PLATE AND SPLASH PLATE TYPE D SECTION 2 - 0 250 500 750mm M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS ABUTMENT M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL APPROACH SLAB COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS 10 STEEL FACRICATED INTERLOCKING FINGER PLATES AT 1 080 3 SCALE 0 250 125 GENERAL NOTES 200 400 600 800 1000mm OR AS SHOWN..M10 x 110 LONG HILTI HIS-RN ANCHOR (STAINLESS STEEL) OR EQUIVALENT. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2823A. AND .53% (ABUTM ENT A) 2.33% (ABUTM FOOTWAY RECESS TO BE LEVEL TWO PACK POLYAMIDE CURED HIGH BUILD EPOXY COATING. PLAN ABUTMENT B SHOWN. SEE SHEETS No .33% (ABUTM APPROACH SLAB APPROACH SLAB ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW M20 x 300 LONG GALVANIZED HIGH STRENGTH STEEL ANCHOR BOLTS TO AS/NZS 1252 WITH SUITABLE FERRULES.2. DECK EXPANSION JOINT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR MOVEMENT: 109mm (BRIDGE EXPANSION) 171mm (BRIDGE CONTRACTION) TOP SURFACE OF FINGER PLATES SHALL BE FINISHED WITH 2 COATS OF ANTI-SLIP.. PLASTIC SLEEVES AND 130 DECK ABUTMENT CORONET WASHERS.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. 635 445 140 50 90 5 ENT B) 6.SHEET A SECTION 1 - SECTION 3 - PREPARED DESIGN 500 750mm CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 0 125 250 500 750mm 125 0 250 DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: 250 250 MANAGER. FERRULES MUST BE FINGER TIGHT AND FIRM AGAINST PLASTIC SLEEVE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE.. M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS INSERTED INTO DIA 18 x 110 DEEP PRE-DRILLED HOLE FILLED WITH HIT-HY INJECTION MORTAR M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY SPACING : 59 SPACES AT 180 = 10 620 1 090 1 000 90 810 PARAPET TO BE LEVEL 65 M10 x 20 LONG 130 60 10 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS 10 ENT B) 6. AFTER CONCRETE HAS ACHIEVED MINIMUM 28 DAY STRENGTH BOLTS SHALL BE TENSIONED TO 145kN.53% (ABUTM ENT A) 2.

UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS LAPS ON ADJACENT BARS ON ANY ABUTMENT FACE SHALL BE STAGGERED (OFFSET) BY NO LESS THAN THE LAP LENGHT. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2823B. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. b) OTHER BARS: .ABUTMENT SIDE DRAWING RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER.2.. ABUTMENT A SIMILAR EXCEPT WHERE IN BRACKETS REINFORCEMENT MAY BE DISPLACED SLIGHTLY WHERE NECESSARY TO CLEAR ANCHOR BOLTS. 875 700 ... . 455 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 10 750 FIGURE 28. .600 802 (717) 270 3 800 230 20 65 ANCHOR BOLT SPACING: 59 SPACES AT 180 = 10 620 65 330 70 70 477 (388) 75 10 750 350 75 150 323 ANCHOR BOLTS 380 455 168 43 75 166 25 180 M20 x 300 LONG ANCHOR BOLTS DECK ABUTMENT CHAMFER LAST FERRULE LOCALLY TO SATISFY 350 15 150 COVER REQUIREMENT 350 IF NEEDED ELEVATION .. 330 CONCRETE EXPOSURE CLASSIFICATION: B1... GIRDER REINFORCEMENT AND RECESSES... SEE SHEET No .. SHOWN. . 330 EDGES SHALL BE CHAMFERED 20x20 AND RE-ENTRANT ANGLES FILLETED 20x20 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE..... DENOTES DIMENSIONS MEASURED ON GRADE.DECK SIDE SECTION 4 - 0 125 250 500 750mm 250 4 10 DEEP RECESS 75 DEEP RECESS ANCHOR BOLTS - DECK 70 GENERAL NOTES 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm 600 SCALE 200 100 OR AS SHOWN.....3 (b) ANCHOR BOLTS 75 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COVER PLATES .. . . FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.. THE MINIMUM DEVELOPMENT LENGTHS AND ANCHOR BOLTS 4 BAR SIZE: a) HORIZONTAL BARS WITH >300mm OF CONCRETE CAST BELOW THE BAR: .SHEET B PREPARED BY 380 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 11 420 PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS ELEVATION . (717) 802 70 NCF DENOTES NO CHAMFER OR FILLET. MINIMUM 28 DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE 50MPa. 500 400 . N12 N16 N20 N24 N28 N32 N36 75 DEEP RECESS LENGTHS OF LAPS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: PLAN ABUTMENT B.. . NOMINAL COVER TO REINFORCEMENT NEAREST TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE 35mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE... .

EDGES TO BE PROTECTIVE TREATED SHALL BE ROUNDED TO A RADIUS OF 1.1 40 50mm 45 50 TYP 40 TYP R 10 - SECTION 10 - PLAN 0 10 20 30 10 5 PLAN IF NO OTHER CATEGORY SPECIFIED. WELDING SYMBOLS COMPLY WITH AS 1101. BOLTS.8/TF IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 5100. THE WELD CATEGORY SHALL BE SP IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS/NZS 1554.8 TO AS/NZS 1427. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET.SHEET C PREPARED BY 146 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 6 - DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK 7 TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 10 PLATE SECTION ELEVATION 6 - SECTION 7 - SECTION 9 - PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS ELEVATION RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: COVER PLATE TYPE A 1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND COVER PLATE TYPE B 1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND COVER PLATE TYPE D 1 REQUIRED MANAGER. HIGH STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS SHALL BE PROPERTY CLASS 8.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT..2. 8 ’COUNTERSUNK HEAD’ ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREWS SHALL BE PROPERTY CLASS 4.DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO 11 SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 70 165 1 000 8 - 130 60 11 10 PLATE 635 CUT FROM 10mm 200 THICK FLOOR PLATE 140 875 200 875 11 - 11 - 50 45 DIA 11 HOLE SPACING: 16 SPACES AT 200 = 3 200 3 290 45 200 DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW PLAN COVER PLATE TYPE E 2 REQUIRED 98 SECTION 8 - ELEVATION 8 - COVER PLATE TYPE C 1 REQUIRED 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND 10 1 075 85 180 180 180 180 180 90 70 SCALE 100 50 GENERAL NOTES 0 100 200 300 400 500mm OR AS SHOWN.1. COVER PLATES TYPE A TO D FOR ABUTMENT B SHOWN. SHALL BE HOT-DIP FINGER PLATE 20 REQUIRED PER EXPANSION JOINT 40 TOTAL REQUIRED BEARING PLATE 20 REQUIRED PER EXPANSION JOINT 40 TOTAL REQUIRED 11 - GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA SPECIFICATION B241.3. ALL COMPONENTS.5mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.. NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1214. DRILL AND TAP 230 210 30 DEEP HOLE TO SUIT M8 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 510 ON EVERY SECOND FINGER FOR BEARING PLATE ATTACHMENT 200 300 70 ·60 20 240 STEEL PLATE SHALL BE GRADE 250 TO AS/NZS 3678. 140 9 50 9 - ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH 559 559 ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW PLAN FIGURE 28. 177 177 275 275 75 75 9 11 67 11 9 67 . BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE 1 REQUIRED OPPOSITE HAND CAD No KP2F2823C. EXCEPT STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS. 5 BOLTING CATEGORY FOR HIGH STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS SHALL BE 8.3(c) 218 19 805 805 805 - - - - 180 180 10 PLATE 10 PLATE 805 11 11 11 11 60 100 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COVER PLATES . WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AS GIVEN IN RTA SPECIFICATION B204. HIGH STRENGTH STEEL WASHERS SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 1252.8 TO AS/NZS 1252.6. SEE SHEET No . DAMAGED GALVANIZED SURFACES SHALL BE RENOVATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6 1 000 130 60 125 60 90 510 325 125 110 60 130 7 1 000 160 90 345 60 125 DIA 11 HOLE COUNTERSUNK TO SUIT M10 ISO METRIC MACHINE SCREW 635 11 - RTA SPECIFICATION B241. COVER PLATES FOR ABUTMENT A SIMILAR EXCEPT OPPOSITE HAND. 22 60 50 75 15 100 230 DIA 10 HOLES DIA 8 TAPPED HOLE 20 100 x 16 PLATE x 1075 LONG 50 R 25 SECTION 11 - ALL WELDING SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF AS/NZS 1554. 510 200 300 10 65 1 075 3 5 SPACES AT 180 = 900 110 50 20 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL NUTS SHALL BE PROPERTY CLASS 8 TO AS/NZS 1252.

AUSFLEX SERIES RECESS TO SUIT DECK JOINT ALUMINIUM EXTRUSION AC-AR TYPE 100F JOINT ¶ EXPANSION JOINT WITH 52 ALUMINIUM SIDE RETAINERS AND ELASTOMERIC GLAND OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT 40 INSTALLATION GAP R COVER PLATE TYPE A SEE SHEET No M20 x 180 LONG GALVANIZED HIGH STRENGTH STRUCTURAL ANCHOR BOLTS TO AS 1252 WITH SUITABLE FERRULES. JOINTS SHALL BE INSTALLED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.2.4 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. ABUTMENT B SIMILAR STEEL PLATES SHALL BE GRADE 250 TO AS 3678. PLAN ABUTMENT A SHOWN. TAPPED INTO DIA 12 x 43 DEEP PRE-DRILLED HOLE AND EXPANDED USING THE CORRECT SETTING TOOL AND HAMMER 4 REQUIRED PER COVER PLATE ANCHOR BOLTS BOTH SIDES) SECTION 1 10 RECESS FOR 40 CELLULAR POLYSTYRENE STRENGTH HAS BEEN ACHIEVED. SLOTTED COUNTERSUNK HEAD SCREWS SHALL CONFORM TO AS/NZS 1427. EDGES TO BE PROTECTIVE TREATED SHALL BE ROUNDED TO A RADIUS OF 1. 75 THICK ASPHALT PERMANENT SEAL ELEMENT TO BE INSTALLED IN ONE LENGTH. ANCHOR BOLT SPACING: 23 SPACES AT 200 = 4 600 APPROACH SLAB 100 100 ANCHOR BOLT SPACING 23 SPACES AT 200 = 4 600 COVER PLATE (TYP) M10 x 20 LONG STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERSUNK HEAD MACHINE SCREWS 0 100 SECTION 2 200 300mm 2 5 40 35 4 REQUIRED PER COVER PLATE 100 50 COVER PLATE 125 ABUTMENT TYPE B 300 COVER PLATE 300 595 TYPE A 125 1 - 595 35 40 5 1 - 240 10 CHAMFER OF TRAFFIC DIRECTION 10 RECESS 10 RECESS DECK 10 CHAMFER 240 40 40 GENERAL NOTES 2 SCALES 250 125 0 250 500 750mm OR AS SHOWN. DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSION AT 20 C. THE CALCULATED TEMPERATURE MOVEMENT OF THE JOINT GAP IS APPROX 1mm PER –3 C . BOLTS SHALL BE SET IN PLACE USING A TEMPLATE. ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER. PLASTIC SLEEVE FERRULES MUST BE FINGER TIGHT AND FIRM AGAINST PLASTIC SLEEVE PRIOR TO DIA 16 BARS RUNNING LONGITUDINALLY WITH JOINT (TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE.dgn . 0 15 COVER PLATE TYPE B SEE SHEET No 100 THREADS OF BOLTS SHALL BE 90 LUBRICATED WITH GREASE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF FERRULES. + - FIGURE 28. MINIMUM BOLT TENSION SHALL BE 145kN. BOLTS SHALL BE TIGHTENED VIA THE SNUG TIGHT PLUS PART TURN METHOD IN ACCORDANCE WITH AS 1511 AFTER ADEQUATE CONCRETE M10 x 40 LONG HILTI HKD-SR ANCHOR (STAINLESS STEEL) OR EQUIVALENT. ALL STEEL COMPONENTS EXCEPT STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS SHALL BE HOT-DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATION.5mm UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2824.

1 - SOUTHERN PARAPET ABUTMENT A AND B STEEL BAR SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3679 GRADE 250. DEPENDING ON THE PROPOSED JOINT. DETAILS OF THE BAR DIMENSIONS AND ARRANGEMENT IN RELATION TO THE JOINT ANCHOR BARS AND DETAIL A - PLATES SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE PRINCIPAL PRIOR TO CASTING ABUTMENT SEGMENTS. 1000 500 FIGURE 28. ANCHORAGE DETAILS.END OF WING WALL 7/·12 D500N BARS EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS ·12 D500N BAR AT 150 EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS ·12 D500N BAR AT 150 EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS WHERE CONTROL BOXES ARE LOCATED THIS BAR SHALL BE CUT MODULAR OR MULTI-ELEMENT 6/·12 D500N BARS EXTENDING ALONG FULL LENGTH OF JOINT RECESS 100 END OF PARAPET RECESS SHALL BE FILLED TO DECK 380 TYPE DECK JOINT LEVEL WITH 50MPa CONCRETE WHERE CONTROL BOXES ARE LOCATED THESE BARS SHALL BE CUT ASPHALT ABUTMENT REINFORCEMENT DECK REINFORCEMENT ABUTMENT 280 ABUTMENT DECK DECK SECTION 2 - ANCHOR BARS WELDED TO JOINT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE JOINT MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATION DECK REINFORCEMENT EXTENDING INTO DECK JOINT RECESS SHOWN ONLY 0 100 200 300 400 500mm SECTION 1 - 100 50 GENERAL NOTES SCALES AS SHOWN.75mm PER+ C. PLATES AND REINFORCEMENT 200 85 DECK REINFORCEMENT EXTENDING INTO DECK JOINT RECESS SHOWN ONLY 0 100 200 300 400 500mm WITHIN THE DECK JOINT RECESS AND CAST-IN SUPPORTS FOR CONTROL BOXES. HOWEVER THE ANCHORAGE CAPACITY SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN THAT DETAILED.2. THESE DIMENSIONS MAY VARY. + CALCULATED JOINT MOVEMENTS ARE 2. A TYPICAL MODULAR TYPE DECK JOINT HAS BEEN DETAILED. ALL STEEL SURFACES OF THE DECK JOINT (INCLUDING ANCHOR BARS AND PLATES) SHALL BE COATED WITH AN INORGANIC ZINC SILICATE PRIMER AFTER DECK JOINT AT ABUTMENT A 0 1000 2000 3000mm 2 200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm FABRICATION (SEE SPECIFICATION). MAY BE VARIED TO SUIT THE PROPOSED JOINT. 1 MODULAR DECK JOINT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR MOVEMENT: (i) +120mm (JOINT EXPANSION) RELATIVE TO DIMENSIONS AT TIME OF JOINT INSTALLATION 465 3% 3% 185 -120mm (JOINT CONTRACTION) (ii) MAXIMUM CLEAR GAP BETWEEN TRANSVERSE RAIL MEMBERS = 85mm.5 SOUTHERN SIDE MODULAR OR MULTI-ELEMENT TYPE DECK JOINT A 1 2 6% 6% 465 cOF CONTROL BOXES L NORTHERN SIDE ISSUE B DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW 200 200 185 285 EXPANSION JOINTS PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET 285 DECK JOINT RECESS PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 DETAIL 1 2 - B PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS DECK JOINT AT ABUTMENT B 0 1000 2000 3000mm NORTHERN PARAPET ABUTMENT B 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm DRAWING ISSUE STATUS: MANAGER. DECK JOINT ANCHORAGE REINFORCEMENT EXTENDING FROM THE DECK AND 285 DECK JOINT RECESS ABUTMENT INTO THE RECESS SHALL BE DETAILED BY THE DECK JOINT MANUFACTURER TO SUIT THE PROPOSED DECK JOINT. 85 200 THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT. THE WIDTH OF THE JOINT SHALL - MODULAR OR MULTIELEMENT c OF CONTROL BOXES L 2 - A - 285 BE ADJUSTMENT FOR THE SUPERSTRUCTURE DURING INSTALLATION. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS 1000 500 200 100 SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F2825 . DETAILS OF ANY PROPOSED ALTERNATIVE MODULAR JOINT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE PRINCIPAL AT THE TIME OF TENDER. INCLUDING ANCHOR BARS. DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSION AT 16 200 C. 100 50 NORTHERN SIDE 1 TYPE DECK JOINT SOUTHERN SIDE 200 DENOTES NOMINAL DIMENSIONS ASSUMED FOR A TYPICAL MODULAR TYPE JOINT. STEEL PLATE SHALL CONFORM TO AS 3678 GRADE 250.

SECTION 29 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK .

on a separate sheet. Metalwork dimensions shall be given to the nearest 0.1 GENERAL Miscellaneous metalwork items used in bridge construction include : Protection Angles (at abutments and approach slabs) Expansion Joint Angles Dowels Anchor Bolt Assemblies Bearing Attachment Plates Bearing Cover Plates Concrete Safety Barrier Cover Plates (for expansion joints) Each of the above items requires adequate detailing for both fabrication and installation and as such. The total number required of each item shall be shown. if required. care shall be taken to observe the following : Materials shall be designated in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard eg Steel plate shall be to AS/NZS 3678-300 Steel sections shall be to AS/NZS 3679. or.3 All welding shall comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 1554. if required. located on the sheet where these items are detailed.1mm for cross section dimensions and to the nearest 1mm for length.1 unless GP welds are specified by the designer A suitable note to describe the required protective treatment of items eg Protection angle assemblies shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Specific requirements for each of the above items are described in the following sub-clauses. Ideally. When detailing items for fabrication. 29.1-300 Overall dimensions. provision shall be made on the relevant concrete detail sheet. corner radii and the thicknesses of plates etc shall be shown.2 PROTECTION ANGLES AND EXPANSION JOINT ANGLES The outline of protection angles and expansion joint angles shall be shown in-situ on the various views and sections on the relevant concrete detail sheets. These notes shall be supplemented by additional notes. shall be used. Welding symbols comply with with AS 1101. hole diameters. - - General Notes for the fabrication and protective treatment of minor fabricated steel items are provided on RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB029 and where appropriate. the fabrication details for the angle assemblies should be shown on the sheet for that part of the structure OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 4 .RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual Miscellaneous Metalwork 29 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK 29. as well as dimensions for location of holes.1 Weld category shall be SP in accordance with AS/NZS 1554.

The location and projection of the dowel bar in relation to the concrete surface shall be detailed. see Sheet No 12 Where bolts are cast into the concrete. a suitable note referencing the location of the bolt assembly detail shall be given and a general view of the assembly shall be shown. eg For details of anchor bolt assembly. holes for formwork attachment and air holes (in accordance with Chief Bridge Engineer Circular Number 90/7).2. dowel bars may be fixed into formed holes and in these cases the diameter. 29. Figure 29. Where this is not possible. a general view of the assembly shall be shown with all components fully labelled. in close proximity to the item that they are required to anchor or fix. Where non standard bolt assemblies are used and cannot be adequately described. Where dowel bars are fixed into formed holes. 29. where this is possible. RTA Standard Bridge Drawing Number RTAB030 provides details of the correct size and location for shear connectors..3 DOWELS AND DOWEL CAP ASSEMBLIES Dowel bars shall be fully detailed on the concrete drawing for that part of the structure in which they will be located. a suitable note referring to the filling of the holes shall also be included. the location. the ends of protection angles shall be cut to match the skew angle. In the case of skewed bridges. provided that all the necessary details of the assembly. ie thread length.1 shows the correct method for the detailing of protection angles and and expansion joint angles.RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual Miscellaneous Metalwork that the assembly will be located on. the ends of the protection angles and expansion joint angles shall be carefully examined to ensure that they do not interfere with the correct placement of concrete safety barrier reinforcement.4 BOLT ASSEMBLIES Bolt assemblies need not be fully detailed where the assembly being used is comprised of standard components. Alternatively. Where the detailing of the assembly is not included on the relevant concrete detail sheet a suitable note shall be placed on the concrete detail sheet to reference the detailing of the assembly eg For details of protection angles see Sheet No 12. length and projection of the bolt with relation to the concrete surface shall be shown on the concrete detail sheet for that part of the structure that the assembly is located in. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 4 . For other applications. nut or nuts and washers etc are stated on the drawing with the component that they are required to anchor or fix. depth and location of the holes shall be clearly detailed in conjunction with the details of the dowel bars themselves.0 metres and standard approach slab applications is shown in RTA Standard Bridge Drawing No RTAB036 and it must be used where appropriate. refer to Chief Bridge Engineer Circular 98/15. Where interference is caused by leaving the ends of protection angles square. The correct method of detailing dowel bar cap assemblies for plank deck bridges with spans up to and including 18.

29. The fixing of top attachment plates is dependant upon the type of structure in which they will be located and may be grouped into two broad categories: For concrete bridges. Where anchor bolts are to be placed into formed holes. a suitable cross reference shall be given eg For details of bearing cover plates. they can be either cast-in or placed in formed holes. The method of fixing bottom attachment plates to the structure varies and may be any of the following: Cast directly into the concrete Fixed into formed holes by the use of dowels welded to the bottom surface Fixed to cast-in anchor bolts In each of the above cases. as appropriate.6 BEARING COVER PLATES Where bearing cover plates are used. including Property Class.7 OTB005 CONCRETE SAFETY BARRIER COVER PLATES FOR EXPANSION JOINTS Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 4 . - Care shall be taken to ensure that the holes provided in the attachment plates for the attachment of the bearings match those of the bearing to be used. the anchorage requirements shall be shown and a suitable reference shall be made on the concrete detail sheet. Where this method is used it is appropriate to refer to bolt assemblies on the drawings as Bolt Assembly Type A etc. the location. 29. In all cases where attachment plates are used. it is preferred that a Bolting Schedule (in the form of a table) be included in the drawings. fabrication and erection details should generally be shown on the relevant concrete detail sheet. see Sheet No 15 29. the top attachment plate is normally bolted to the bearing and fixed directly into that part of the structure immediately above the bearing by the use of dowels attached to the top of the plate. For steel girder bridges.RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual Miscellaneous Metalwork In the case of anchor bolts. shall be carefully examined to ensure the placing of both the attachment plate and the reinforcement can be achieved. washer type and the number required for each complete assembly. The Bolting Schedule should contain all necessary information about all of the bolt assemblies required. thread length if non standard. Where this is not possible. Where there are a large amount of differing bolt types and lengths required. diameter and depth of the holes shall be clearly detailed on the concrete drawing together with a suitable note referring to the filling of the formed holes subsequent to bolt placement. the top attachment plate may be either welded or bolted to the girder and in this case the attachment shall be fully detailed on the girder sheets. Bolting Category. nut type or types. the reinforcement in the substructure or superstructure item.5 BEARING ATTACHMENT PLATES Fabrication details for both top and bottom attachment plates shall be detailed with the bearing to which they will be attached. length.

See Figure 28.3 (c) for the required level of detailing for concrete safety barrier cover plates. Fabrication details for concrete safety barrier cover plates shall include all the necessary dimensions and bend radii together with hole diameters for the selected method of fixing cover plates to the structure. due to calculated ultimate effects. the top surface of the cover plate is flush with the concrete surface on each side of the joint which it covers.RTA Structural Drafting Manual and Detailing Manual Miscellaneous Metalwork Concrete safety barrier cover plates for expansion joints shall be provided where the expansion joint gap. is greater than 50mm. Where possible. the cover plates shall be detailed on the same sheet as the expansion joint to which they relate and as a general rule they shall be detailed to be fixed normal to the concrete safety barrier regardless of the grade on the deck.2. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 4 . The minimum plate thickness for expansion joint cover plates shall be 10mm unless a thicker plate is specified by the design engineer. Recesses provided in the concrete for cover plates shall be deep enough to accommodate the plate thickness used. Cover plates shall be detailed to ensure that once fitted. Details for the fixing of the cover plates to the structure ie cast-in ferrules. cast-in anchors etc shall be provided on the appropriate concrete detail sheet.

1 CAD KP2F2921 .8 SLOTTED CSK HEAD. REQUIRED AT ABUTMENT A .4.REQUIRED 2 - 50 25 105 SPACING OF STUDS. 0 50 100 150mm 50 25 150 FIGURE 29. MACHINE SCREWS AND10 AIR BLEED HOLES : 17 SPACES AT 250 = 4250 90 50 25 10 AIR HOLE ROUNDED TO R10 90 x 150 x 10 ANGLE 10 AIR BLEED HOLES 40 60 120 90 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLES 170 230 16 x 150 LONG 16 HOLE SPACING : 2 SPACES AT 2125 = 4250 STUD WELDED SPACING OF STUDS : 16 SPACES AT 250 = 4000 4465 SHEAR CONNECTORS MACHINE SCREWS TO AS/NZS 1427 2 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLE 20 x 6 FLAT x 4465 PLAN M6 x 35 . HEXAGON NUT ISO 4032-M6-8 AND EXPANSION JOINT ANGLE ....1 - 105 SPACING OF STUDS AND10 AIR BLEED HOLES : 17 SPACES AT 250 = 4250 90 50 90 x 90 x 10 ANGLE 10 AIR BLEED HOLES 25 10 AIR HOLE ROUNDED TO R10 40 50 150mm 16 x 150 LONG 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLES 170 230 16 HOLE SPACING : 2 SPACES AT 2125 = 4250 SPACING OF STUDS : 16 SPACES AT 250 = 4000 4465 STUD WELDED SHEAR CONNECTORS 16 FORMWORK ATTACHMENT HOLE SECTION 1 - 1 - PLAN 0 50 100 PROTECTION ANGLE . ACTUAL DIMENSIONS SHALL BE ADJUSTED IF NECESSARY TO MATCH THE ACTUAL HEIGHT OF SEAL BEFORE FABRICATION OF THE EXPANSION JOINT ANGLE. REQUIRED AT ABUTMENT B 6mm STEEL WASHER SECTION 2 - DIMENSION IS BASED ON 100 HIGH COMPRESSION JOINT SEAL.2.

SECTION 30 BRIDGE WIDENINGS .

In some cases this will necessitate reversing the conventional rules of orientation as stated in Clause 18. Dimensioning of the widened work shall be shown in relation to a Control Line and NOT from the centreline of the existing bridge or any part thereof.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bridge Widenings 30 BRIDGE WIDENINGS 30. 30.1. The orientation of the General Arrangement sheet for a structure that is widened on one side only shall be such that the widening is shown on the Elevation face.2 DRAWINGS The General Arrangement shall be prepared in accordance with Section 21 of this Manual.3 LINEWORK AND SHADING The existing structure shall be depicted by a thin double dashed line and the extent of the widening shall be depicted by a thick continuous line as defined in Section 7 of this Manual.1.4 of this Manual.5 of this Manual and it is as illustrated in Figure 30.1.2. it is unnecessary to fully detail the existing structure. Parts of the existing structure to be demolished shall be depicted by hatching.2 respectively. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 1 .1 GENERAL Drawings for bridge widenings prepared by the Authority or by Consultants for Authority shall follow the same format as that for a new bridge with the set of drawings being in the order as stated in Clause 4.1 and 30. When detailing bridge widenings. however sufficient detail shall be shown and the treatment fully described in order that the extent of the works can be clearly ascertained. Detail drawings shall show the following : All necessary details for the construction of the new work Details of the joint between the existing structure and the new work All sections of the existing structure which are to be demolished as well as the dimensions for and extent of the demolition A note stating that all dimensions shall be verified on site and that they shall be adjusted to suit the actual Work-as-Executed dimensions of the existing structure Stages of construction and widths available for traffic at each stage Provision and removal of any temporary barriers 30. . The method of depicting work to be demolished shall be noted on the General Arrangement sheet under the General Notes and shall be consistent throughout the entire set of the drawings. The description of the work on the cover sheet and in the title block on each sheet shall include the word "WIDENING" as shown in figures 30.

BRIDGE DESIGN TRAFFIC BARRIER PERFORMANCE LEVEL: REGULAR EXISTING BRIDGE: 1964 BRIDGE No: 1656 REGISTRATION No OF PLANS: 0220 085 BC 0111 Penguin under Licence to RTA by Lands Department NSW 8 9 100 10 11 USE 3.dgn 0220 085 BC 0956 ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION SHEET No 1 No OF SHEETS 21 ISSUE A .SHEET B ABUTMENTS CONCRETE .5mm TEXT BRIDGE SITE 5mm DIA MIN PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING FIGURE 30.DETAILS BAR SHAPES DIAGRAM WIDENING: 2006 DESIGN FILE No: 6M2049 DESIGN STANDARD: AS 5100 .SHEET B ABUTMENT A REINFORCEMENT .SHEET A ABUTMENT B REINFORCEMENT .SHEET A ABUTMENT A REINFORCEMENT .0km NORTH OF CESSNOCK USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT WIDENING USE 10mm TEXT USE 5mm TEXT SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 1 2 COVER SHEET GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PILES AND PILE LAYOUT ABUTMENTS CONCRETE .SHEET C ABUTMENT A REINFORCEMENT .SHEET C DECK .SHEET A DECK .SHEET C ABUTMENT B REINFORCEMENT .1 LOCALITY PLAN USE 5mm TEXT THE BRIDGE SITE IS APPROXIMATELY 220km BY ROAD FROM SYDNEY USE 3.SHEET B DECK .1.PANELS CYCLIST RAILING .USE 15mm CLOSED TEXT ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 220 ALLANDALE ROAD USE 10mm TEXT CITY OF CESSNOCK USE 20mm TEXT CLOSED TEXT BRIDGE OVER POKOLBIN CREEK AT 5.SHEET D CYCLIST RAILING .SHEET A ABUTMENTS CONCRETE .5mm TEXT CAD No KP2F3011.SHEET B 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ABUTMENT B REINFORCEMENT .5mm TEXT 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 USE 7mm TEXT DESIGNED AND PRODUCED UNDER A QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFIED AS COMPLYING WITH ISO/AS 9001 BY AN ACCREDITED CERTIFICATION BODY REGISTRATION No OF PLANS USE 5mm TEXT USE 2.SHEET C PIERS USE 5mm TEXT 100 3 4 5 6 7 9m SPAN PSC PLANK DECK .

734 ¶ OF EXISTING BRIDGE THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.000 RL 59.068 RL 59.0% STAGE 2 650 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER STAGE 1 NEW CONCRETE 3.5 TO 1 BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 EXISTING BRIDGE S S S S S 58.444 CH 5 232.770 PILE ELEVATION 58.463 END OF DECK ABUTMENT A ABUTMENT A WIDENING EXISTING VARIES 10 TO 45 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45.820 232.206 (INCLUDING AFFLUX) R R 1.00 56.820 RL 59.444 56.5 56.220 205.A (TYP) 9 450 28 050 9 150 9 450 FROM CESSNOCK UPSTREAM 0.770 RL 59.464 CH 5 214. COMBINED SYSTEM OF WEARING SURFACE AND SUITABLE BITUMINOUS EXISTING GUARD FENCE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE.00 59.00 54. 5 TO R R 2 000 YEAR HFL RL 58.1" ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH CONTROL LINE MC01 RL 59. DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES 59.2 SENIOR MANAGER.000 CHAINAGE IN CONTROL LINE MC00 204.R132.335 E 345 285.457 RL 59.000 SPAN 3 59.5 OR AS SHOWN.5 54.500 END OF DECK 59.00 57.00 54. NAME PLATE FOR EXISTING UTILITIES SEE DRAWING REGISTRATION No 0220 085 BA 3799.565 RL 59.00 55. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No 2 ISSUE A CAD No KP2F3012.00 55.420 100 YEAR HFL RL 57.00 56.5 T O1 S 2 TO 1 1.00 SECTION 1 - G 0 G 1000 2000 3000mm G G G G GASMAIN G G G G G 1000 500 WATERMAIN W W W W W W W 1 W W W W W W W W W W GENERAL NOTES 0 1 2 3 4 5m SCALE 1 0.00 NAME PLATE 59.220 CH 5 232.00 54.000 DESIGN SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 APPROX EXISTING SURFACE LEVEL ON CONTROL LINE MC00 SPAN 2 59.067% 500 6 105 12 630 11 630 5 525 CONTROL LINE MC00 DOWNSTREAM 500 2 160 NOM 3 945 NOM VARIES ¶ OF EXISTING BRIDGE 970 TO 1015 1.463 FOR CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE SEE SHEET No 6 CONTROL LINE MC00 BEARING 338%%d 43’ 44.451 N 6 371 036. CH 5 205. 5 T O 1 WIDENING 1 RL’s ALONG EXISTING EXISTING GUARD RAILS AND KERB TO BE DEMOLISHED APPROX EXISTING SURFACE DECK GUTTER FLOW LINE LEVEL TEMPORARY TRAFFIC BARRIER 75 THICK ·100 CONDUIT ASPHALT 3.100 RL 59. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS MANAGER.00 S S S S S SEWERMAIN S PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 S S S S S 58. CH 5 204.500 CONTRACT LEVEL RL 45.00 57.9 53.5 56.457 SPAN 1 COLUMN STAGE 1 STAGE 2 59.00 SEWER MANHOLE PLAN FIGURE 30.464 56.1.445 CH 5 223.00 54.00 58.370 214.00 55.TO BRANXTON W BEAM TO THRIE BEAM TRANSITION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RTA DRAWING No MD.00 57.5 APPROX SURFACE LEVEL 5km 232.00 56.445 END OF DECK ABUTMENT B ABUTMENT B ¶ OF PIER 2 ¶ OF PIER 1 WIDENING EXISTING CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.00 56.00 CHAINAGES AND REDUCED LEVELS ARE IN METRES REDUCED LEVELS ARE RELATED TO AUSTRALIAN HEIGHT DATUM.00 WIDENING GENERAL ARRANGEMENT PREPARED BY CLIENT HUNTER REGIONAL OFFICE 59 DARBY STREET NEWCASTLE LOCKED BAG 30 NEWCASTLE NSW 2300 PHONE (02) 4924-0240 FACSIMILE (02) 4924-0344 POKOLBIN CREEK 2 TO 1 1.00 W 1 W W W W W W W W PREPARED DESIGN CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS WATERMAIN W W W W W W W W 0220 085 BC 0956 RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: FOR CONSTRUCTION DRAWING 1656 57.500 END OF DECK 59.094 RL 59.dgn .087 EXISTING MEMORIAL CROSS TO BE RELOCATED ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW MAIN ROAD No 220 CITY OF CESSNOCK BRIDGE OVER POKOLBIN CREEK AT 5.5 59.00 55.0 km NORTH OF CESSNOCK 59.451 PSC PLANKS DATUM RL 44.565 223.B04.5% OVERLAY CONTRACT LEVEL RL 47.0% 2.370 RL 59.

SECTION 31 BRIDGE SAFETY SCREENS .

3 and RTA Technical Direction No TD 2002/RS02. Posts for all types of bridge safety screens that are located on pedestrian structures shall be detailed to satisfy the client's requirements with respect to shape. the necessity to allow for offsets in panels around large radius curves is not usually warranted.4 Curvature of Posts and Screens Safety screen adjacent to carriageways must provide clearances as specified in Section 6 of the RTA Road Design Guide. to which moderately flexible mesh panels are attached. Safety screens can be included in either the design of new bridges or specifically designed for retro-fitting to existing bridge stocks.2 Height Height requirements shall be in accordance with AS 5100.1. 31.2 GEOMETRY 31.1 – Clause 12.2.2.2. however the requirements of RTA Technical Direction TD 2002/RS02 and AS 5100.placed behind traffic barrier railings close to the traffic face Curved Inwards. Excessive curvature of posts and panels shall be avoided so that the functionality of the safety screen is not compromised.1 GENERAL BRIDGE SAFETY SCREENS The bridge safety screen types in current use by the Authority include: Vertical or Curved Outwards .1 Grades and Vertical Curves Posts for all types of bridge safety screens shall be perpendicular to the top of the concrete safety barrier or footway surface on which they are located in all cases where the longitudinal grade on the structure does not exceed 4% at any point.3 Horizontal Curves As safety screens are made up of individual posts or frames.1 – Clause 12.used on pedestrian bridges over roads and railways as required by RTA Technical Direction No TD 2002/RS02 and may incorporate handrailings. The minimum requirements for safety screens are set out in AS 5100. This may be achieved by curving the posts and mesh panels outwards. A typical example is shown in Figure 31. 31. 31. Typical examples of retrofitting safety screens to existing structures are shown in Figure 31. height and orientation.1.1 shall be strictly adhered to in all cases. Posts for all types of bridge safety screens that are located on a bridge structure where the longitudinal grade on the structure exceeds 4% at any point.placed behind pedestrian barrier railings on bridges with footways Enclosed .RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bridge Safety Screens 31 31. 31.4.2. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 1 of 4 . shall be detailed to be truly vertical for the full extent of the safety screen.3 and in RTA Technical Direction No TD 2002/RS02.

is shown in Figure 31.4.3.1 Retrofitting application requirements Where safety screens are retrofitted to existing bridge structures. See Figure 31. provided at these locations shall be detailed in accordance with the example shown in Figure 31. A typical lap detail is shown in Figure 31.3. The location of all existing bridge furniture shall be obtained from Work-As-Executed drawings for the subject structure. 31. Survey items should include: Existing anchor bolt locations for both traffic and pedestrian railings Inside and outside top edge of concrete parapets Outside top edge of concrete at footways (if applicable) Existing lighting column locations (if applicable) Expansion joint locations and open width Safety screen posts shall be located to ensure that the minimum clear distance between existing bridge traffic barrier railing and/or pedestrian barrier railing base plates and the safety screen post base plate is not less than 75mm. at their cost. Where Work-As-Executed drawings for the subject structure are not available. safety screen elements shall not be connected to any existing bridge furniture (ie traffic barrier railings or pedestrian railings). at 300 mm maximum centres. post spacing for bridge safety screens shall be as even as is practical to avoid clashing with any existing bridge furniture.3 JOINTS Where top steel mesh panels overlap bottom steel mesh panels. Safety screen furniture installed along the outer edge of bridge structure adjacent to pedestrian barrier railings shall be placed to ensure that the minimum clear distance between the pedestrian barrier railing and the safety screen is not less than 80mm. Should there be any doubt regarding the location of existing bridge furniture. For aesthetic considerations. The preferred method of interconnecting mesh panels at posts. Adjacent mesh panels shall be affixed to each other using suitable stainless steel ties or equivalent. a joint in the safety screens shall be provided at each and every joint in the deck. 31. the minimum lap shall be 150 millimetres. in the longitudinal direction. Joints between mesh panels. the approved design drawings for the structure shall be used to locate existing bridge furniture and an appropriate note added to the drawing stating that the location of existing bridge furniture shall be confirmed on site prior to the commencement of fabrication and installation of the safety screen posts.4. to enable posts to be located appropriately.4 POST SPACING Post spacing for bridge safety screens shall not exceed 3 metres under any circumstances.1.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bridge Safety Screens 31. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 2 of 4 . On simply supported bridges and continuous bridges where expansion and or contraction joints are detailed. the client shall be requested to provide an electronic site survey of the structure.3.

7 TERMINATION OF SAFETY SCREENS AT ENDS OF STRUCTURE The termination point for bridge safety screens is dependent upon actual site conditions and client requirements.3. Mushroom Head Stainless Steel Spikes – 6. Clause 1. The preferred method of attachment of end mesh panels to end posts is shown in Figure 31. Where post spacing at the ends of structures is different to that adopted for the majority of the structure.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bridge Safety Screens The base plate for safety screen posts shall not protrude any further into the footway area than existing bridge furniture to ensure that they do not cause a trip hazard to pedestrian traffic.8 END TREATMENT The end treatment of the safety screen shall be in accordance with client requests where it is possible and practical within the overall design of the safety screen.5 STEEL MESH PANEL SIZES A typical top steel mesh panel. the 6m minimum extension of the safety screens beyond the road shoulder is measured perpendicular to the road shoulder and not along the safety screen. A typical bottom steel mesh panel. incorporating transom beams.1 of RTA Technical Direction TD 2002/RS02 states that “the barriers on the overbridge shall extend at least 6m beyond the width of the underlying roadway pavement and shoulders. 31.3. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 3 of 4 .” For skewed bridge crossings. Consideration shall be given to road/bridge geometry. 31. 31. proximity to road or railway beneath structure. 6mm diameter or as requested by the client. Fasteners shall be affixed to posts using Vandal Proof Stainless Steel Self Drilling Fasteners.5mm diameter x 50 long or suitable equivalent. rather than the typical 50mm x 50mm mesh shown in Figure 31.3. 31.3. product Code MLT1S-CP or suitable equivalent. is detailed in Figure 31. Mesh panels shall be affixed to the top concrete surface of parapets or footways at a spacing not exceeding 300mm using Panduit Stainless Steel Ties. Stainless steel ties shall be affixed to concrete surfaces using M6 x 50 Dynabolts. is detailed in Figure 31.6 FIXING OF STEEL MESH PANELS Mesh panels shall be affixed to posts at a spacing not exceeding 300mm using Smorgon ARC product code CLUG fasteners or suitable equivalent. Consideration may be given to enclosing the full length of the overbridge. the post spacing shall be reduced rather than increased and if necessary an intermediate post spacing shall be used to reduce the visual impact of the change in spacing. other structures landing on the bridge (eg stairs and ramps) as well as any other consideration requested or directed by the client. incorporating transom beams and an added leg to enable the attachment of the panel to the concrete surface. Railway authorities may require a 25mm x 25mm mesh at certain locations on bridges over railways.

Where applicable. additional design and detailing of posts and connections are required as nominal standard designs do not allow for the additional loading caused by the attachment of decorative steel mesh panels. the requirements for these alternative screens shall generally be in accordance with information provided in this section. OTB005 Issue 1 – Revision 0 (09 July 2007) Page 4 of 4 .10 ALTERNATIVE SAFETY SCREENS The requirements in this section refer to typical galvanised mesh screens used by the Authority.RTA Structural Drafting and Detailing Manual Bridge Safety Screens 31.9 APPLICATION OF DECORATIVE PANELS Bridge safety screens may. at the client request. Each case shall be examined separately and detailed accordingly. Where decorative screens are to be added to safety screens. Urban design requirements may require alternative screens to be used. 31. carry additional steel mesh panels for decorative purposes.

1 70 PREPARED BY BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET 20 125BT18.CRADLE CUT AND BENT FROM 25 x 5 FLAT x 90 LONG HANDRAIL 25 90 40 25 M10 x 25 LONG TEK SCREW 2 - DIA 12 HOLES ON ¶ OF CRADLE TO TOP OF DECK 1 000 6 151 14 90% %d 65 21 6 87 211 1 510 1 500 1 510 1 500 211 STEEL MESH SHALL BE AFFIXED TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE AT 300 MAXIMUM CENTRES USING DIA 6 x 50 DYNABOLTS OR EQUIVALENT AND PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL TIES.ELEVATION 0 125 250 500 750mm FORMED RECESSES APPROX 80 DEEP TO ALLOW ADJUSTMENT OF SAFETY SCREEN FRAMES. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET SEE SHEET No 45. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE 100 50 CAD No KP2F311.8 TO AS/NZS 1252 THREAD LENGTH 80 ANCHOR BOLT ASSEMBLY 584 REQUIRED 0 100 200 300mm GENERAL NOTES 0 50 100 150mm A - SCALE 50 25 OR AS SHOWN.7 550 1 - 1 - A ANCHOR BOLT SEE DETAIL FRAME ASSEMBLY . PRODUCT CODE MLT1S-CP CUT FROM 59 x 8 FLAT x 216 LONG DETAIL B 20 THICK MOTAR PAD NAME PLATE 1480 ATTACHMENT PLATE B ON LAST FRAME OR EQUIVALENT.dgn THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.7 DRILL AND TAP 20 140 320 140 20 30 4 HOLES TO SUIT M10 BRASS SCREWS TYP PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS 6 ATTACHMENT PLATE DETAIL 1 REQUIRED 0 100 200 300mm RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: SECTION 1 MANAGER.4 M20 x 200 HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL BOLT PROPERTY CLASS 8. RECESSES SHALL BE FILLED 250 WITH CEMENT GROUT OR MORTAR AND 15 NOM DEEP MORTAR PAD CONSTRUCTED AT BASE PLATE AFTER FINAL ALIGNMENT OF SAFETY SCREEN FRAMES 100 50 DETAIL 130 65 GP ·22 HOLES 220 x 6 PLATE x 320 LONG 20 ATTACHMENT PLATE FOR NAME PLATE 90 65 16 PLATE SAFETY SCREEN FRAME 30 3 ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW FIGURE 31. . 220 90 70 200 24 59 R 1 0 75 5 TYP FRAME BRACKET ARM 2 73 73 5 TYP ¶ OF FRAME VIEW 2 - M20 HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL NUT PROPERTY CLASS 8 TO AS/NZS 1252 FLAT ROUND WASHER FOR HIGH-STRENGTH M20 BOLT TO AS/NZS 1252 M20 ISO METRIC HEXAGON THIN NUT PROPERTY CLASS 04 TO AS 1112. BENT AS REQUIRED 1 233 (TYP) FRAME CUT AND BENT FROM 999 (TYP) 125 BT 18.

4 WIRES AT 50 x 50 SPACING GENERAL NOTES THE HORIZONTAL LEG OF MESH PANELS SHALL BE AFFIXED TO POSTS AT 300mm (MAX) CENTRES USING SMORGAN ARC PRODUCT CODE CLUG OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT SCALE 100 50 0 100 200 300mm OR AS SHOWN. MESH PANEL ISSUE DATE REVISION PREP CHECK AUTH THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND SHALL ONLY BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE OF THE NOMINATED PROJECT.dgn . SHALL BE REMOVED FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. SEE SHEET No 2. BRIDGE DESIGN PROJECTS SHEET No ISSUE CAD No KP2F313. 4 WIRES AT 50 x 50 SPACING 185 4 20(200) 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH STRIP 200 WIDE TO BE FILLET WELDED TO INSIDE FACE 1570 700 OF 50 x 50 x 5 SHS TYPICAL CONNECTION AT INTERMEDIATE POSTS 0 50 100 150mm MESH TERMINATION AT ENDS TYPICAL CONNECTION 50 25 185 TOP STEEL MESH PANEL VANDAL PROOF STAINLESS STEEL SELF DRILLING FASTENERS ALL POSTS SHALL BE FITTED WITH A SUITABLE UV RESISTANT c OF SHS L 250 POLYPROPYLENE CAP 150 LAP .3 185 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH STRIP 200 WIDE WELDED TO INSIDE FACE OF SHS 250 PREPARED BY TYPICAL CONNECTION AT EXPANSION JOINTS 132 0 50 100 150mm BRIDGE ENGINEERING 110 GEORGE STREET PARRAMATTA NSW 2150 PHONE (02) 8837-0802 FACSIMILE (02) 8837-0055 6 50 25 PREPARED DESIGN DRAWING CHECKED REGISTRATION No OF PLANS SECTION ELEVATION 6 - RTA BRIDGE NUMBER ISSUE STATUS: BOTTOM STEEL MESH PANEL DETAIL ?? REQUIRED MANAGER.TYP 5 - SECTION 5 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH PANEL WIRES OF MESH TO BE FIXED USING PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL TIES ELEVATION TOP STEEL MESH PANEL DETAIL ?? REQUIRED FASTENER OR EQUIVALENT BOTTOM STEEL MESH PANEL TOP OF POST BOTTOM OF POST SIMILAR MIDDLE OF POST STEEL MESH PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL AT POST TYPE TPA AND TPB POST TYPE TPA SHOWN POST TYPE TPB SIMILAR 0 50 100 150mm STEEL MESH PANEL ATTACHMENT DETAIL 3000 45 6 - 50 25 PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL 250 TIES AT 300 CTS SPACING OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT FIXED LOOSELY TO ALLOW 185 MOVEMENT OF PANELS THE VERTICAL LEG OF MESH PANELS MAY BE REMOVED LOCALLY AT FIXTURE LOCATION TO ALLOW MOVEMENT. BURRS WITH RTA SPECIFICATION B241. DENOTES END PANELS SHALL BE CUT ON SITE TO SUIT DAMAGED GALVANIZED SURFACES SHALL BE RENOVATED IN ACCORDANCE 1570 700 ROADS AND TRAFFIC AUTHORITY OF NSW FIGURE 31.MESH PANELS SHALL BE AFFIXED TO POSTS 3000 45 PANDUIT STAINLESS STEEL 5 TIES AT 300 CTS SPACING OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT INSIDE FACE OF STRUCTURE END PANELS SHALL BE 250 MESH PANEL 5 CUT ON SITE TO SUIT END STEEL MESH SHEETS SHALL BE FINISHED AS SHOWN AT 300mm (MAX) CENTRES USING SMORGAN ARC PRODUCT CODE CLUG OR SUITABLE EQUIVALENT.

SEE SHEET No 2.0 SHS CUT AND BENT FROM 50 x 50 x 5. TYP 12 VENT HOLE 20 NOMINAL MORTAR PAD 20 NOMINAL PROVIDE NOMINAL SPACER AS REQUIRED AND MORTAR PAD AFTER ERECTION DRILL 24 HOLE FOR AFTER ERECTION NOMINAL 150 EMBEDMENT FOR M20 CHEMSET CARBON STEEL ANCHORS OR M20 HILTI HVA-HAS ANCHORS 100 50 0 100 200 x 50 x 12 P SPACER PLATE MORTAR PAD PROVIDE NOMINAL SPACER AS REQUIRED AND MORTAR PAD DETAIL D 200 300mm TYPICAL RETRO-FIT APPLICATIONS DETAIL A - FIGURE 31.0 SHS x 3238 LONG 6 TYP IP SPACER PLATE 6 TYP x 3090 LONG SPACER PLATE D 12 VENT HOLE 12 VENT HOLE 6 TYP B 4 CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.POST 100 100 1 - POST 1 - POST 100 100 2 - POST 2 - E 4 12 VENT HOLE 6 TYP 12 VENT HOLE SPACER PLATE 12 VENT HOLE 6 TYP 12 VENT HOLE SPACER PLATE SPACER PLATE L 200 x 50 x 12 F CUT AND BENT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 745 LONG POST TYPE ?? REQUIRED POST TYPE ?? REQUIRED VIEW 1 - POST TYPE ?? REQUIRED POST TYPE ?? REQUIRED VIEW 2 - POST TYPES ADJACENT TO FOOTWAYS POST TYPES ADJACENT TO TRAFFIC FACE 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH SAFETY SCREEN INCORPORATING TRANSOM BEAM 50 x 50 x 4 STEEL MESH SAFETY SCREEN INCORPORATING TRANSOM BEAM EXISTING PEDESTRIAN RAILING EXISTING TRAFFIC BARRIER RAILING STEEL MESH SHALL BE AFFIXED TO THE CONCRETE SURFACE AT 300 MAXIMUM CENTRES USING POWERS MUSHROOM HEAD STAINLESS STEEL SPIKES SCALE: 6.0 SHS x 310 LONG 125 125 SEE DETAIL 500 2 250 2 - ANCHOR PLATE SEE DETAIL CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.4 500mm 0 100 200 300 400 100 50 CAD No KP2F3122 .0 SHS x 3310 LONG SPACER PLATE L 200 x 50 x 12 F CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.0 SHS x 1533 LONG 6 TYP C 4 TYP 6 TYP 6 ANCHOR PLATE 1 350 125 125 100 1 CUT FROM 50 x 50 x 5.5 x 50 LONG AND STAINLESS STEEL STRAPS. FOR OTHER GENERAL NOTES RELATING TO THIS SHEET. BENT AS REQUIRED AND WITH LENGTH TO SUIT CORNER POINT IP 200 100 0 200 400 600 800 1000mm GENERAL NOTES OR AS SHOWN. 20MM WIDE x 2MM THICK WITH SHAPE SIMILAR TO SMORGON ARC PRODUCT CODE CLUG.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful